all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 |
|
Users Manual 1 | Users Manual | 2.74 MiB | ||||
1 2 |
|
Users Manual 2 | Users Manual | 1.74 MiB | ||||
1 2 |
|
Users Manual 3 | Users Manual | 1.72 MiB | ||||
1 2 |
|
Users Manual 4 | Users Manual | 1.64 MiB | ||||
1 2 | Attestation Statements | |||||||
1 2 | Attestation Statements | |||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 | External Photos | |||||||
1 2 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 | Test Setup Photos |
1 2 | Users Manual 1 | Users Manual | 2.74 MiB |
. TS-890S INSTRUCTION MANUAL
. B5A-2215-00 (K, E)
. BEFORE USING Thank You Thank you for choosing this KENWOOD TS-890S transceiver. FEATURES A high-end and practical transceiver with basic reception Top-class basic reception performance performance that exceeds its class, with multiple functions and with a feel of TS-990 Incorporates a 7" TFT color display for comfortable centralized control of operations using various information: auto scroll mode, filter scope, TX bar meter, etc. Provides third-order intermodulation DR: 110 dB, RMDR: 112 dB and BDR**: 150 dB (Measurement example at 2 kHz detuning: RX frequency 14.2 MHz, MODE CW, BW 500 Hz, PRE AMP OFF)
*RMDR (Reciprocal Mixing Dynamic Range), **BDR (Blocking Dynamic Range) HF band +50 MHz 100 W heavy duty output power (50 W for TS-890D) Built-in automatic antenna tuner (relay system, high speed SSB, CW, FSK (RTTY), PSK31 (BPSK/QPSK), PSK63 (BPSK), Capable of FSK, PSK31/63 as well as CW decoding/encoding Equipped with two 32-bit floating-point arithmetic DSPs for Equipped with LAN, USB and COM ports External display connection (via DVI-I connector) Capable of remote control operation (direct IP connection) transmission and reception and scope display matching) AM, FM without using a host PC. Radio Control Program (ARCP-890) and Radio Host Program (ARHP-890) are also provided free as before Supports USB audio. The speaker and the microphone of a PC can be used during the USB audio operation by using ARUA-10
(Freeware) Supplied Accessories The following accessories are supplied with the transceiver. After carefully unpacking the transceiver, identify the accessories listed in the table. Item DC power cable 7-pin DIN plug
(For REMOTE connector) 13-pin DIN plug
(For ACC2 connector) Fuse 4 A Fuse 25 A Instruction Manual Schematic diagram Warranty Card Quantity K-type E-type 1 1 1 1 English French Spanish Italian German Dutch 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 BEFORE USING
: The Americas
: Europe Market Codes K-type:
E-type:
The market code is shown on the carton box. Refer to the specifications for information on the available operating frequencies. Copyrights for This Manual JVC KENWOOD Corporation shall own all copyrights and other intellectual properties for the product and the software and for all manuals and documents attached to the product and the software. A user is required to obtain approval from JVC KENWOOD corporation, in writing, prior to redistributing this document on a personal web page or via packet communication. A user is prohibited from assigning, renting, leasing or reselling the document. JVC KENWOOD Corporation does not warrant that quality and functions described in this manual comply with each users purpose of use and, unless specifically described in this manual, JVC KENWOOD Corporation shall be free from any responsibility for any defects and indemnities for any damages or losses. Software Copyrights The title to and ownership of copyrights for software, including but not limited to the firmware that may be distributed individually, to be embedded in KENWOOD product memories, are reserved for JVC KENWOOD Corporation. Any modifying, reverse engineering, copying, reproducing or disclosing on an Internet website of the software is strictly prohibited. A user is required to obtain approval from JVC KENWOOD corporation, in writing, prior to redistributing this manual on a personal web page or via packet communication. Furthermore, any reselling, assigning or transferring of the software is also strictly prohibited without embedding the software in KENWOOD product memories. Software License Agreement Software License Agreement contains the terms and conditions of use of the software embedded in or used with the transceiver. A user is entitled to use the software subject to the acceptance and agreement of this Software License Agreement by the user. Also, this Software License Agreement stipulates the terms and conditions of use of this software embedded in or used with the transceiver, and a user has the right to use the transceiver with the software embedded subject to the applicable laws and regulations, the description and defined in this manual and the warranty card. The Software License Agreement can be displayed in the menu below. (Refer to Chapter 3 for operation of menu.) Advanced menu [24] Software License Agreement We recommend you keep the box and packing materials in case you need to repack the transceiver in the future. Do not put the plastic bag used for packing of this equipment on the place which reaches a small childs hand. It will become a cause of suffocation if it wears flatly. i JVC KENWOOD Corporation is entirely free from any Indemnity JVC KENWOOD Corporation takes all appropriate measures to ensure all descriptions in this manual are accurate; however, this manual may still contain typographical errors (typos) and expressions that are misleading. JVC KENWOOD Corporation is entirely free from any responsibilities arising from any losses or damages caused by such typos or expressions. JVC KENWOOD Corporation has the right to change or improve the product specifications, etc., described in this manual without prior notice. JVC KENWOOD Corporation is entirely free from any responsibilities for any losses or damages caused by such changes and improvements. responsibilities for any failures, damages or losses arising from, or in connection with, use of the transceiver with or connected to any external equipment. JVC KENWOOD Corporation does not warrant that the quality and functions described in this manual comply with your purpose of use and, unless specifically described in this manual, JVC KENWOOD Corporation shall be free from any responsibilities for any defects and indemnities for any damages or losses. Selection and installation of any external equipment shall be done at your own risk. You are fully responsible for the use and effects of external equipment. responsibilities for any incidental losses or damages, such as missing communications or call opportunities caused by a failure or performance error of the transceiver. JVC KENWOOD Corporation shall be free from any Your Queries about External Devices or PC Connected to the Transceiver JVC KENWOOD Corporation are pleased to answer, within the scope of corporate efforts we can provide, your queries about your operation of this transceiver. Please bear in mind that we cannot answer any and all technical questions regarding methods of connection to, configuration for and operation of any external device and PC beyond our knowledge. Handling Your Important Data There is always a risk of losing your important data due to transceiver failure, occurrence of an unforeseen contingency, erroneous operation or faulty behavior of the transceiver. The data, such as the operating information, recorded audio, messages, configuration data, logs, etc., must be backed up as necessary by yourself and stored in the external storage device such as a USB flash drive. BEFORE USING Important Notices Concerning the Software License Agreement The software embedded in this transceiver consists of a multiple number of and individual software components. Title to and ownership of copyrights for each software component is reserved for JVC KENWOOD Corporation and the respective bona fide holder. This product employs the software component in accordance with the End User License Agreement (hereinafter referred to as the EULA) stipulated by JVC KENWOOD Corporation and/or the respective bona fide holder. There is free software stipulated and governed by the EULA, and this, a distribution condition of the software component in the executable format under the terms and conditions contained in the GNU General Public License or Lesser General Public License
(hereinafter referred to as the GPL/LGPL), requires to make the source code for the relevant software components available. Access the URL below for details of the software component stipulated in the GPL/LPGL. http://www2.jvckenwood.com/gpl/index.html Important notice about software can be displayed in the menu below. (Refer to Chapter 3 for operation of menu.) Advanced menu [25] Important Notices concerning Free Open Source About the GPL/ LPGL License The GPL / LGPL license agreement can be displayed in the menu below. (Refer to Chapter 3 for operation of menu.) Advanced menu [26] About Various Software License Agreements This product includes Ubiquitous QuickBoot technology developed by Ubiquitous Corp. Ubiquitous QuickBoot is a trademark of Ubiquitous Corp. Copyright 2018 Ubiquitous Corp. All rights reserved. Copyrights for Recorded Audio The broadcast content recorded in this transceiver may not be reused, except for the personal use, without prior consent of the right holder under the copyright laws. Trademarks KENWOOD is a registered trade mark of JVC KENWOOD Corporation. All other product names referenced herein are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective manufacturers. Marks such as and are omitted in the text of body. ii Precautions Please observe the following precautions to prevent fire, personal injury, and transceiver damage:
Connect the transceiver only to a power source as described in this manual or as marked on the transceiver itself. Route all power cables safely. Ensure the power cables can neither be stepped upon nor pinched by items placed near or against the cables. Pay particular attention to locations near AC receptacles, AC outlet strips, and points of entry to the transceiver. Take care not to drop objects or spill liquid into the transceiver through enclosure openings. Metal objects, such as hairpins or needles, inserted into the transceiver may contact voltages resulting in serious electrical shocks. Never permit children to insert any objects into the transceiver. electrical polarization in the transceiver, particularly involving the power input cable. Adequately ground all outdoor antennas for this transceiver using approved methods. Grounding helps protect against voltage surges caused by lightning. It also reduces the chance of a buildup of static charge. Do not attempt to defeat methods used for grounding and
. Minimum recommended distance for an outdoor antenna from power lines is one and onehalf times the vertical height of the associated antenna support structure. This distance allows adequate clearance from the power lines if the support structure fails for any reason. Locate the transceiver so as not to interfere with its ventilation. Do not place books or other equipment on the transceiver that may impede the free movement of air. Allow a minimum of 10 cm (4 inches) between the rear of the transceiver and the wall or operating desk shelf. Do not use the transceiver near water or sources of moisture. For example, avoid use near a bathtub, sink, swimming pool, or in a damp basement or attic. The presence of an unusual odor or smoke is often a sign of trouble. Immediately turn the power OFF and remove the power cable. Contact a KENWOOD service station or your dealer for advice. BEFORE USING Locate the transceiver away from heat sources such as a Do not use volatile solvents such as alcohol, paint thinner, radiator, stove, amplifier or other devices that produce substantial amounts of heat. gasoline, or benzene to clean the cabinet of the transceiver. Use only a clean cloth with warm water or a mild detergent. Disconnect the input power cable from the power source when the transceiver is not used for long periods of time. Remove the transceivers enclosure only to do accessory installations described in this manual or accessory manuals. Follow provided instructions carefully, to avoid electrical shocks. If unfamiliar with this type of work, seek assistance from an experienced individual, or have a professional technician do the task. Enlist the services of qualified personnel in the following cases:
transceiver. a) The power supply or plug is damaged. b) Objects have fallen into or liquid has spilled into the c) The transceiver has been exposed to rain. d) The transceiver is operating abnormally or performance has e) The transceiver has been dropped or the enclosure seriously degraded. damaged. Do not place the unit in excessively dusty and/or humid areas, nor on unstable surfaces. HF/ 50/ 70 MHz mobile antennas are larger and heavier than VHF/ UHF antennas. Therefore, use a strong and rigid mount to safely and securely install the HF/ 50/ 70 MHz mobile antenna. Do not put the plastic bag used for packing of this equipment on the place which reaches a small childs hand. It will become a cause of suffocation if it wears flatly. In explosive atmospheres (inflammable gas, dust particles, metallic powders, grain powders, etc.) Turn the transceiver power off in the following locations:
When using this product in a cold region or when the About Liquid Crystal Display Brightness of the LCD screen may appear uneven depending The LCD is manufactured using high-density technology to on the content displayed. This is not a malfunction. achieve more than 99.99 % of effective pixels. Less than 0.01 % of the pixels may not be lit or may remain lit all the time. This is not a malfunction. temperature of this unit or its surroundings is extremely low, it may take a few minutes for the LCD to reach the normal level of brightness after turning on the power. This is not a malfunction. When this occurs, turn off the power and allow the surrounding environment to reach the ambient temperature
(10 to 30 or 32F to 86F) before using the unit. If you accidentally damaged the LCD display and the liquid in the LCD display splashes and gets into your eyes or mouth, rinse thoroughly with water immediately and seek medical attention. And if the liquid splashes on your clothes or skin, wipe off immediately with alcohol etc. Leaving it as is will harm your skin or damage your clothes. iii EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDINGANTENNALEAD INWIREGROUNDCLAMPELECTRIC SERVICEEQUIPMENTANTENNADISCHARGE UNITGROUNDINGCONDUCTORSGROUND CLAMPSPOWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM Information on Disposal of Old Electrical and Electronic Equipment and Batteries (applicable for countries that have adopted separate waste collection systems) Products and batteries with the symbol
(crossed-out wheeled bin) cannot be disposed as household waste. Old electrical and electronic equipment and batteries should be recycled at a facility capable of handling these items and their waste byproducts. Contact your local authority for details in locating a recycle facility nearest to you. Proper recycling and waste disposal will help conserve resources whilst preventing detrimental effects on our health and the environment. Firmware Copyrights The title to and ownership of copyrights for firmware embedded in KENWOOD product memories are reserved for JVC KENWOOD Corporation. Bu rn 28300 sayl Resmi Gazetede yaymlanan Atik Elektrikli ve Elektronik Eyalarin Kontrol Ynetmelie uygun olarak retilmitir. Eski Elektrikli ve Elektronik Cihazlarn ve Pillerin mhas Hakknda Bilgi (ayr atk toplama sistemlerine sahip olan lkelerde geerlidir) Bu sembol (zeri izili p bidonu) ieren rn ve piller evsel at k pleri ile birlikte atlamaz. Kullanlm elektrikli ve elektronik cihaz ve piller, bu tr maddeleri ve bunlarn yan rnlerini i lemeye elverili bir geri kazanm tesisine gnderilmelidir. Size en yakn geri kazanm tesisinin konumunu renmek zere yerel yetkililerinize dann. Doru geri kazanm ve atk uzaklatrma y ntemleri, sadece z kaynaklarn korunmasna yardmc olmakla kalmayp ayrca salmza ve evreye olacak zararl etkilerini engellemeye yardmc olur. This device complies with Industry Canada license exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions :
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. BEFORE USING Notice to the User One or more of the following statements may be applicable for this equipment. FCC WARNING This equipment generates or uses radio frequency energy. Changes or modifications to this equipment may cause harmful interference unless the modifications are expressly approved by the party responsible/ JVC KENWOOD. The user could lose the authority to operate this equipment if an unauthorized change or modification is made. INFORMATION TO THE DIGITAL DEVICE USER REQUIRED BY THE FCC This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can generate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that the interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from Consult the dealer for technical assistance. This product is designed for connection to an IT power distribution system. Notification This equipment complies with the essential requirements of Directive 2014/53/EU. receiver. that to which the receiver is connected. Restrictions This equipment requires a licence and is intended for use in the countries below. AT IT GB SK BE LI CY SI DK LU CZ BG FI NL EE RO FR NO HU HR DE PT LV TR GR ES LT IS SE MT IE CH PL ISO3166 iv CONTENTS BEFORE USING CONTENTS 1 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION Installation .......................................................................................... 1-1 Antenna Installation and Connection .............................................. 1-1 Ground Connection ......................................................................... 1-1 Installation of Lightning Arrestors .................................................... 1-1 Connection of Regulated DC Power Supply ................................... 1-1 Using the Auxiliary Support ............................................................. 1-1 Torque Adjustment with Tuning Control .............................................. 1-2 Connection of Accessories (Front Panel) ........................................... 1-2 Connection of Accessories (Rear Panel) ............................................ 1-3 Connection with Data Communication Equipment .............................. 1-4 PC Connection ................................................................................ 1-4 TNC Connection ............................................................................. 1-4 Terminal Descriptions ......................................................................... 1-5 2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS Front Panel ......................................................................................... 2-1 Panel Key Behavior ......................................................................... 2-1 List of Function Key Behaviors (Standard Mode Screen) ................ 2-4 Rear Panel .......................................................................................... 2-7 Microphone (Optional) ........................................................................ 2-8 Screen ................................................................................................ 2-9 3 MENU Menu Operation .................................................................................. 3-1 Calling Up a Menu ........................................................................... 3-1 Calling Up a Sub-Menu ................................................................... 3-1 Advanced Menu .......................................................................... 3-1 Common Menu Screen Operations ................................................. 3-2 Exiting the Menu .......................................................................... 3-2 Switching between the CONFIG A and CONFIG B Operating Environments .................................................................................. 3-2 Menu Items ..................................................................................... 3-3 4 BASIC OPERATIONS Turning ON/OFF the Power ................................................................ 4-1 Screen Display Settings ..................................................................... 4-1 Changing the Background Color ..................................................... 4-1 Changing the Type of Function Key Display ................................... 4-1 Changing the Frequency Display Font Type ................................... 4-1 Dimmer ............................................................................................... 4-2 Switching the Brightness Level ....................................................... 4-2 Adjusting the Dimmer Level ............................................................ 4-2 Adjusting AF Gain ............................................................................... 4-2 Adjusting RF Gain ............................................................................... 4-2 Adjusting the Squelch Level ............................................................... 4-2 Selecting VFO A/ B ............................................................................. 4-2 Selecting an Operating Band .............................................................. 4-3 Changing the Number of Band Memories ....................................... 4-3 Selecting an Operating Mode ............................................................. 4-4 SSB (LSB-USB) Mode .................................................................... 4-4 CW/ CW-R Mode ............................................................................ 4-4 FSK/ FSK-R/ PSK/ PSK-R Mode .................................................... 4-4 FM/ AM Mode ................................................................................. 4-4 DATA Mode .................................................................................... 4-4 Auto Mode .......................................................................................... 4-4 Turning ON/OFF Auto Mode ........................................................... 4-4 Configuring Auto Mode Frequency Points ....................................... 4-4 Adjustment of Frequencies ................................................................. 4-5 Adjustment Using the Tuning Control .............................................. 4-5 Adjustment Using the Microphone Key ........................................... 4-5 FINE Tuning .................................................................................... 4-5 CONTENTS Configuring the Number of Steps per Revolution of the Tuning Control
......................................................................................................... 4-5 Configuring the Fast Forward Rate of the Tuning Control ............... 4-5 Configuring the Sensitivity for Starting the Fast Forward Operation 4-5 Frequency Adjustment Using the [MULTI/CH] Control .................... 4-6 Rounding the Frequency ............................................................. 4-6 Configuring the Frequency Step Size of the [MULTI/CH] Control 4-6 Switching the AM Broadcast Frequency in 9 kHz Steps .............. 4-6 Adjusting Frequency in MHz Steps ................................................. 4-6 Configuring the Frequency Step Size in MHz .............................. 4-6 Direct Input of Frequency Value ...................................................... 4-6 Frequency Input History .................................................................. 4-7 Frequency Lock .............................................................................. 4-7 Lock Target ................................................................................. 4-7 Transmission ...................................................................................... 4-7 Audio Transmission ........................................................................ 4-7 CW Transmission ............................................................................ 4-7 Adjusting Microphone Gain ............................................................. 4-7 Adjusting TX Output Power ............................................................. 4-8 Fine Adjustment of TX Output Power .............................................. 4-8 TX Output Power Limiter .................................................................... 4-8 Turning ON/OFF TX Output Power Limiter ...................................... 4-8 Configuring the TX Output Power Limiter ........................................ 4-8 Meter .................................................................................................. 4-9 Changing the Meter Type ................................................................ 4-9 Changing the Meter Type from the Menu .................................... 4-9 Changing the Meter Type via Touchscreen Operation ................ 4-9 Switching between TX Meters ........................................................ 4-9 FM Mode S-meter Sensitivity .......................................................... 4-9 Analog Meter Response ................................................................. 4-9 Meter with Peak Hold ...................................................................... 4-9 S Meter Scale ................................................................................. 4-9 TX Meter (Digital) .......................................................................... 4-10 Switching the Antenna ...................................................................... 4-10 RX Antenna ...................................................................................... 4-10 Drive Output (DRV) ........................................................................... 4-10 Turning ON/OFF Drive Output ...................................................... 4-10 Adjusting the Drive Output Level ............................................... 4-10 Built-in Antenna Tuner ...................................................................... 4-11 Impedance Matching with the Antenna ......................................... 4-11 Preset ........................................................................................... 4-11 Holding Transmission at the End of Antenna Tuning .................... 4-11 Switching Antenna Tuner Behavior during Reception ................... 4-12 Configuring the Built-in Antenna Tuner Behavior for Each Band ... 4-12 Connecting the External Antenna Tuner AT-300 ........................... 4-12 5 COMMUNICATING AIDS Split Operation .................................................................................... 5-1 Direct Input of Frequency Difference Specified by DX Station ........ 5-1 Turning the Tuning Control to Search for a TX Frequency .............. 5-1 F Display ...................................................................................... 5-1 Changing the split frequency using the [RIT/XIT] control ................. 5-1 Configuring the Band Direct Key during Split Operation ................. 5-1 TF-SET (Setting the TX Frequency) ................................................ 5-2 AGC .................................................................................................... 5-2 Switching the AGC Time Constant .................................................. 5-2 Adjusting the AGC Time Constant Preset Value ............................. 5-2 AGC OFF ........................................................................................ 5-3 AGC Quick Recovery ...................................................................... 5-3 RX Equalizer ....................................................................................... 5-4 Turning ON/OFF RX Equalizer ........................................................ 5-4 Selecting an RX Equalizer Characteristic ........................................ 5-4 Adjusting the Equalizer Characteristics ........................................... 5-4 Copying Equalizer Data .................................................................. 5-4 Saving Equalizer Data ..................................................................... 5-5 Reading Equalizer Data .................................................................. 5-5 v CONTENTS Preamplifier ........................................................................................ 5-6 RX Monitor ......................................................................................... 5-6 SWL (BCL) Mode ............................................................................... 5-6 Band Switching in the SWL Mode (VFO Mode) .............................. 5-6 Transmission in Data Mode ................................................................ 5-7 Transmission via PTT Switch, SS Terminal and SEND ................... 5-7 Transmission via DATA PTT or DATA SEND .................................. 5-7 RIT/XIT ............................................................................................... 5-7 RIT (Receiver Incremental Tuning) ................................................. 5-7 RIT Shift ...................................................................................... 5-7 XIT (Transmitter Incremental Tuning) .............................................. 5-7 XIT Shift ....................................................................................... 5-7 Adjusting the Carrier Level ................................................................. 5-8 Operation in CW Mode ....................................................................... 5-8 CW Break-in ................................................................................... 5-8 Turning ON/OFF Break-in ........................................................... 5-8 Adjusting the Break-in Mode and Break-in Delay Time ............... 5-9 Adjusting the Sidetone and Pitch Frequency .................................. 5-9 Adjusting the Sidetone Volume ................................................... 5-9 CW Rise Time ................................................................................. 5-9 Auto Zero-in (CW Auto Tune) ......................................................... 5-9 CW BFO Sideband ......................................................................... 5-9 CW Automatic Transmission from SSB Mode ................................. 5-9 Frequency Offset when Shifting from SSB to CW Mode ............... 5-10 Encoding/Decoding Morse Code ...................................................... 5-10 Displaying the CW Communication Screen .................................. 5-10 Operating the CW Communication Screen ................................ 5-10 Indicator Displays ...................................................................... 5-10 Adjusting the Decode Threshold Level ......................................... 5-11 Decode Filter ................................................................................ 5-11 Transmitting Character Strings via USB Keyboard Operation ....... 5-11 Encoding Character Strings Using the CW Message Memory ...... 5-12 Paddle Operation on CW Communication Screen ........................ 5-12 Paddle Operation when the TX Details Display Area is Empty .. 5-12 Paddle Operation during Encoding of Character Strings in the TX Details Display Area .................................................................. 5-12 Saving CW Communication Logs ................................................. 5-12 Electronic Keyer ............................................................................... 5-13 Selecting the PADDLE Jack Behavior ........................................... 5-13 Selecting the KEY Jack Behavior .................................................. 5-13 Operation Mode of the Electronic Keyer ....................................... 5-13 Reversing Dot and Dash ............................................................... 5-13 Mic Paddle Mode .......................................................................... 5-13 Adjusting the Keying Speed .......................................................... 5-13 Changing the Weighting ................................................................ 5-14 Weight Ratio Reverse ............................................................... 5-14 CW Message Memory ...................................................................... 5-14 Switching the Method of Registering CW Messages .................... 5-14 Registering CW Messages via Text Input ..................................... 5-14 Registering CW Messages via Paddle Operation ......................... 5-15 Contest Number ............................................................................ 5-15 Configuring the Starting Contest Number (Text Input Only) ....... 5-15 Selecting a Method for Sending out Contest Number (Text Input Only) .......................................................................................... 5-15 Selecting a Channel for Counting up the Contest Numbers (Text Input Only) .......................................................................................... 5-16 Decrementing the Contest Number (Text Input Only) ................ 5-16 Playing/Transmitting CW Messages ............................................. 5-16 Repeat Playback of CW Messages ........................................... 5-16 Configuring the Repeat Playback Interval .................................. 5-17 Interrupt Keying ............................................................................. 5-17 Deleting a CW Message ............................................................... 5-17 RTTY Operation ............................................................................... 5-17 Displaying the RTTY Communication Screen ............................... 5-17 Switching between the FFT Scope and X-Y Scope Display ...... 5-17 Operating the RTTY Encode/Decode Screen ........................... 5-18 Indicator Displays ...................................................................... 5-18 vi Saving RTTY Communication Logs .............................................. 5-18 Adjusting the RTTY Decode Threshold Level ............................... 5-18 FFT Scope/X-Y Scope Display Setting ......................................... 5-18 FFT Scope Waveform Averaging .............................................. 5-18 Selecting a Waterfall Display Type ............................................ 5-19 Tracking Speed/Density Level of X-Y Scope ............................. 5-19 Transmitting Character Strings Using USB Keyboard ................... 5-19 Transmitting the Input Character String Immediately ................. 5-19 Temporarily Placing Character Strings in the TX Details Display Area before Transmission .................................................................. 5-19 RTTY Message Memory ................................................................... 5-20 Registering RTTY Messages ........................................................ 5-20 Configuring Auto TX/RX for the RTTY Message Memory ............. 5-20 Transmitting Character Strings from the RTTY Message Memory 5-21 Settings Related to RTTY Encode/Decode ................................... 5-21 Enabling Decode UOS (Unshift on Space) ................................ 5-21 Newline Code Setting ................................................................ 5-21 Diddle Operation ....................................................................... 5-21 Encode UOS ............................................................................. 5-21 Sending a Newline Code at the Start or End of a Transmission 5-21 RTTY Parameters ......................................................................... 5-21 Configuring the Mark Frequency ............................................... 5-21 Configuring the RTTY Shift Width .............................................. 5-21 Frequency Reverse in RTTY Mode ........................................... 5-22 Operating RTTY Using an External Device ................................... 5-22 ACC 2 Keying Polarity Setting ................................................... 5-22 Audio Peak Filter ....................................................................... 5-22 PSK Operation .................................................................................. 5-22 Displaying the PSK Communication Screen ................................. 5-22 Switching between the FFT Scope and Vectorscope Display ... 5-22 Operating the PSK Communication Screen .............................. 5-23 Indicator Displays ...................................................................... 5-23 Saving PSK Communication Logs ................................................ 5-23 Adjusting the PSK Decode Threshold Level ................................. 5-23 FFT Scope/Vectorscope Display Setting ...................................... 5-24 FFT Scope Waveform Averaging .............................................. 5-24 Selecting a Waterfall Display Type ............................................ 5-24 Vectorscope .............................................................................. 5-24 AFC (Automatic Frequency Control) ............................................. 5-24 Configuring the AFC Tuning Range ........................................... 5-24 NET ........................................................................................... 5-24 Switching between BPSK and QPSK ............................................ 5-24 Switching between PSK31 and PSK63 ......................................... 5-25 Transmitting Character Strings from USB Keyboard ..................... 5-25 Transmitting the Input Character String Immediately ................. 5-25 Temporarily Placing Character Strings in the Character String Buffer before Transmission .................................................................. 5-25 PSK Message Memory ..................................................................... 5-26 Registering Messages .................................................................. 5-26 Configuring Auto TX/RX for the PSK Message Memory ............... 5-26 Transmitting Character Strings from the PSK Message Memory .. 5-27 Settings Related to PSK ................................................................ 5-27 Configuring the PSK Tone Frequency ....................................... 5-27 Reversing the Direction of Phase Change in the QPSK Mode .. 5-27 PSK Operation Using a PC ........................................................ 5-27 Communication Log ......................................................................... 5-27 Selecting a Log File Format .......................................................... 5-27 Displaying a Time Stamp .............................................................. 5-28 Selecting a Time Stamp Type ................................................... 5-28 Selecting a Clock Type .............................................................. 5-28 Editing the Communication Log File .............................................. 5-28 Operation in FM Mode ...................................................................... 5-28 Adjusting Microphone Gain during Operation in FM Mode ........... 5-28 Operation in Narrow FM Mode ...................................................... 5-29 Operating the FM Repeater .......................................................... 5-29 Configuring the Tone Signal .......................................................... 5-29 Selecting a Tone ....................................................................... 5-29 Configuring the Tone Frequency ............................................... 5-29 Tone Frequency Scan ............................................................... 5-29 CTCSS Operation ......................................................................... 5-30 Selecting CTCSS ...................................................................... 5-30 Configuring the CTCSS Frequency ........................................... 5-30 CTCSS Frequency Scan ........................................................... 5-30 Cross Tone ................................................................................... 5-30 Selecting Cross Tone ................................................................ 5-30 Configuring the TX/RX Tones .................................................... 5-30 6 REJECTING INTERFERENCE Attenuator ........................................................................................... 6-1 Switching the IF Filter Band Characteristics ....................................... 6-1 Switching the RX Filter (A, B, C) ..................................................... 6-1 Configuring the Selectable Types of RX Filters ........................... 6-1 Filter Scope ..................................................................................... 6-1 RX Filter Screen ................................................................................. 6-2 Displaying the RX Filter Screen ...................................................... 6-2 Selecting a Roofing Filter ................................................................ 6-2 Switching the IF Filter Shape .......................................................... 6-2 Switching the AF Filter Type ........................................................... 6-2 Configuring the Behavior of the HI/SHIFT and LO/WIDTH Controls
(SSB/SSB-DATA Only) ................................................................... 6-2 Changing the Cutoff Frequency ...................................................... 6-3 Changing the Passband Width and Shift Amount ........................... 6-3 Preset Passband Characteristics .................................................... 6-4 Audio Peak Filter in the CW Mode ...................................................... 6-4 Turning ON/OFF Audio Peak Filter ................................................. 6-4 Displaying the Audio Peak Filter Screen ......................................... 6-4 Switching the Passband Characteristics ......................................... 6-4 Shifting the Passband Width ........................................................... 6-4 Configuring the Peak Gain .............................................................. 6-4 Audio Peak Filter in the FSK Mode ..................................................... 6-5 Noise Blanker ..................................................................................... 6-5 Turning ON/OFF Noise Blanker 1/2 ................................................ 6-5 Adjusting the NB1 Level .................................................................. 6-5 NB2 ................................................................................................. 6-6 Configuring the NB2 Effect Level (Type A)/ NB2 Pulse Sensitivity Level (Type B) ............................................................................. 6-6 Configuring the Blanking Duration (Type B Only) ........................ 6-6 Configuring the NB2 Attenuation Level (Type B Only) ................. 6-6 Notch Filter ......................................................................................... 6-6 Turning ON/OFF Notch Filter .......................................................... 6-6 Switching the Notch Filter Bandwidth .............................................. 6-7 Noise Reduction ................................................................................. 6-7 Turning ON/OFF Noise Reduction .................................................. 6-7 Configuring the NR1 Effect Level .................................................... 6-7 Configuring the NR2 Correlation Time ............................................ 6-7 Beat Canceler ..................................................................................... 6-8 Turning ON/OFF Beat Canceler ...................................................... 6-8 DSP Monitor ....................................................................................... 6-8 Assigning DSP Monitor to PF Key ................................................... 6-8 Expanding the Passband Width Using DSP Monitor ....................... 6-8 7 SCOPE FUNCTIONS Bandscope ......................................................................................... 7-1 Displaying the Bandscope .............................................................. 7-1 Switching the Bandscope Display Type ...................................... 7-1 Adjusting the Reference Level ........................................................ 7-1 Configuring the Speed of Waterfall Drop ......................................... 7-1 Waterfall Display during Tuning (Center Mode) .............................. 7-2 Reduced Bandscope Display .......................................................... 7-2 Switching the Scope Display Mode ................................................. 7-2 Switching the Display Frequency Span ........................................... 7-2 Selecting Relative or Absolute Frequency Display for the Grid (Center Mode) ............................................................................................. 7-2 CONTENTS Marker Shift ..................................................................................... 7-2 Shifting the Marker ...................................................................... 7-2 Changing the Shift Position of Marker Shift ................................. 7-3 Expand ............................................................................................ 7-3 Scope Range of Each Band (Fixed Mode) ...................................... 7-3 Switching the Scope Range ........................................................ 7-3 Configuring the Scope Range ..................................................... 7-3 Marker Centering ............................................................................ 7-4 Notification on Exceeding of Lower or Upper Limit .......................... 7-4 Displaying Tuning Assist Line (SSB Only) ....................................... 7-4 Touchscreen Tuning ....................................................................... 7-4 Turning ON/OFF Touchscreen Tuning ........................................ 7-4 Configuring the Gradation of the Waterfall ................................... 7-4 Touchscreen Tuning Correction .................................................. 7-5 Step Correction ........................................................................... 7-5 Marker Display ................................................................................ 7-5 Registering a Marker ................................................................... 7-5 Deleting a Registered Frequency ................................................ 7-5 Turning ON/OFF Marker Function ............................................... 7-5 Displaying the Maximum Value in the Waveform ............................ 7-5 Turning ON/OFF Maximum Value Display ................................... 7-5 Configuring the Hold Type ........................................................... 7-5 Pausing the Waveform Display ....................................................... 7-6 Averaging of Bandscope Waveform ............................................... 7-6 Switching the Bandscope Attenuator .............................................. 7-6 Displaying the TX Signal Waveform ................................................ 7-6 Audio Scope ....................................................................................... 7-6 Displaying the Audio Scope ............................................................ 7-6 Switching the Audio Scope Display Type .................................... 7-6 Switching the Audio Scope Attenuator ............................................ 7-7 Switching the Display Frequency Span of the Audio Scope ............ 7-7 Switching the Oscilloscope Level .................................................... 7-7 Switching the Sweep Time .............................................................. 7-7 Pausing the Audio Scope ................................................................ 7-7 8 TRANSMIT FUNCTIONS Configuration of the Input Path of TX Audio ........................................ 8-1 Switching the Audio Source Input ................................................... 8-1 VOX (Voice-Operated Transmit) ......................................................... 8-1 Turing ON/OFF VOX Function ........................................................ 8-1 Selecting Audio Source Input for Data VOX .................................... 8-1 VOX Configuration Screen .............................................................. 8-2 Adjusting VOX Gain .................................................................... 8-2 Adjusting the Anti VOX Gain Level .............................................. 8-2 Adjusting VOX Delay Time .......................................................... 8-2 VOX Voice Delay ............................................................................ 8-2 TX Monitor .......................................................................................... 8-3 Adjusting the TX Monitor Level ....................................................... 8-3 Speech Processor .............................................................................. 8-3 Turning ON/OFF Speech Processor ............................................... 8-3 Speech Processor Configuration Screen ........................................ 8-3 Configuring the Speech Processor Input Level ............................ 8-4 Configuring the Speech Processor Output Level ......................... 8-4 Configuring the Speech Processor Effect .................................... 8-4 TX Filter .............................................................................................. 8-4 Displaying the Filter Scope during Transmission ............................ 8-4 Changing the TX Filter Bandwidth ................................................... 8-5 Configuring the Low Cutoff Frequency in the SSB/AM Mode ...... 8-5 Configuring the High Cutoff Frequency in the SSB/AM Mode ..... 8-5 Configuring the Low Cutoff Frequency in the SSB-DATA/AM-DATA Mode ........................................................................................... 8-5 Configuring the High Cutoff Frequency in the SSB-DATA/AM-DATA Mode ........................................................................................... 8-5 TX Equalizer ....................................................................................... 8-5 Turning ON/OFF TX Equalizer ........................................................ 8-5 Selecting a Frequency Characteristic for the TX Equalizer ............. 8-5 vii CONTENTS Adjusting the TX Equalizer .............................................................. 8-6 Copying the TX Equalizer Settings .................................................. 8-6 Saving the TX Equalizer Settings .................................................... 8-6 Reading the TX Equalizer Settings ................................................. 8-7 TX Tuning ........................................................................................... 8-7 Adjusting TX Output Power during TX Tuning ................................. 8-7 Timeout Timer (TOT) .......................................................................... 8-8 ID Beep .............................................................................................. 8-8 9 MEMORY CHANNELS Displaying the Memory Channel List .................................................. 9-1 Registering Operating Frequency Data to a Memory Channel ........ 9-2 Configuring the Operating Data through Direct Frequency Entry .... 9-2 Memory Channel Mode ...................................................................... 9-2 Operating in the Memory Channel Mode ........................................ 9-2 Direct Entry of a Memory Channel Number ................................. 9-2 Changing the Memory Channel Temporarily ................................... 9-3 Changing the Frequency Temporarily ......................................... 9-3 Copying the Operating Data of a Memory Channel ............................ 9-3 Memory Shift (Memory VFO) ....................................................... 9-3 Selecting a Memory Channel and Copying to VFO ..................... 9-3 Copying Data from the Memory Channel List Screen to VFO ...... 9-3 Channel-to-Channel Copying .......................................................... 9-3 Configuring the Program Scan Frequency Range .............................. 9-4 Erasing Memory Channels ................................................................. 9-4 Registering a Memory Channel Name ................................................ 9-4 Quick Memory Channels .................................................................... 9-5 Registering a Quick Memory Channel ............................................. 9-5 Calling up a Quick Memory Channel ............................................... 9-5 Configuring the Number of Quick Memory Channels ...................... 9-5 Erasing a Quick Memory Channel ................................................... 9-5 Memory Shift (Quick Memory VFO) ............................................. 9-6 10 SCAN Program Scan ................................................................................... 10-1 Starting the Program Scan (VFO Scan) ........................................ 10-1 Configuring the Program Scan (VFO Scan) Frequency Range ..... 10-1 Switching the Scan Speed ............................................................ 10-2 Program Slow Scan ...................................................................... 10-2 Turning ON/OFF Program Slow Scan ....................................... 10-2 Configuring the Frequency Points for Program Slow Scan ........ 10-2 Configuring the Segment for Program Slow Scan ..................... 10-3 Scan Hold ..................................................................................... 10-3 Memory Scan ................................................................................... 10-3 Performing Memory Scan ............................................................. 10-3 Configuring All-channel Scan and Group Scan ............................. 10-3 Memory Channel Lockout ............................................................. 10-4 Quick Memory Scan ......................................................................... 10-4 Configuring the Conditions for Resuming Scan ................................ 10-4 11 USB/FILE MANAGEMENT Managing Different File Types .......................................................... 11-1 USB/File Management Menu Screen ............................................... 11-2 Configuring the Destination for Saving Files ................................. 11-2 Saving Settings Data ..................................................................... 11-2 Reading Settings Data .................................................................. 11-3 Changing the Name of Files Stored in the Built-in Memory ........... 11-4 Copying Files to a PC .................................................................... 11-4 Deleting Files (Built-in Memory) .................................................... 11-5 Formatting a USB Flash Drive ....................................................... 11-5 Copying Files to a USB Flash Drive .............................................. 11-5 Safely Removing the USB Flash Drive .......................................... 11-6 12 VOICE MESSAGE/AUDIO FILE Recording/Playing a Voice Message ................................................ 12-1 Recording a Voice Message ......................................................... 12-1 Registering a Name for a Voice Message ..................................... 12-1 Playing Back a Voice Message ..................................................... 12-2 Adjusting the Playback Volume ..................................................... 12-2 Sending a Voice Message ............................................................ 12-2 Deleting a Voice Message ............................................................ 12-2 Configuring the Time Interval for Repeated Transmission ............ 12-2 Recording/Playing Voice Communication ........................................ 12-3 Manual Recording ......................................................................... 12-3 Full-time Recording ....................................................................... 12-3 Configuring the Maximum Duration for Full-time Recording ...... 12-3 Saving Full-time Recording Audio ............................................. 12-3 Audio Recording in Tandem with Squelch .................................... 12-3 Quick Playback ................................................................................. 12-4 Adjusting the Playback Volume ..................................................... 12-4 Audio Recording File Screen ............................................................ 12-4 Playing Back an Audio File ............................................................ 12-4 Renaming an Audio File ................................................................ 12-5 Deleting an Audio File ................................................................... 12-5 13 VOICE GUIDANCE Voice Guidance ................................................................................ 13-1 Adjusting the Voice Guidance Volume .......................................... 13-1 Adjusting the Voice Guidance Speed ............................................ 13-1 Configuring the Voice Guidance Language ................................... 13-1 Auto Voice Guidance .................................................................... 13-1 Voice 1 ...................................................................................... 13-2 Voice 2 .................................................................................... 13-12 Voice 3 .................................................................................... 13-12 14 CLOCK DISPLAY/TIMER Configuring Date and Time ............................................................... 14-1 Displaying the Clock Menu Screen ............................................... 14-1 Configuring the Local Clock Date .............................................. 14-1 Configuring the Local Clock Time .............................................. 14-1 Configuring the Local Clock Time Zone ..................................... 14-1 Configuring the Auxiliary Clock Time Zone ................................ 14-1 Registering an Auxiliary Clock Identifier .................................... 14-1 Configuring the Date Display Format ......................................... 14-2 Configuring the Clock Display ................................................... 14-2 Clock Correction Using NTP (Network Time Protocol) ..................... 14-2 Displaying the Auto Correction Configuration Screen ................... 14-2 Configuring the NTP Server Address ........................................ 14-2 Turning ON/OFF Auto Clock Correction .................................... 14-3 Correcting the Date and Time Manually .................................... 14-3 Timer ................................................................................................ 14-3 Configuring the Program Timer ..................................................... 14-3 Pausing Program Timer Operation ................................................ 14-4 Sleep timer ....................................................................................... 14-5 Configuring the Sleep Timer ......................................................... 14-5 Pausing the Sleep Timer ........................................................... 14-5 APO (Automatic Power Off) .............................................................. 14-5 15 NETWORK/KNS OPERATION LAN .................................................................................................. 15-1 Configuring the IP Address ........................................................... 15-1 Viewing the MAC Address ............................................................ 15-2 KNS Operation ................................................................................. 15-2 Configuring for KNS Operation ..................................................... 15-3 LAN Connection Settings .......................................................... 15-3 Administrator Settings ............................................................... 15-3 Built-in VoIP Function ................................................................ 15-4 Audio Input/Output Level of Built-in VoIP ................................... 15-4 Built-in VoIP Jitter Absorption Buffer ......................................... 15-4 Prohibition of Remote Volume Control ...................................... 15-4 KNS Communication Log .......................................................... 15-4 viii KNS User Registration .................................................................. 15-5 KNS Users List .......................................................................... 15-5 Registering User Information ..................................................... 15-5 Editing User Information ............................................................ 15-5 Deleting a User .......................................................................... 15-5 Remote Operation by Registered User ......................................... 15-6 Session Time ................................................................................ 15-6 KNS Welcome Message ............................................................... 15-6 16 OTHER FUNCTIONS Configuring the Power-on Message ................................................. 16-1 Configuring the Screen Saver ........................................................... 16-1 Configuring the Screen Saver Type .............................................. 16-1 Saving Images for Use by Type 3 Screen Saver ....................... 16-1 Configuring the Time for Launching the Screen Saver .................. 16-1 Configuring the Displayed Screen Saver Text ............................... 16-1 Configuring the Long-press Behavior of Keys .................................. 16-2 Configuring the Beep Volume ........................................................... 16-2 PF Keys (Programmable Function Keys) .......................................... 16-2 Assigning Functions to PF Keys (Front Panel) .............................. 16-2 Assigning Functions to PF Keys (Microphone) ............................. 16-2 Assigning Functions to the PF Keys (KEYPAD Jack) .................... 16-3 List of Assignable Functions ......................................................... 16-3 PC Control ........................................................................................ 16-5 Configuring the COM/USB (Rear Panel) Baud Rate ..................... 16-5 Configuring the USB Keyboard ......................................................... 16-5 Sending Message from the USB Keyboard ................................... 16-5 Selecting a USB Keyboard Language ........................................... 16-5 Configuring the Time for Activating Key Repeat ............................ 16-5 Configuring the Key Repeat Speed ............................................... 16-5 Saving a Screen Shot ....................................................................... 16-6 Configuring Output to an External Meter ........................................... 16-6 Configuring the Output Signal Format of the External Meter ......... 16-6 Configuring the External Meter Output Level ................................ 16-6 External Monitor Output .................................................................... 16-7 Configuring the External Monitor Resolution ................................. 16-7 Configuring Audio Input/Output ........................................................ 16-7 Configuring the USB Connector Input/Output Signal .................... 16-7 Configuring the Audio Signal Input Level ................................... 16-7 Configuring the Audio Signal Output Level ................................ 16-7 Configuring the ACC 2 Connector Input/Output Signal ................. 16-7 Configuring the Audio Signal Input Level ................................... 16-7 Configuring the Audio Signal Output Level ................................ 16-7 Configuring the TX Monitor Level for External Audio Output ......... 16-7 Configuring Audio Mixing for the External Audio Output Connector 16-7 Switching the Reference Signal ........................................................ 16-8 Switching the CTCSS Mute Operation ............................................. 16-8 Configuring the SQL Control Signal .................................................. 16-8 Configuring the Logic of PSQ ........................................................ 16-8 Configuring the PSQ Output Conditions ........................................ 16-8 Switching the COM Connector Signal ........................................... 16-8 Split Transfer .................................................................................... 16-9 Connection .................................................................................... 16-9 Split Transfer 1 .............................................................................. 16-9 Configuration ............................................................................. 16-9 Operation ................................................................................ 16-10 Muting the Sub-receiver .......................................................... 16-10 Split Transfer 2 ............................................................................ 16-10 TX Inhibit ........................................................................................ 16-11 Tuning the Packet Cluster .............................................................. 16-11 Connection .................................................................................. 16-11 Receiving Packet Cluster Data ................................................... 16-11 Control of External Devices ............................................................ 16-12 TX Inhibit in Busy State (when Squelch is Open) ........................ 16-12 Reversing the PKS Signal Polarity .............................................. 16-12 CONTENTS USB Keying ................................................................................ 16-12 Decoded Character Output ......................................................... 16-12 Turning ON/OFF Decoded Character Output .......................... 16-12 Configuring the Baud Rate of the Virtual COM (Enhanced) Connector ................................................................................ 16-12 Controlling the Linear Amplifier ....................................................... 16-13 Connection .................................................................................. 16-13 TL-922 Connection .................................................................. 16-13 General Linear Amplifier Connection ....................................... 16-13 Linear Amplifier Menu Screen ..................................................... 16-14 Turning ON/OFF Linear Amplifier ............................................ 16-14 Linear Amplifier TX Control ..................................................... 16-14 Turning ON/OFF Linear Amplifier TX Delay ............................ 16-14 Linear Amplifier TX Delay Time ............................................... 16-14 Linear Amplifier Relay Control ................................................. 16-14 External ALC Voltage of Linear Amplifier ................................. 16-14 Operating the Transverter/Exciter ................................................... 16-15 Connecting to a Transverter ........................................................ 16-15 Turning off Power Down during Transverter Operation ............... 16-15 Displaying the Operating Frequency Configured for the Transverter 16-15 Configuring the Operating Frequency of the Transverter ............ 16-15 Antenna Output for External Receivers ........................................... 16-15 Emergency Call (K Type Only) ....................................................... 16-16 Crossband Repeater ...................................................................... 16-16 Connection .................................................................................. 16-16 Operation .................................................................................... 16-16 Sky Command System II ................................................................ 16-17 Sky Command System II Diagram .............................................. 16-17 Preparation ................................................................................. 16-17 Starting Sky Command System II Operation ............................... 16-17 TS-890S + TH-D7A/ TH-D72(A/E)/ TM-D700A/ TM-D710/G(A/E)/
TM-V71A + RC-D710 (Transporter) Setup .............................. 16-17 17 MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENT Reset ................................................................................................ 17-1 Firmware Update .............................................................................. 17-1 Firmware Version Check ............................................................... 17-1 Calibration of Internal Reference Frequency .................................... 17-2 Adjusting the Touchscreen ............................................................... 17-3 Adjusting the Display Color ............................................................... 17-3 Replacing the Fuse ........................................................................... 17-3 Replacing the Fuse of the External Antenna Tuner ....................... 17-3 Replacing the Fuse of the DC Power Cable .................................. 17-3 18 TROUBLESHOOTING General Information .......................................................................... 18-1 Service .......................................................................................... 18-1 Service Note ................................................................................. 18-1 Cleaning ........................................................................................ 18-1 Troubleshooting ................................................................................ 18-2 Problems Related to Reception and Transmission ....................... 18-2 Problems Related to Data Communication, PC and Network ....... 18-5 Troubles Related to Recording and Playback ............................... 18-7 Error Messages ............................................................................. 18-8 Warning Messages ..................................................................... 18-10 Internal Beats ................................................................................. 18-11 Spurious Signals on the Bandscope ............................................... 18-11 19 OTHERS Optional Accessories ........................................................................ 19-1 Installing the YG-82CN-1 Roofing Filter ........................................ 19-1 Specifications ................................................................................... 19-2 ix
. x 1 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION Installation Do not lift this transceiver by holding the Tuning control or other control knobs on the front panel or the connectors on the rear panel. Doing so may result in injury or damage of the control knobs. Antenna Installation and Connection The antenna system is made up of the antenna, coaxial cables and a ground terminal. Installing the antenna system carefully and properly helps to optimize the performance of the transceiver. Make use of a correctly-adjusted 50 antenna, 50 coaxial cables and appropriate connectors. Make sure that all connections are cleaned and free of dirt before fastening them. Match the impedance of the coaxial cable and antenna such that SWR is 1:1.5 or lower. A high SWR may lower the TX output power, thereby causing radio interference with electrical appliances such as radio and TV as well as failure of this transceiver. If reports on signal distortion are received, this means the transceiver may not be transmitting efficiently. Transmitting without connecting the antenna may damage this transceiver. Before transmission, connect an antenna or a 50 dummy load to this transceiver. The protection circuit of this transceiver will be activated if the SWR of the antenna exceeds 1.5. Use an antenna with a low SWR. When an RX antenna that makes use of semiconductors
(such as an active antenna) is connected, transmission or antenna tuning must not be performed. Doing so supplies power to the antenna and may damage the semiconductor circuit of the antenna. INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION 1 Installation of Lightning Arrestors To prevent fire, electric shock, malfunctioning and injury due to Besides installing a coaxial lightning arrestor, disconnect the lightning, install a coaxial lightning arrestor. cable of the antenna from this transceiver if lightning is anticipated. Connection of Regulated DC Power Supply Make sure to turn off the power of the regulated DC power supply before connecting the DC power cord. Do not insert the power plug of the regulated DC power supply into the AC outlet until all the connections are complete. A DC 13.8 V regulated DC power supply is needed for using this transceiver. It cannot be connected directly to an AC outlet. Use the supplied DC power cord to connect this transceiver to the regulated DC power supply. The current capacity needed for the regulated DC power supply is 22.5 A and above. Use one with sufficient current capacity. 1 Connect the DC power cord to the regulated DC power supply. Connect the red wire to the + terminal and the black wire to the - terminal. 2 Next, connect the DC power cord to the DC 13.8 V power connector of this transceiver. Insert the cord fully into the power connector. Using the Auxiliary Support An auxiliary support is stored inside the front leg of this transceiver. Pull it toward you if you want the panel to face slightly upwards. Ground Connection Connect to the ground terminal correctly to avoid risks such as electric shock. First of all, bury one or multiple ground bars or a large copper sheet in the ground and connect them to the GND terminal of this transceiver. Use a thick conducting wire or a cut copper band that is as short as possible for this connection. Gas pipes, conduit pipes for power distribution, plastic water pipes and the like must not be used for grounding. Not only are they ineffective for grounding, they may also result in accidents or fire. 1-1 DC Power CordRear Side of This TransceiverRegulated DC Power SupplyRed (+)Black ()Fuse Paddle (PADDLE) For CW operation using the built-in electronic keyer, connect a keyer paddle to the PADDLE jack. A 6.3 mm three-pronged plug is used for the paddle. Also, a straight key can be connected to the PADDLE jack. In this case, change the setting of Menu [5-00] to Straight Key. (Refer to Chapter 3 for details on menu operation.) USB Flash Drive/USB Keyboard (
For connecting a commercially available USB flash drive or USB keyboard. Plug the USB flash drive or USB keyboard firmly into the (USB-A) connector.
) Do not remove the USB flash drive while reading or writing files or while the USB flash drive is being accessed by this transceiver. Also, do not turn off the power of this transceiver. Always remove the USB flash drive after ensuring that this can be done safely to prevent data in the USB flash drive from being damaged. (USB/File Management Menu Safe Removal of USB Flash Drive) the connector on the front panel and rear panel respectively. A USB flash drive or USB keyboard can be connected to Microphone (MIC) Microphones with an impedance of 250 to 600 can be used. Insert the microphone plug fully into the MIC connector of this transceiver and tighten it firmly using the fastening ring. The following microphones (sold separately) are compatible with this transceiver. MC-43S MC-60A MC-90 MC-47 The following microphones are not compatible with this transceiver. MC-44 MC-44DM MC-45 MC-45DM 1 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION Torque Adjustment with Tuning Control The Tuning control allows the rotational torque (weight) to be adjusted according to the users preference. With the ring at the base of the Tuning control fixed, turning the Tuning control to the right increases the rotational torque, while turning to the left decreases it. Connection of Accessories (Front Panel) Headphones (PHONES) Monaural and stereo headphones (4 to 32 , standard: 8 /plug:
6.3 mm) can be used with this transceiver. When headphones are connected, sound will not be output from the built-in speakers (or optional external speakers). The following optional headphones are compatible with this transceiver. HS-5 HS-6 The volume may be louder for headphones with a higher The audio output is monaural even when stereo impedance. headphones are connected. 1-2 RingMicrophone Connector (View from Front Panel)8V (10mA max)NCGND (MIC)GND (STBY)UPDOWNPTTMICMicrophone (Optional or Commercially Available)USB Flash Drive (Commercially Available) or USB Keyboard (Commercially Available)Front PanelPaddle (Commercially Available)Straight Key (Commercially Available)Headphones (Optional or Commercially Available) Connection of Accessories (Rear Panel) A cable exceeding 3 m (9.8 feet) may not be connected to a connector below. KEY jack ACC 2 connector REMOTE connector METER jack DRV connector KEYPAD jack COM connector EXT.SP jack DISPLAY connector LAN connector PHONES jack PADDLE jack MIC connector Key for CW (KEY) For CW operation without using the built-in electronic keyer, connect the plug of an electronic key, bug key, external electronic keyer or PC keyer to the KEY jack. Use a 3.5 mm two-pronged plug. Positive keying needs to be used for external electronic keyers and PC keyers. Use a shielded cable to connect the key and this transceiver. For more detailed explanation on the built-in keyer, refer to Electronic Keyer. (5-13) INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION 1 USB Flash Drive/USB Keyboard (
For connecting a commercially available USB flash drive or USB keyboard. Plug the USB flash drive or USB keyboard firmly into the
(USB-A) connector.
) A USB flash drive or USB keyboard can be connected to the connector on the front panel and rear panel respectively. Keypad (KEYPAD) For connecting a self-made PF keypad. External Speaker (EXT. SP 8) For connecting an external speaker. The EXT. SP 8 is used exclusively for connecting an external speaker. Due to the loud audio output, hearing may be impaired when headphones are used. Do not connect headphones. External Display (DISPLAY) Connect this transceiver with an external display using a commercially available DVI cable. Doing so enables information displayed on the screen of this transceiver to be shown on the external display. 848 x 480. Use an external display with a resolution of 800 x 600 or This transceiver supports digital and analog outputs. If the display to connect uses a D-sub terminal, make use of a commercially available DVI/D-Sub conversion adapter. External Meter (METER) For connecting a commercially available meter. 1-3 934452VvdALCCOMP1052010dB+20+60dB250W15A7531SPOSWRId934452VvdALCCOMP1052010dB+20+60dB250W15A7531SPOSWRIdExternal Speaker (Optional or Commercially Available)USB Keyboard (Commercially Available) or USB Flash Drive (Commercially Available)Straight Key (Commercially Available)Paddle (Commercially Available)Rear PanelMeter 2Meter 13.5 mm StereoAdd a resistor as necessary.Meter (Commercially Available)DVI CableTo DVI PortExternal Display (Commercially Available)(E type) 1 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION Connection with Data Communication Equipment PC Connection This transceiver is equipped with connectors (ACC 2 and USB) for exchanging audio signals with the supplied equipment for data communication using an external device. These connectors are collectively referred to as data communication connectors in this manual. To make use of data communication such as RTTY (AFSK), PSK31, SSTV, JT65 and FT8 using data communication software that employs the sound function of a PC and with this transceiver configured to the DATA mode (SSB-DATA, FM-DATA, AM-DATA), set up the connection as follows. When using the USB audio function: connect to the USB port of the PC. Data communication with only the USB cable connection is possible by making use of data VOX or PC commands (TX1; to start transmission and RX; to end transmission) to switch between transmission and reception. (For details on the configuration of the input sound source in the DATA mode and the VOX function, refer to page 8-1.) Before connecting this transceiver with a PC using a USB cable, download also a virtual COM port driver and install it on the PC. http://www.kenwood.com/i/products/info/amateur/software_download.html When using an ACC 2 connector: connect the audio output line of the PC to pin 11 (ANI) of the ACC 2 connector and the audio input line of the PC to pin 3 (ANO). Pin 9 (PKS) of the ACC 2 connector, data VOX or PC commands (TX1; to start transmission and RX;
to end transmission) are used to switch between transmission and reception. When using PC commands, connect the transceiver and the PC with a RS-232C straight cable or a USB cable. TNC Connection For packet communication and the like using an external TNC (terminal node controller) with this transceiver configured to DATA mode, make use of the ACC 2 connector. Connect the modulation output line, demodulation input line and TX control (PTT) of the external TNC to pin 11 (ANI), pin 3 (ANO) and to pin 13 (PKS) of the ACC 2 connector respectively. (For details on the configuration of the input sound source in the DATA mode, refer to page 8-1.) USB cable and RS-232C straight cable are not supplied with this transceiver. Please purchase commercially available cables. Delays may occur when using USB audio, and there may also be audio interruptions depending on the performance and load Place this transceiver far enough from the PC and TNC so that noise will not be picked up. For data communication software settings, refer to the instruction manual or Help file of the software in use. of the PC. 1-4 USB (B) ConnectorUSB CableSupplied 13-Pin DIN Plug (Use the supplied 13-pin DIN plug to make your own connection cable.)To USB PortPCTo Audio Input/Output PortTo RS-232C Serial Port(Female)TS-890RS-232C Straight CableSupplied 13-Pin DIN Plug (Use the supplied 13-pin DIN plug to make your own connection cable.)TS-890Power Supply Unit for TNCTNCPC Terminal Descriptions INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 COM Connector Pin No. Pin Name NC RXD TXD NC GND NC RTS 8 9 CTS NC
. REMOTE Connector Pin No. Pin Name SPO COM SS 4 5 6 7 MKE BRK ALC LKY
. Function No connection Sends serial data to PC. Receives serial data from PC. No connection Signal ground No connection Sends signal from the PC to this transceiver. If the PC is unable to accept incoming data, an L level signal is output from the PC to this transceiver and data will not be sent in this case. Sends signal from this transceiver to the PC. If this transceiver is unable to accept incoming data, an L level signal is output from this transceiver to the PC and input of incoming data will be forbidden. No connection Input/Output O I I O Function Internal Relay Control of the linear amplifier menu. Speaker out Common terminal of the built-in relay for linear amplifier control PTT input Sends signal by grounding the SS terminal. Make terminal of the built-in relay for linear amplifier control The make terminal can be connected to the common terminal during transmission by configuring Rated control capacity of relay contact: 2 A/ 30 V DC (resistance load) Maximum allowable voltage of relay contact: 220 V DC, 250 V AC Break terminal of the built-in relay for linear amplifier control The break terminal can be connected with the common terminal when the latter is not connected to a make terminal. Rated control capacity of relay contact: 2 A/ 30 V DC (resistance load) Maximum allowable voltage of relay contact: 220 V DC, 250 V AC ALC input from the linear amplifier Linear amplifier control output The output logic during transmission can be configured using Keying Logic of the linear amplifier Active High: Outputs DC 12 V during transmission. The maximum output current is 100 mA. Active Low: Switches to the L level (GND and short) during transmission. When an external bias is applied while receiving is in progress, the signal switches to the H level. Voltage and current not higher than DC 50 V and 100 mA respectively can be controlled. menu. Input/Output O I/O I I/O I/O I O 1-5 GNDConnect to metal shield. 1 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION
. Function No connection RTTY control terminal (FSK key input) Audio output Connect to the audio input of the TNC, MCP or PC (or PC connection interface). The audio output level is independent of the AF volume control knob on the front panel. The audio output level can be adjusted in Menu [7-09]. Adjust it to an appropriate level. When the audio output level is configured to the default value of 50 in Menu [7-09], the peak-to-
peak voltage is approximately 0.5 V p-p in the case of standard modulation signals. Altering the audio output level between 0 and 100 changes the peak-to-peak voltage level between approximately 0 Vp-p and 1.2 Vp-p. (Impedance 10 k) Signal ground Squelch control output Connect to the squelch input of the TNC, MCP or PC connection interface. When squelch is open: Low impedance When squelch is closed: High impedance Meter level output 1 No connection Signal ground PTT input for data communication (DATA SEND) Connect to the PTT output of the TNC, MCP or PC connection interface. Signal can be transmitted by connecting the PKS terminal to GND. The PKS terminal mutes unnecessary modulation input signals during transmission. Meter level output 2 Audio input for data communication Connect to the audio output of the TNC, MCP or PC (or PC connection interface). The audio input level is independent of MIC GAIN on the front panel. The audio input level can be adjusted in Menu [7-07]. Standard modulation can be obtained with an input of approximately 10 mVrms in the default setting of 50 in Menu [7-09]. Altering the audio input level between 0 and 100 changes the standard modulation input level between approximately almost no modulation and approx. 1 mVrms. (Impedance 10 k) Configuration of the Input Path of TX Audio Signal ground PTT input This is the same terminal as pin 2 (SS terminal) of the MIC connector on the front panel and pin 3
(SS terminal) of the REMOTE connector. It has the same behavior as pressing [SEND] on the front panel. Signal can be transmitted by connecting the SS terminal to GND. The SS terminal mutes unnecessary modulation input signals during transmission. Configuration of the Input Path of TX Audio Input/Output I O O O I O I I ACC 2 Connector Pin No. Pin Name 2 NC RTTY 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 ANO GND PSQ MET 1 NC GND PKS MET2 ANI GND SS 1-6 EXT. AT Connector Pin No. Pin Name 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 GND TT GND NC TS 14S MIC SS MD MU 8 A NC MSG MCG MIC Connector Pin No. Pin Name
. Function Function Signal ground EXT.AT connector (TTI/TTO) Signal ground No connection EXT.AT connector (TSI/TSO) DC 13.8 V power supply for EXT.AT MIC signal input MIC standby (PTT) control MIC DOWN control MIC UP control DC 8 V power supply for MIC No connection MIC ground Signal ground INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION 1 Input/Output I/O I/O O Input/Output I I I I O 1-7
. 1-8 2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS Front Panel NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS 2
. Panel Key Behavior Key
.
[
]
[PF A]
[VOX]
[SEND]
[AT]
[ESC]
[F1] to [F7]
(Horizontally Arrayed F)
[SCP]
[MHz]
[LSB/USB]
[CW/CW-R]
[FSK/PSK]
[FM/AM]
[DATA]
Behavior Activates the registered function. Turns on the power. Turns off the power. Turns ON/OFF the VOX function. Displays the VOX configuration screen. Starts/ends transmission. Turns ON/OFF the antenna tuner. Starts antenna tuning. Exits the configuration screen. Press Press and hold Press Press and hold Press Press and hold Press Press Press and hold Press Activates the function according to the key guide at the bottom of the screen.
(Henceforth represented as F1 [XXX] to F7 [XXX] in this manual.) Refer to List of Function Key Behaviors (Standard Mode Screen) for functions of the F key on the normal screen. Press Press and hold Press Press Press Press Press and hold Press Press and hold Press Press and hold Displays the bandscope. Switches the scope screen. Displays the audio scope. Switches between bandscope and audio scope. Turns ON/OFF the MHz step function. Switches between the LSB and USB modes. Switches between the CW and CW-R modes. Switches between the FSK and PSK modes. Switches between reverse and normal in the FSK/PSK mode. Switches between the FM and AM modes. Switches between FM narrow and FM normal. Switches the DATA mode. Displays the input source configuration screen for the TX audio. Refer to 4-1 16-2 8-1 8-2 4-7 4-11 2-4 7-1 7-6 4-6 4-4 4-4 4-4 4-4 4-4 8-1 2-1 2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS Behavior Activates the CW auto tune function. Switches between receiver (RX) filters A, B and C. Displays the RX Filter screen. Restores the passband of the RX filter that has been changed to the preset value. Turns ON/OFF the FINE-tuning function. For selecting a frequency band and switching band memory. Cancels the direct frequency input mode. Turns on the direct frequency input mode. Turns ON/OFF the RX antenna. Turns ON/OFF the antenna output function for the external receiver. Turns ON/OFF the drive output function. For selecting a general coverage band. Turns ON/OFF the transverter function. Starts, pauses or resumes manual recording. Saves the constantly recorded audio file. Stops audio recording or playback. Starts, pauses or resumes playback. Switches between VFO A and VFO B. Aligns the frequency and mode of VFO A and VFO B. Press Press Press and hold Press Press Activates the function according to the key guide on the right side of the screen. (Henceforth represented as F [XXX] in this manual.) Refer to List of Function Key Behaviors (Standard Mode Screen) for functions of the F key on the normal screen. Press Press Press Press Press and hold Press Press Press and hold Press Press and hold Press Press Press Press and hold Press Press and hold Press Press and hold Press Press and hold Press Press Press and hold Turns ON/OFF the split mode. Starts configuration of the frequency for split operation. Turns ON/OFF the frequency lock function. Switches between the memory channel and VFO mode. Copies the memory channel data and quick memory channel data to VFO. Activates the registered function. Activates the registered function. Refer to 5-9 6-1 6-2 6-4 4-5 2-4 4-3 4-6 4-10 16-15 4-10 4-3 16-15 12-3 12-3 12-4 4-2 5-1 16-2 16-2 5-1 5-1 4-7 9-2 9-3 Key
[CW T.]
[IF FIL]
[FIL CLR]
[FINE]
[ ] to [ ] (Vertically Arrayed F)
[0 (50)] to [9 (28)]
[CLR]
[ENT]
[RX ANT]
[DRV]
[GENE]
[
[
[
]
]
]
[A/B]
[PF B]
[PF C]
[SPLIT]
[LOCK]
[M/V]
. 2-2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS 2 Key
[
M.IN]
[<Q-M.IN]
[Q-MR>]
]
[
[MENU]
[TF-SET]
[MONI]
[CAR]
[AGC]
[NR]
[NB1]
[NB2]
[BC]
[NCH]
[RIT]
[XIT]
[CL]
. Behavior Displays the memory channel list screen. Registers a memory channel. Switches the menu mode item. Registers a quick memory channel. Switches the menu mode item. Calls up a quick memory channel. Switches the menu mode item. Deletes all quick memory channels. Switches the menu mode item. Turns ON/OFF the menu mode. Turns ON/OFF TF-SET. (ON while it is being pressed.) Turns ON/OFF the TX monitor function. Displays the TX monitor level configuration screen. Displays the carrier level configuration screen. Switches the AGC time constant [FAST, MID, SLOW]. Displays the AGC configuration screen. Switches the mode of the noise reduction function [OFF/NR1/NR2]. Displays the NR1 configuration screen. (When Noise Reduction 1 is ON) Displays the NR2 configuration screen. (When Noise Reduction 2 is ON) Turns ON/OFF the Noise Blanker 1. Displays the NB1 configuration screen. Turns ON/OFF the Noise Blanker 2. Displays the NB2 configuration screen. Switches the mode of the beat canceler function [OFF/BC1/BC2]. Turns ON/OFF the notch filter. Switches the bandwidth of the notch filter [Normal, Middle, Wide]. Turns ON/OFF the RIT function. Shifts the RX frequency via RIT. Turns ON/OFF the XIT function. Shifts the TX frequency via XIT. Clears the RIT or RIT/XIT frequency. Press Press Press Press and hold Press Press Press Press Press and hold Press Press Press and hold Press Press and hold Press Press and hold Press Press and hold Press Press Press and hold Press Press and hold Press Press and hold Press Refer to 9-1 9-1 3-1 9-5 3-1 9-5 3-1 9-5 3-1 3-1 5-2 8-3 8-3 5-8 5-2 5-2 6-7 6-7 6-5 6-5 6-5 6-6 6-8 6-6 6-7 5-7 5-7 5-7 5-7 5-7 2-3 Refer to 5-6 4-10 6-1 6-1 5-4 5-4 8-5 8-5 4-8 4-8 4-8 8-3 8-3 Refer to 12-4 12-1 5-14 5-10 5-22 5-22 5-28 5-30 5-30 10-1 10-3 10-1 10-3 9-3 9-6 9-1 2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS List of Function Key Behaviors (Standard Mode Screen) Function Keys (Vertically Arrayed) F
[ANT/PRE]
Key Guide Press Press and hold Press Press and hold Press Press and hold Press Press and hold Press Press and hold Press Press Press and hold
[ATT]
[RX EQ]
[TX EQ]
[MAX-Po]
[METER]
[PROC]
Behavior Switches the preamplifier. (OFF/ PRE 1/ PRE 2) Switches between ANT 1 and ANT 2. Switches the attenuation level of the attenuator. (OFF/ 6 dB/ 12 dB/ 18 dB) Switches in the reverse order. Turns ON/OFF the RX equalizer. Displays the RX equalizer configuration screen. Turns ON/OFF the TX equalizer. Displays the TX equalizer configuration screen. Turns ON/OFF the TX output power limiter. Displays the TX output power limiter configuration screen. Switches the meter display. Turns ON/OFF the speech processor. Displays the Speech Processor configuration screen. Function Keys (Horizontally Arrayed) Behavior Displays the audio recording file screen. Displays the voice message screen. (Displayed in the SSB, AM and FM modes.) Displays the CW message screen. (Displayed in the CW mode.) Displays the communication screen. (Displayed in the CW, FSK and PSK modes.) Switches in the sequence of: TONE CTCSS CROSS TONE. (Displayed in the FM mode.) Displays the TONE frequency, CTCSS frequency or cross tone configuration screen. Starts/stops scanning. Displays the VFO/Program Scan segment screen. (Displayed in the VFO mode.) Displays the memory scan group screen. (Displayed in the memory channel mode.) Shifts the memory.
(Displayed in the memory channel and quick memory channel modes.) Displays the memory channel list. F1 F2 F3 F4
[RX PLAY]
[TX MSG]
[KEYER]
[DECODE]
[TONE]
F5
[SCAN]
Key Guide Press Press Press Press Press Press and hold Press Press and hold Press Press VFO]
[M
[M.LIST]
F6 F7 2-4 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS 2
. List of Control Knob Behaviors Control Tuning
[MULTI/CH]
[RIT/XIT]
[KEY]
[DELAY]
[MIC/PITCH]
[POWER]
[HI/SHIFT]
[LO/WIDTH]
[NOTCH]
[SQL]
[AF]
[RF]
. Behavior Aligns the TX and RX frequencies. Switches the frequency at a fast speed. (Available in the VFO mode.) Switches the channel number. (Available in the memory channel and quick memory channel modes.) Switches the item to configure or configured value. (Available when a configuration screen is displayed.) Changes the RIT/XIT frequency. Adjusts the keying speed. Adjusts the break-in delay time. (When the TX mode is configured to CW.) Adjusts the VOX delay time. (When the TX mode is configured to SSB, FM or AM.) Adjusts the microphone gain. (When the TX mode is configured to SSB or AM.) Adjusts the sidetone/pitch frequency. (When the TX mode is configured to CW.) Adjusts the speech processor output level. (When the speech processor is ON.) Changes the TX output power level. Changes the RX filter (high-cut frequency or shift frequency). Changes the RX filter (low-cut frequency or width frequency). Adjusts the notch frequency. Adjusts the squelch level. Adjusts the receiving volume. Adjusts the RF gain. Refer to 4-5 4-5 9-2 3-1 5-7 5-13 5-8 8-2 4-7 5-9 8-3 4-7 6-3 6-3 6-6 4-2 4-2 4-2 2-5 2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS List of LED Behaviors LED
[POWER]
[VOX]
[AT]
[BUSY/TX]
[DRV]
[REC]
[SPLIT]
[LOCK]
[MONI]
[MULTI/CH]
[RIT]
[XIT]
. Behavior When power is OFF: light off When power is ON: lights up in green When power is OFF with timer activated: lights up in orange When timer is starting up: blinks in orange Lights up when the VOX function is enabled. Lights up when the antenna tuner is ON. Blinks during antenna tuning. Lights up in green when squelch opens upon receiving a signal. Lights up in red when transmission is in progress. Lights up when drive output is ON. Lights up during manual recording (including when recording is paused). Blinks for 1 second at the start of saving the constantly recorded audio. Lights up in the split mode. Blinks during configuration of the split frequency. Lights up when the frequency lock function is enabled. Lights up when the TX monitor function is enabled. Lights up when a configuration screen is displayed (when adjustments can be made using the [MULTI/CH] control). Lights up when the RIT function is enabled. Lights up when the XIT function is enabled. Description Jack for connecting to headphones. Jack for connecting a paddle while running in the CW mode. Connector for connecting a USB flash drive or USB keyboard. Connector for connecting a microphone. Connectors and Jacks Name
<PHONES> Jack
<PADDLE> Jack
<USB-A> Connector
<MIC> Connector
. 2-6 Rear Panel
. NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS 2 Description Remarks Connectors and Jacks on the Rear Panel No. Name
<ANT 1> Connector
<ANT 2> Connector
<REF IN (10MHz)> Connector
<DC13.8V> Connector
<USB-A> Connector
<COM> Connector
<AT> Connector
<EXT.SP> Jack
<LAN> Connector
<DISPLAY> Connector
<USB-B> Connector
<KEY> Jack M-type coaxial connector for connecting the antenna. For input of 10 MHz signals when using an external reference frequency. For connecting a regulated DC power supply. Connector for connecting a USB flash drive or USB keyboard. RS-232C connector for connecting a PC or external device. Connector for controlling an external amplifier tuner. For connecting an external speaker. Connector for connecting a PC or LAN when running with the KNS
(KENWOOD NETWORK COMMAND SYSTEM) or for automatic correction of the clock time. DVI-I connector for connecting an external monitor. Both analog and digital signals can be output. Connector for connecting a PC. It is used to control this transceiver using the ARCP-890 as well as to input and output signals for transmission and reception via the digital communication application of a PC. It can be switched between transmission and reception by changing the menu setting and keying. For connecting an electronic key (straight key, bug key, external electronic key, etc.) when running in the CW mode. This can be configured to a jack for paddle connection in the menu.
<METER> Terminal For connecting a commercially available meter.
<REMOTE> Connector
<ACC 2> Connector
<KEYPAD> Jack
<DRV> Connector
<ANT OUT> Connector
<RX IN> Connector
<RX OUT> Connector
<GND> Terminal For connecting a linear amplifier. (Use the supplied 7-pin DIN plug for the connection.) For connecting an external device such as an external terminal.
(Use the supplied 13-pin DIN plug for the connection.) For connecting a self-made PF keypad. For connecting a transverter or linear amplifier. For connecting devices such as an external receiver. For connecting an RX antenna, external bandpass filter, transverter and the like. For connecting an external bandpass filter and the like. For connecting a ground wire. Input impedance: 50 Input: 0 dBm 10 dB Output impedance: 4.7 Allowable open-end voltage output: 0 to 5 V Output impedance: 50 Output: Approx. 1 mW (0 dBm) 2-7 2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS Microphone (Optional) A PTT (Push-to-talk) Switch B UP/ DOWN Keys Switches to the transmitting state while this switch is being pressed. Releasing the switch restores the transceiver to the receiving state. For scrolling up/down the items in one of the following modes, such as scrolling up/down the VFO frequencies. Pressing and holding down the key enables continuous scrolling. It can also be configured for use as a PF key. VFO mode: Scrolls up/down the VFO frequencies Memory channel mode: Scrolls up/down the memory channel numbers Memory scroll mode: Scrolls up/down the memory scroll numbers Mic paddle mode: For paddle (dot/dash) input Menu mode: Displays the previous or next option C LOCK Key (MC-60A/ MC-90 only) Pressing this key activates the key lock and switches to the transmitting state. Pressing it again restores the key to the original position and switches to the receiving state. 2-8 PTTDWNUPMC-43SMC-60A/MC-90 Screen NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS 2 Area
. Display Description
. Appears when an RX antenna is functioning. Displays the antenna number. Switches the antenna number accordingly when the antenna is switched. It is not displayed when the TX output power destination of the transverter is drive output
(DRV). Appears when antenna output for the external receiver is functioning. Appears when the receiving attenuator is configured to 6 dB, 12 dB or 18 dB. Appears when the receive preamplifier 1 is ON. Appears when the receive preamplifier 2 is ON. Appears when AGC is OFF. Appears when AGC is configured to FAST. Appears when AGC is configured to MID. Appears when AGC is configured to SLOW. Appears when Tone is ON. Appears when CTCSS is ON. Appears when Cross Tone is ON. Displays the antenna tuner function and operating status.
<<
<<
>> blinks while antenna tuning is in progress. Appears when the transverter is ON. Blinks while TX tuning is ON. Displays the TX output power level. (Not displayed when the TX output power destination is drive output (DRV).) Displayed in yellow when the output power is limited by the TX output power limiter function. Displays the drive output level. (Displayed when drive output is ON.) Displays the keying speed. Turning the [KEY SPEED] control displays the keying speed (4 to 60 words/minute) in the TX output power area for 2 seconds. Displays the date of the local clock. The date can be displayed in the UK, US or Japanese format. Displays the time (24-hour format). Left: Displays the time of the local clock. Right: Displays the time of the auxiliary clock (indicated by the character U at the end).
>> lights up when the antenna tuner is ON during reception. Refer to 4-10 4-10 16-15 6-1 5-6 5-2 5-29 5-30 5-30 4-11 16-15 8-7 4-7 4-10 5-13 14-1 14-1 2-9 2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS Area Display Description Appears when the RIT function is enabled. Appears when the XIT function is enabled. Displays the RIT or XIT frequency (between -9.999 and 9.999 kHz). Appears according to the input path of the TX audio selected by the data VOX function. OFF: Appears when sound is not input from all paths. ACC 2: Appears when ACC 2 is used as the audio source input. USB: Appears when USB AUDIO is used as the audio source input. LAN: Appears when LAN is used as the audio source input. Displays the microphone gain. (Displayed when the speech processor is OFF) Displays the speech processor output level. (Displayed when the speech processor is ON) Displays the VOX delay time when the transmitting end is in the SSB, AM or FM mode. Displays the break-in delay time when the transmitting end is in the CW mode. FULL-BK is displayed during full break-in. This is an icon of the internal memory. The icon is displayed in red when the remaining space is running low. The icon starts to blink when a USB flash drive is connected, and lights up when the USB flash drive is recognized by this transceiver. The icon is displayed in red when the remaining space is running low. Appears when the timer function is enabled. Appears when a KNS user is connected to this transceiver. Displays the selected RX filter (A, B or C). Displays the low-cut frequency of the RX filter. Displays the width frequency of the RX filter. Displays the bandwidth of the RX filter. Displays the low-cut frequency of the RX filter. Displays the shift frequency of the RX filter. Displays the position of the notch frequency when the notch filter is ON. Displays the passband/audio FFT. Displays the audio FFT spectrum of the RX or TX audio. Displays the center indicator. Indicates the pitch frequency when in the CW mode. Indicates the center frequency of the passband when in the FSK or PSK mode. Indicates the center frequency of the horizontal axis that is currently displayed when in the SSB, FM or AM mode. Displays the selected bandwidth for the roofing filter. Meter display This can be switched to an analog or digital display. Display of the information on the TX meter can be switched when an analog meter is displayed. Appears when the auto mode is ON. Appears when Noise Reduction 1 (NR1) is ON. Appears when Noise Reduction 2 (NR2) is ON. Appears when Noise Blanker 1 (NB1) is ON. Appears when Noise Blanker 2 (NB2) is ON. Appears when both Noise Blanker 1 and 2 are ON. Appears when Beat Canceler 1 (BC1) is ON. Appears when Beat Canceler 2 (BC2) is ON. Appears when the notch filter is ON and Wide is selected for the bandwidth. Appears when the notch filter is ON and Middle is selected for the bandwidth. Appears when the notch filter is ON and Narrow is selected for the bandwidth. Appears during split operation. 2-10 Refer to 5-7 8-1 4-7 8-4 5-8 11-1 14-3 15-2 6-1 6-3 6-6 6-1 8-4 5-9 5-17 5-22 6-2 4-9 4-4 6-7 6-5 6-8 6-6 5-1 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS 2 Area Display Description
. Configuration Screen Bandscope Displays the mode that is currently running. -D is displayed when in the data mode. Appears while receiving in the TX band. Appears while transmitting in the TX band. -R is displayed when in the reverse mode. Appears when configuring the frequency of the VFO mode or auto mode. Displays the entry history when the frequency entry mode is started up in the VFO mode. Appears when transmitting or receiving operation information that is called up from the memory channel. The memory channel numbers displayed are from 00 to 99, P0 to P9 and E0 to E9. Displays the quick memory channel mode. Displays one of the quick memory channel numbers from Q0 to Q9. Displays the VFO A/B and memory channel status that is being used during simplex or split operation. Displays the frequency used. (The frequency display on the right is grayed out during simplex operation.) Appears when the MHz step function is enabled. Displays the name of the memory channel. Displays the scanning speed (when in a mode other than FM). Appears during program scanning, memory scanning or quick memory scanning. Appears during program slow-scan. Appears when CW auto tuning is running. Displays the band memory number according to the memory that is being called up. Appears when a channel to be locked out is selected. Displays the difference between the transmission frequency and reception frequency. Appears during playback. Appears while playback is paused. Appears during recording. Displays the configuration screen or bandscope. This area is usually left blank. Refer to 4-4 4-7 9-1 9-5 4-6 9-4 10-2 10-1 10-2 5-9 4-3 10-4 5-1 12-4 12-3 2-11
. 2-12 3 MENU Menu Operation The settings of the different functions of this transceiver can be changed from the menu. It can also be used to switch the operating environment. There is also a list of frequently used menu items as well as sub-
menus that are sorted by function. Calling Up a Menu 1 Press [MENU] to display the menu screen. 2 Press F2 [
3 Press F4 [SELECT] to display the menu items of the
] or [M.IN]/ [
]/ F3 [
select a group. selected group.
] to
]/ F3 [
] or [M.IN]/ [
.4 Press F2 [
], or turn the [MULTI/CH] control to select the desired menu item. Pressing F [GROUP
] changes the Pressing F [MENU TOP] returns the menu screen to the top. The parameter setting can now be changed.
], or turn the
[MULTI/CH] control to select the setting value. group. (Refer to 3-3 Menu Items.) 5 Press F4 [SELECT] or [Q-MR>]. 6 Press F4 []/ F5 [+] or [M.IN]/ [
]/ F [GROUP MENU 3
] or [<Q-M.IN]. The selected content is confirmed. 7 Press F1 [
8 Press [MENU] or [ESC] to exit the menu screen. In the subsequent descriptions on the menus, the expression Configure in Menu [X-XX] Xxxx xxxx xxxxx will be used.
(Example: Configure in Menu [3-06] MHz Step) Calling Up a Sub-Menu 1 Press [MENU] to display the menu screen. The function keys of the sub-menu are displayed on the right side of the screen. 2 Press F [MORE] to switch between sub-menu selection 1 and 2. 3 Press the desired function key. The following sub-menus are displayed. Sub-Menu Behavior Reset Advanced Linear Amplifier Dimmer SWL USB/File MORE Clock LAN Auto Mode KNS Timer Frequency Marker Key Guide Sub-Menu Selection 1 RESET ADV. LINEAR AMP DIMMER n SWL USB
/FILE MORE Sub-Menu Selection 2 CLOCK LAN AUTO MODE KNS Displays the Reset menu screen. Displays the Advanced Menu screen. Displays the Linear Amplifier menu screen. Short press: Switches the dimmer. Long press: Displays the Dimmer menu screen. Displays the horizontal dial screen. Displays the USB/File Management menu screen. Switches to sub-menu selection 2. Displays the Clock menu screen. Displays the LAN menu screen. Displays the Auto Mode menu screen. Displays the KNS menu screen. Short press: Switches the paused state of a timer. Long press: Displays the Timer menu screen. Short press: Switches the marker display. Long press: Displays the Frequency Marker menu screen. Switches to sub-menu selection 1. TIMER F.MKR xxx MORE MORE Advanced Menu In the subsequent descriptions on the advanced menus, the expression Configure in Advanced Menu [XX] Xxxx xxxx xxxxx will be used.
(Example: Configure in Advanced Menu [9] Antenna Tuner Operation per Band)
. The setting switches to a different setting. To restore the default setting of the selected menu, press and hold F2 [(RESET)]. 3-1 The setting value in the Parameter field can be selected in the 3 MENU Common Menu Screen Operations Pressing F [MENU TOP] returns the menu screen to the top. Pressing F [GROUP
] switches the The menu item can be selected in the following ways.
]/ F [GROUP
]/ F3 [
]. group. Turn the [MULTI/CH] control. Press F2 [
]. Press [M.IN]/ [
Press [UP] or [DOWN] on the microphone. following ways. Turn the [MULTI/CH] control. Press [UP] or [DOWN] on the microphone. Press F4 []/ F5 [+]. Press [M.IN] / [
Press [
].
]/ [
value to the default setting.
]. Pressing and holding [(RESET)] restores the altered setting Pressing F [MORE] switches the key guide display. Pressing F [
TOP] when configuring the sub-menu returns the sub-menu screen to the top. Exiting the Menu To exit configuration or editing on the menu screen or to end the configuration of a menu item halfway, follow the steps below. The menu screen closes and the display returns to the normal screen. Press [MENU] or [ESC]. It is possible to reset only the menu settings. The menu items or default values may be altered. When editing the screen saver message or power-on message, pressing [MENU] will not exit the menu screen. 3-2 Switching between the CONFIG A and CONFIG B Operating Environments Operating environment refers collectively to values configured in the menu as well as the different settings data for operation. Two different types of operating environment are available on this transceiver: CONFIG A and CONFIG B. Both CONFIG A and CONFIG B have the same functions and they can be configured independently of each other. For example, it is possible to configure CONFIG A for DX and CONFIG B for rag chew and switch easily between them. 1 Press [MENU] to display the menu screen. The current operating environment (CONFIG A or CONFIG B) is displayed in the status bar of the menu screen. Also, data of the operating environment can be saved to and read from a transceiver or USB flash drive. A message appears. Press F7 [CANCEL] to return to the Menu screen. 2 Press F7 [CONFIG]. 3 Press F4 [OK]. Switches from CONFIG A to CONFIG B or vice versa, and this transceiver automatically restarts after switching is complete. The following are common settings between CONFIG A rear panel Information and data other than those below are and B. Number of quick memory channels Baud rate of COM port Baud rate of USB connector (virtual COM port) on the Decoded character output common between CONFIG A and B. Advanced menu settings LAN menu settings Clock menu settings Linear amplifier menu settings Timer menu settings Memory channel data (including quick memory and slow scan point data) CW/RTTY/PSK message memory data Band memory (frequency and mode) Broadcast band memory data Antenna selection (including drive output selection and antenna output selection for external receiver) Preset data of antenna tuner Internal audio file data of recording function (wav file) Voice message memory data (wav file) If the operating environment is switched while the quick memory is called up by pressing [Q-MR>] (quick memory), the quick memory settings will be discarded before the operating environment switches. Menu Items Menu Menu Display 0-00 0-01 0-02 0-03 0-04 0-05 0-06 0-07 0-08 0-09 0-10 0-11 0-12 0-13 0-14 0-15 0-16 0-17 0-18 0-19 0-20 0-21 0-22 0-23 0-24 0-25 0-26 Color Display Pattern Function Key Style Font Style (Frequency Display) Screen Saver Screen Saver Wait Time Screen Saver Message Power-on Message FM Mode S-Meter Sensitivity Meter Response Speed (Analog) Meter Display Pattern Meter Display Peak Hold S-Meter Scale TX Digital Meter Long Press Duration of Panel Keys Touchscreen Tuning PF A: Key Assignment PF B: Key Assignment PF C: Key Assignment External PF 1: Key Assignment External PF 2: Key Assignment External PF 3: Key Assignment External PF 4: Key Assignment External PF 5: Key Assignment External PF 6: Key Assignment External PF 7: Key Assignment External PF 8: Key Assignment Microphone PF 1: Key Assignment
- 0. Basic Configurations -
Description Display Display color type Type of function key display Font type (frequency display) Screen saver Wait time for screen saver Screen saver message Power on message Meter FM S meter sensitivity Analog meter response Meter type Meter with peak hold S meter scale TX meter (digital) Key Duration for pressing and holding a key Touchscreen tuning Function assignment to [PF A]
key Function assignment to [PF B]
key Function assignment to [PF C]
key Function assignment to [PF 1] on the keypad Function assignment to [PF 2] on the keypad Function assignment to [PF 3] on the keypad Function assignment to [PF 4] on the keypad Function assignment to [PF 5] on the keypad Function assignment to [PF 6] on the keypad Function assignment to [PF7] on the keypad Function assignment to [PF 8] on the keypad Function assignment to [PF 1] on the microphone MENU 3 Setting Value Default Refer to Type 1/ Type 2/ Type 3 Type 1/ Type 2/ Type 3 Font 1/ Font 2/ Font 3/ Font 4/ Font 5 Off/ Type 1/ Type 2/ Type 3/
Display Off Preview (5 [sec])/ 5/ 15/ 30/ 60 [min]
Up to 10 alphanumeric characters Up to 15 alphanumeric characters Type 1 Type 1 Font 1 Off Preview (5
[sec]) TS-890 HELLO Normal/ High 1 to 4 (1 step) Digital/ Analog (White)/ Analog
(Black) Off/ On Type 1/ Type 2 Off/ On 200 to 2000 [ms] (100 [ms] step) Off/ On Refer to PF (Programmable Function). Refer to PF (Programmable Function). Refer to PF (Programmable Function). Refer to PF (Programmable Function). Refer to PF (Programmable Function). Refer to PF (Programmable Function). Refer to PF (Programmable Function). Refer to PF (Programmable Function). Refer to PF (Programmable Function). Refer to PF (Programmable Function). Refer to PF (Programmable Function). Refer to PF (Programmable Function). 3 Normal Analog
(White) On Type 1 Off 500 [ms]
On VOICE1 VOICE2 VOICE3 Message Memory CH 1 Message Memory CH 2 Message Memory CH Message Message Message Message Message Memory CH 4 Memory CH 5 Memory CH 6 Memory CH 7 Memory CH 8 A/B, A=B 3 4-1 4-1 4-1 16-1 16-1 16-1 16-1 4-9 4-9 4-9 4-9 4-9 4-9 16-2 7-4 16-2 16-2 16-2 16-3 16-3 16-3 16-3 16-3 16-3 16-3 16-3 16-3 3-3 Setting Value Default Refer to Refer to PF (Programmable Function). Refer to PF (Programmable Function). Refer to PF (Programmable Function). Refer to PF (Programmable Function). Refer to PF (Programmable Function). Off/ 60/ 120/ 180 [min]
SPLIT M/V, M V MONI DWN Key
(Microphone) UP Key
(Microphone) Off 16-2 16-2 16-2 16-2 16-2 16-2 Setting Value Default Refer to
- 0. Basic Configurations -
Description Display Function assignment to [PF 2] on the microphone Function assignment to [PF 3] on the microphone Function assignment to [PF 4] on the microphone Function assignment to [DOWN]
on the microphone Function assignment to [UP] on the microphone APO (Automatic Power Off)
- 1. Audio Performance -
Description Volume Volume of beep tone Playback volume of voice message Sidetone volume Voice Guide Voice guide volume Voice guide speed Language of voice guide and message display Automatic voice guide
- 2. Decoding & Encoding -
Description Off/ 1 to 20 (1 step) Off/ 1 to 20 (1 step) Off/ 1 to 20 (1 step) Off/ 1 to 20 (1 step) 1 to 4 (1 step) English/ Japanese Off/ On Setting Value FSK Decoding Averaging on the FFT scope 0 to 9 (1 step)
(RTTY Decode) Off/ On RX unshift-on-space New line code selection (during CR+LF/ All reception) Off/ Blank Code/ Letters Code Diddle TX unshift-on-space Off/ On Automatic new line code insertion On/ Off FSK Key FSK shift width FSK keying polarity FSK tone frequency Scope display for checking FSK tuning PSK Decoding Averaging on the FFT scope
(PSK Decode) Tuning range for PSK AFC PSK tone frequency Scope display for checking PSK tuning Common File format for saving CW/RTTY/
PSK logs CW/ RTTY/ PSK time stamp Clock selection for CW/ RTTY/
PSK time stamp Selection of RTTY/ PSK waterfall display type 170/ 200/ 425/ 850 [Hz]
Off/ On 1275/ 2125 [Hz]
FFT Scope/ X-Y Scope 0 to 9 (1 step) 15/ 8 [Hz]
1.0/ 1.5/ 2.0 [kHz]
FFT Scope/ X-Y Scope html/ txt Off/ Time Stamp/ Time Stamp +
Frequency Local Clock/ Secondary Clock Straight/ Follow 10 10 10 10 1 English Off 16-2 12-2 5-9 13-1 13-1 13-1 13-1 Default Refer to 0 On All Blank Code On On 170 [Hz]
Off 2125 [Hz]
FFT Scope 0 15 [Hz]
1.5 [kHz]
FFT Scope txt Time Stamp
+ Frequency Local Clock Straight 5-24 5-21 5-21 5-21 5-21 5-21 5-21 5-21 5-21 5-18 5-18 5-24 5-27 5-18 5-27 5-27 5-27 5-19 5-24 3 MENU Menu 0-27 0-28 0-29 0-30 0-31 0-32 Menu 1-00 1-01 1-02 1-03 1-04 1-05 1-06 Menu 2-00 2-01 2-02 2-03 2-04 2-05 2-06 2-07 2-08 2-09 2-10 2-11 2-12 2-13 2-14 2-15 2-16 2-17 Display Microphone PF 2: Key Assignment Microphone PF 3: Key Assignment Microphone PF 4: Key Assignment Microphone DOWN: Key Assignment Microphone UP: Key Assignment Automatic Power Off Display Beep Volume Voice Message Volume (Play) Sidetone Volume Voice Guidance Volume Voice Guidance Speed User Interface Language (Voice Guidance & Messages) Automatic Voice Guidance Display FFT Scope Averaging (RTTY Decode) RX UOS Newline Code Diddle TX UOS Automatic Newline Insertion FSK Spacing FSK Keying Polarity FSK Tone Frequency RTTY Tuning Scope FFT Scope Averaging (PSK Decode) PSK AFC Tuning Range PSK Tone Frequency PSK Tuning Scope CW/ RTTY/ PSK Log File Format CW/ RTTY/ PSK Time Stamp Clock (CW/ RTTY/ PSK Time Stamp) Waterfall when Tuning (RTTY/ PSK Audio Scope) 3-4 Menu Display 3-00 3-01 3-02 3-03 3-04 3-05 3-06 3-07 3-08 3-09 3-10 3-11 3-12 3-13 Menu 4-00 4-01 4-02 4-03 4-04 4-05 Menu 5-00 5-01 5-02 5-03 5-04 5-05 Frequency Rounding Off (Multi/ Channel Control) SSB Mode Frequency Step Size (Multi/
Channel Control) CW/FSK/PSK Mode Frequency Step Size (Multi/Channel Control) FM Mode Frequency Step Size (Multi/
Channel Control) AM Mode Frequency Step Size (Multi/
Channel Control) 9 kHz Step in AM Broadcast Band (Multi/
Channel Control) MHz Step Tuning Control: Number of Steps per Revolution Tuning Speed Control Tuning Speed Control Sensitivity Lock Function Number of Band Memories Split Frequency Offset by RIT/XIT Control Band Direct Keys in Split Mode Display Number of Quick Memory Channels Temporary Change (Memory Channel Configurations) Program Slow Scan Program Slow Scan Range Scan Hold Scan Resume Display Paddle Jack Configuration (Front) Key Jack Configuration (Rear) Electronic Keyer Squeeze Mode Dot and Dash Reversed Keying Paddle (Microphone Up/Down Keys) CW BFO Side Band
- 3. Controls Configurations -
Description Control Rate
- 4. Memory Channels & Scan -
Rounds off the frequency of the
[MULTI/CH] control SSB frequency step size CW/ FSK/ PSK frequency step size FM frequency step size AM frequency step size Steps of the [MULTI/CH] control in the BC band (AM) MHz step Number of steps per revolution of the Tuning control Fast forward rate of the Tuning control Sensitivity of the Tuning control for starting the fast forward operation Frequency lock function Number of band memories Changing the split frequency using the [RIT/XIT] control Band direct key during split operation Description Memory Number of quick memory channels Temporary change of memory frequency Scan Program slow scan Range of program slow scan Scan Hold Scan resume condition
- 5. CW Configurations -
Description Jack Terminals PADDLE jack (front panel) function setting KEY jack (rear panel) function setting Mode Operation mode of the electronic keyer Switches between dot and dash paddle Paddle ([UP] and [DOWN] keys on microphone) CW BFO sideband MENU 3 Setting Value Default Refer to Off/ On 0.5/ 1/ 2.5/ 5/ 10 [kHz]
0.5/ 1/ 2.5/ 5/ 10 [kHz]
5/ 6.25/ 10/ 12.5/ 15/ 20/ 25/ 30/ 50/
100 [kHz]
5/ 6.25/ 10/ 12.5/ 15/ 20/ 25/ 30/ 50/
100 [kHz]
Off/ On 100/ 500/ 1000 [kHz]
250/ 500/ 1000 [Step]
Off/ 2 to 10 (1 step) 1 to 10 (1 step) Frequency Lock/ Tuning Control Lock 1/ 3/ 5 Off/ TX Frequency Offset while RX/
RX Frequency Offset while TX/
Both RX Band/ RX Band and Cancel Split Mode/ RX/ TX Band On 1 [kHz]
0.5 [kHz]
10 [kHz]
5 [kHz]
K type: Off E type: On 1000 [kHz]
1000 [Step]
Off 5 Frequency Lock 3 Off RX Band 4-6 4-6 4-6 4-6 4-6 4-6 4-6 4-6 4-6 4-6 4-6 4-3 5-1 5-1 Setting Value Default Refer to 3/ 5/ 10 [ch]
Off/ On 5 [ch]
Off Off/ On 100/ 200/ 300/ 400/ 500 [Hz]
Off/ On Time-operated/ Carrier-operated On 300 [Hz]
Off Time-
operated 9-5 9-3 10-2 10-3 10-3 10-4 Setting Value Default Refer to Straight Key/ Paddle/ Paddle (Bug Key Mode) Straight Key/ Paddle/ Paddle (Bug Key Mode) Paddle Straight Key Mode A/ Mode B Off/ On Off/ On USB/ LSB Mode B Off Off USB 5-13 5-13 5-13 5-13 5-13 5-9 3-5 3 MENU Menu Display 5-06 5-07 5-08 5-09 5-10 5-11 5-12 5-13 5-14 5-15 5-16 Automatic CW TX with Keying in SSB Mode Carrier Frequency Offset (SSB Mode to CW Mode) CW Keying Weight Ratio CW Keying Reversed Weight Ratio Interrupt Keying CW Message Entry Contest Number Contest Number Format Channel Number (Count-up Message) CW Rise Time CW/ Voice Message Retransmit Interval Time Menu Display Playback Time (Full-time Recording) Recording with Squelch Time-out Timer TX Inhibit Transmit Power Step Size ID Beep
- 5. CW Configurations -
Description Weight and Timing Off/ On CW transmission by keying in the SSB mode Carrier frequency correction when shifting from the SSB mode to CW mode Keyer weight Reverse keying auto weight ratio Off/ On Insert keying Off/ On Memory Method for registering CW message Contest number Contest number style Specifies the channel used for the count-up message CW rise time Repeat interval for retransmitting CW/voice message
- 6. TX/RX Filter & Misc. -
Description Message Playback time for constantly recorded audio Audio recording in tandem with squelch TX Management Setting Value Default Refer to Off/ On Automatic/ 2.5 to 4.0 (0.1 step) Text String/ Paddle 001 to 9999 (1 step) Off/ 190 to ANO/ 190 to ANT/ 90 to NO/ 90 to NT Off/ Channel 1 to Channel 8 1/ 2/ 4/ 6 [ms]
0 to 60 [s] (1 [s] step) Off Off Automatic Off Off Paddle 001 Off Off 6 [ms]
10 [s]
5-9 5-9 5-13 5-13 5-17 5-14 5-15 5-15 5-15 5-9 5-17 12-2 Setting Value Default Refer to Last 10/ Last 20/ Last 30 [s]
Off/ On Maximum continuous transmission time (Timeout timer) Off/ 3/ 5/ 10/ 20/ 30 [min]
Inhibits transmission Fine adjustment of TX output power ID beep Off/ On 1/ 5 [W]
Off/ 1 to 30 [min] (1 step) Filter Low-cut frequency of the TX filter TX Filter Low Cut (SSB/AM)
(SSB/AM) High-cut frequency of the TX filter TX Filter High Cut (SSB/AM)
(SSB/AM) Low-cut frequency of the TX filter TX Filter Low Cut (SSB-DATA/AM-
(SSB-DATA/AM-DATA) DATA) High-cut frequency of the TX filter TX Filter High Cut (SSB-DATA/AM-
(SSB-DATA/AM-DATA) DATA) Number of RX filters RX Filter Numbers Switches between High-cut/low-
Filter Control in SSB Mode (High/Low cut and WIDTH/SHIFT (SSB) and Shift/Width) Switches between High-cut/low-
Filter Control in SSB-DATA Mode cut and WIDTH/SHIFT (SSB-
(High/Low and Shift/Width) DATA) Audio delay in the VOX mode VOX Voice Delay (Microphone)
(MIC) VOX Voice Delay (Except Microphone) Audio delay in the VOX mode
(excluding MIC) Delta Frequency Display F display setting 10/ 100/ 200/ 300/ 400/ 500 [Hz]
2500/ 2600/ 2700/ 2800/ 2900/
3000/ 3500/ 4000 [Hz]
10/ 100/ 200/ 300/ 400/ 500 [Hz]
2500/ 2600/ 2700/ 2800/ 2900/
3000/ 3500/ 4000 [Hz]
2/ 3 High & Low Cut/ Shift & Width High & Low Cut/ Shift & Width Shift & Width Off/ Short/ Middle/ Long Off/ Short/ Middle/ Long Off/ On Middle Middle On Last 30 [s]
On Off Off 5 [W]
Off 100 [Hz]
2900 [Hz]
100 [Hz]
2900 [Hz]
High & Low 3 Cut 12-3 12-3 8-8 16-11 4-8 8-8 8-5 8-5 8-5 8-5 6-1 6-2 6-2 8-2 8-2 5-1 6-00 6-01 6-02 6-03 6-04 6-05 6-06 6-07 6-08 6-09 6-10 6-11 6-12 6-13 6-14 6-15 3-6 Menu Display
- 7. Rear Connectors -
Description Baud Rate MENU 3 Setting Value Default Refer to Baud Rate (COM Port) Baud Rate (Virtual Standard COM) Baud Rate (Virtual Enhanced COM) Decoded Character Output Baud rate of COM connector Baud rate of virtual COM
(Standard) connector Baud rate of virtual COM
(Enhanced) connector Decoded character output Data transfer Quick Data Transfer Overwrite Location (Quick Data Transfer) Destination for data via quick data Quick data transfer transfer USB: Audio Input Level ACC 2: Audio Input Level USB: Audio Output Level ACC 2: Audio Output Level TX Monitor Level (Rear Connectors) Audio Output Type (Rear Connectors) Display Audio input USB audio input level Audio input level of ACC 2 connector Audio output USB audio output level Audio output level from ACC 2 connector TX monitor level output to the rear panel connector Format of audio output from the rear panel connector
- 8. Bandscope -
Description 4800/ 9600/ 19200/ 38400/ 57600/
115200 [bps]
9600/ 19200/ 38400/ 57600/
115200 [bps]
9600/ 19200/ 38400/ 57600/
115200 [bps]
Off/ On Off/ 1 (TX/RX)/ 1 (Sub RX)/ 2 VFO/ Quick Memory 0 to 100 (1 step) 0 to 100 (1 step) 0 to 100 (1 step) 0 to 100 (1 step) Linked/ 0 to 20 (1 step) All/ Received Audio only Setting Value Bandscope Display during TX TX Audio Waveform Display Bandscope Maximum Hold Waterfall when Tuning (Center Mode) Waterfall display during tuning Waterfall Gradation Level Tuning Assist Line (SSB Mode) Frequency Scale (Center Mode) Touchscreen Tuning Step Correction
(SSB/ CW/ FSK/ PSK) Common Bandscope display during Off/ On transmission Waveform display for transmitted On/ Off audio Maximum hold time 10 [s]/ Continuous Straight/ Follow
(center mode) Gradation setting of the waterfall 1 to 10 (1 step) Auxiliary tuning line display (SSB only) Frequency scale in the center mode Correction steps for touchscreen tuning Off/ 300/ 400/ 500/ 600/ 700/ 800/
1000/ 1500/ 2210 [Hz]
Relative Frequency/ Absolute Frequency Off/ On 9600 [bps]
115200 [bps]
115200 [bps]
Off Off Quick Memory 50 50 100 50 Linked All 16-5 16-5 16-12 16-12 16-9 16-9 16-7 16-7 16-7 16-7 16-7 16-7 Default Refer to Off On 10 [s]
Straight 7 Off Relative Frequency On 7-6 8-4 7-5 7-2 7-4 7-4 7-2 7-5 7-00 7-01 7-02 7-03 7-04 7-05 7-06 7-07 7-08 7-09 7-10 7-11 Menu 8-00 8-01 8-02 8-03 8-04 8-05 8-06 8-07 Menu Display 9-00 Send Message by Function Keys
- 9. USB Keyboard -
Description USB keyboard Function key settings of USB keyboard 9-01 Keyboard Language USB keyboard language 9-02 9-03 Repeat Delay Time Repeat Speed Key repeat delay time for USB keyboard Key repeat speed for USB keyboard Setting Value Default Refer to Off/ On Japanese/ English (US)/ English
(UK)/ French/ French (Canadian)/
German/ Portuguese/ Portuguese
(Brazilian)/ Spanish/ Spanish
(Latin American)/ Italian 1 to 4 (1 step) 1 to 32 (1 step) On 16-5 English (US) 16-5 2 1 16-5 16-5 3-7 3 MENU Advanced Menu Items Display Menu Description Setting Value Target of external meter output 1 Switches the reference signal Adjusts the frequency of the reference oscillator Powers down the transverter function Indication Signal Type (External Meter 1) Indication Signal Type (External Target of external meter output 2 Meter 2) Output Level (External Meter 1) Level of external meter output 1 Output Level (External Meter 2) Level of external meter output 2 Reference Signal Source Reference Oscillator Calibration TX Power Down with Transverter Enabled TX Hold After Antenna Tuning Holds transmission at the end of antenna Antenna Tuner during RX Antenna Tuner Operation per Band Microphone Gain (FM Mode) PKS Polarity Reverse TX Inhibit While Busy CTCSS Unmute for Internal Speaker PSQ Logic State PSQ Reverse Condition PSQ/ PKS Pin Assignment
(COM Connector) Virtual Standard COM Port -
RTS Virtual Standard COM Port -
DTR Virtual Enhanced COM Port -
RTS Virtual Enhanced COM Port -
DTR External Display Resolution (External Display) Touchscreen Calibration Software License Agreement Important Notices concerning Free Open Source About Various Software License Agreements Firmware Version Automatic/ TX Power/ ALC/ Drain Voltage (Vd)/ Compression Level
(COMP)/ Current (Id)/ SWR Automatic/ TX Power/ ALC/ Drain Voltage (Vd)/ Compression Level
(COMP)/ Current (Id)/ SWR 0 to 100 [%] (1 step) 0 to 100 [%] (1 step) Internal/ External
-500 to +500 (1 step) Off/ On Off/ On tuning Antenna tuner behavior while receiving Off/ On Off/ On Antenna tuner behavior for each band 0 to 100 (1 step) FM microphone gain Reversing of PSK polarity Off/ On Inhibits transmission while in the BUSY Off/ On state Mute/ Unmute Mute behavior of CTCSS SQL control signal logic Low/ Open Off/ Busy/ Sql/ Send/ Busy-Send/
SQL output conditions Sql-Send Off/ On PSQ/PKS mode setting RTS settings of virtual COM port Flow Control/ CW Keying/ RTTY
(Standard) Keying/ PTT/ DATA SEND Off/ CW Keying/ RTTY Keying/
DTR settings of virtual COM port PTT/ DATA SEND
(Standard) RTS settings of virtual COM port Off/ CW Keying/ RTTY Keying/
(Standard) PTT/ DATA SEND RTS settings of virtual COM port Off/ CW Keying/ RTTY Keying/
PTT/ DATA SEND
(Standard) Off/ On External display output Resolution settings of external display 800 x 600/ 848 x 480 Touchscreen adjustment Software license of this transceiver Ways to obtain open source resources used by this transceiver Licenses related to software used by this transceiver Firmware version used by this transceiver 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Reset Menu Items Display Menu Reset Memory Channel Reset VFO Reset Standard Reset (The Clock, TX Inhibit, and Transmit Power Upper Limit will not be reset) Standard reset Full Reset Menu reset Memory channel reset VFO reset Full reset Description 3-8 Default TX Power Automatic 50 [%]
50 [%]
Internal 0 On Off Off Off 50 Off Off Mute Low Sql Off Flow Control 800 x 600 Off Off Off On Refer to 16-6 16-6 16-6 16-6 16-8 17-2 16-15 4-11 4-12 4-12 5-28 16-12 16-12 16-8 16-8 16-8 16-8 16-12 16-12 16-12 16-12 16-7 16-7 17-3 i ii ii 17-1 Refer to 17-1 Linear Amplifier Menu Items Display Band Linear Amplifier Keying Logic TX Delay TX Delay Time (CW/FSK/PSK) TX Delay Time (SSB/FM/AM) Internal Relay Control External ALC Voltage Dimmer Menu Items Dimmer Display 1 2 3 4 Display LED Display LED Display LED Display LED Description Setting Value Target bands of the linear amplifier menu HF/ 50M/ 70M (E type) Linear amplifier ON/OFF Linear amplifier TX control Linear amplifier TX delay ON/OFF Linear amplifier TX delay time (CW/FSK/
PSK) Linear amplifier TX delay time
(SSB/FM/AM) Linear amplifier relay control Linear amplifier external ALC voltage Off/ On Active Low/ Active High Off/ On 5/ 10/ 15/ 20/ 25/ 30/ 35/ 40
[ms]
5/ 10/ 15/ 20/ 25/ 30/ 35/ 40/
45/ 50 [ms]
Off/ On
-1/ -2/ -3/ -4/ -5/ -6/ -7/ -8/ -9/
-10/ -11/ -12 [V]
MENU 3 Refer to 16-14 Default HF Off Active Low Off 15 [ms]
35 [ms]
Off
-4 [V]
Default Refer to Description Screen brightness LED brightness Screen brightness LED brightness Screen brightness LED brightness Screen brightness LED brightness Setting Value 5 to 100 (5-step) 5 to 100 (5-step) 5 to 100 (5-step) 5 to 100 (5-step) 5 to 100 (5-step) 5 to 100 (5-step) 0 to 100 (5-step) 5 to 100 (5-step) 100 100 75 75 50 50 25 25 USB/File Management Menu Items Display Description Setting Value Removes the USB flash drive safely Safe Removal of USB Flash Drive Reads transceiver settings data Read Configuration Data Saves transceiver settings data Save Configuration Data Copies files to PC (via USB cable) Copy Files to PC (via USB cable) Copy Files to USB Flash Drive Copies files to USB flash drive Read Image Files for Screen Saver (Type 3) Reads images for screen saver Delete Files (Internal Memory) File Storage Location Format USB Flash Drive Deletes files stored in the internal memory of the transceiver Configures the destination for saving files Internal Memory/ USB Flash USD flash drive format Drive Default Internal Memory 4-2 Refer to 11-6 11-3 11-2 11-4 11-5 16-1 11-5 11-2 11-5 3-9 3 MENU Clock Menu Items Menu Display Description 0.Date and Time 0-00 Date (Local Clock) Date of the local clock Time (Local Clock) Timezone (Local Clock) Timezone (Secondary Clock) Secondary Clock Identification Letter Time of the local clock Time zone of the local clock Time zone of the auxiliary clock Auxiliary clock identifier Year: '18 (2018) to '99 (2099) Month: JAN/ FEB/ MAR/ APR/
MAY/ JUN/ JUL/ AUG/ SEP/ OCT/
NOV/ DEC Day: 01 to 31 00:00 to 23:59 (hour: 00 to 23, minute: 00 to 59) UTC -14:00 to UTC 00:00 to UTC
+14:00 (15-minute step) UTC -14:00 to UTC 00:00 to UTC
+14:00 (15-minute step) Single character (A to Z) Setting Value Default Refer to Year: '18 Month: JAN Day: 01 00:00 UTC +00:00 UTC +00:00 U K type: MMM/
DD/'YY E type: DD/
MMM/'YY Both Off Blank Default 192.168.1. 255.255.255. On 100 0 Blank Blank Blank Fixed value for each transceiver 14-1 14-2 14-3 Refer to 15-1 Date display format Clock display setting MMM/DD/'YY, DD/MMM/'YY, 'YY/
MMM/ DD Off/ Local Clock/ Secondary Clock/
Both 1.Automatic Time Correction Automatic clock setting (NTP) NTP server address Off/ On Up to 50 alphanumeric characters Description DHCP IP address Subnet mask Default gateway Primary DNS server Secondary DNS server MAC address Setting Value Off/ On 1.0.0.0 to 223.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.252 1.0.0.0 to 223.255.255.255 1.0.0.0 to 223.255.255.255 1.0.0.0 to 223.255.255.255 Description Programmable Timer Type of program timer behavior Repeat setting for program timer behavior Day of week setting for activating program timer - Sun Day of week setting for activating program timer - Mon Day of week setting for activating program timer - Tue Day of week setting for activating program timer - Wed Day of week setting for activating program timer - Thu Day of week setting for activating program timer - Fri Day of week setting for activating program timer - Sat Program timer operation time start Program timer operation time end Setting Value Default Refer to Off/ Power-on/ Power-off/ Power-
on/ off/ Record Off/ On Check/ Uncheck Check/ Uncheck Check/ Uncheck Check/ Uncheck Check/ Uncheck Check/ Uncheck Check/ Uncheck 00:00 to 23:59 00:00 to 23:59 Off Off Check Check Check Check Check Check Check 00:00 00:00 14-3 0-01 0-02 0-03 0-04 0-05 0-06 1-00 1-01 Date Display Format Clock Display Clock Correction using the NTP Server NTP Server Address LAN Menu Items Menu 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Display DHCP IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server MAC Address Timer Menu Items Display Timer Mode Repeat Day of the Week - Sun Day of the Week - Mon Day of the Week - Tue Day of the Week - Wed Day of the Week - Thu Day of the Week - Fri Day of the Week - Sat Power-on Time Power-off Time 3-10 MENU 3 Setting Value Default Refer to Description Programmable Timer Frequency during program timer operation Mode during program timer operation Sleep timer Sleep Timer 30.000 kHz to 59.999.999 MHz LSB/ USB/ CW/ CW-R/ PSK/ PSK-
R/ FSK/ FSK-R/ FM/ AM/ LSB-
DATA/ USB-DATA/ FM-DATA/
AM-DATA 14.000.000 USB Off/ 5/ 10/ 15/ 30/ 60/ 90/ 120 [min] Off Description Auto mode ON/OFF status Frequency category of auto mode (#0) Mode of auto mode (#0) Setting Value Auto Mode Off/ Auto Mode On 30.000 kHz to 59.999990 MHz LSB/ USB/ CW/ CW-R/ PSK/ PSK-
R/ FSK/ FSK-R/ FM/ AM/ LSB-
DATA/ USB-DATA/ FM-DATA/
AM-DATA Default Auto Mode Off 9.5 MHz LSB 14-3 14-5 Refer to 4-4 Display Frequency/Mode Sleep Timer Auto Mode Menu Items Display Auto Mode Frequency Mode KNS Menu Items Description Setting Value Default Refer to Menu 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Display KNS Operation (LAN Connector) Administrator ID Administrator Password Built-in VoIP Audio Input Level (VoIP) Audio Output Level (VoIP) VoIP Jitter Buffer Prohibit AF Gain Control Access Log Registered Users' Remote Operation KNS operation (LAN connection) KNS administrator ID KNS administrator password Built-in VoIP function VoIP outgoing audio input level VoIP incoming audio output level VoIP jitter absorption buffer Prohibits volume control Log function Remote operation by registered user Session Time Session time KNS Welcome Message KNS welcome message Off/ On (LAN)/ On (Internet) 1 to maximum 32 alphanumeric characters 1 to maximum 32 alphanumeric characters Off/ On 0 to 100 (1 step) 0 to 100 (1 step) 200/ 500/ 800 [ms]
Off/ On Off/ On Off/ On 1 [min]/ 2 [min]/ 3 [min]/ 5 [min]/ 10
[min]/ 15 [min]/ 20 [min]/ 30 [min]/
40 [min]/ 50 [min]/ 60 [min]/ 90
[min]/ 120 [min]/ Unlimited Up to 128 single-byte alphanumeric characters 15-3 15-4 Off Blank Blank On 50 100 Off Off Off 200 [ms]
Unlimited 15-6 Blank Frequency Marker Menu Items Display Frequency Description Marker frequency (#0 to 49) Setting Value 30.000 kHz to 59.999.999 MHz Default Refer to 7-5 3-11
. 3-12
1 2 | Users Manual 2 | Users Manual | 1.74 MiB |
4 BASIC OPERATIONS Turning ON/OFF the Power Check to ensure that the connections are correct before turning on the power of the regulated DC power supply. 1 Press [
When the power turns on, the [
message screen (KENWOOD, HELLO) is displayed, followed by the frequency display.
] LED lights up in green. The
]. 2 Press and hold [
]. The power is turned off. The message screen HELLO can be changed. (Menu
[0-06] Power-on Message) When a voltage that exceeds approximately DC 18 V is applied, the overvoltage protection circuit is activated and the power is turned off automatically. surroundings is extremely low, it may take a while before the screen reaches the normal level of brightness. When the temperature of this transceiver or the To prevent damage of the internal data, do not turn off the regulated DC power supply while leaving the power of the TS-890S on. Current Flow when Power is OFF When the power of the external power supply is ON, a small amount of electric current is flowing even when the power of this transceiver is OFF. The amount of current that flows through when power is OFF varies depending on whether this transceiver is connected to a PC or connected for KNS operation. KNS Operation Setting PC Connection via USB No Yes Off On (LAN) LAN MODE Approx. 20 mA Approx. 4 mA Approx. 95 mA Approx. 110 mA On (Internet) WAN MODE Approx. 150 mA Approx. 210 mA Refer to (1-4) for details on PC connection and (15-2) for details on KNS operation. BASIC OPERATIONS 4 Screen Display Settings The background color of the screen, function key guide display and font type for the frequency display can be changed. Changing the Background Color A background color for the screen can be chosen from the three choices available. Configure in Menu [0-00] Color Display Pattern Setting Value Type 1 (default)/ Type 2/ Type 3 Type 1: Black Type 2: Blue Type 3: Dark green Changing the Type of Function Key Display A function key display can be chosen from the three choices available. Configure in Menu [0-01] Function Key Style Setting Value Type 1 (default)/ Type 2/ Type 3 Type 1: Standard Type 2: Gradation Type 3: Illuminated Changing the Frequency Display Font Type A font type for the frequency display can be chosen from the five choices available. Configure in Menu [0-02] Font Style (Frequency Display) Setting Value Font 1 (default)/ Font 2/ Font 3/ Font 4/ Font 5 Font 1: Type 1 fonts Font 2: Type 2 fonts Font 3: Type 1 italic fonts Font 4: Type 2 italic fonts Font 5: 7-segment fonts 4-1 4 BASIC OPERATIONS Dimmer Below are steps to adjust the brightness of the screen and LED. Switching the Brightness Level The preset brightness of the screen and LED can be adjusted according to the surrounding conditions. 1 Press [MENU]. 2 Press F [DIMMER]. Pressing F [DIMMER] each time switches the dimmer setting in the following sequence: DIMMER 1 DIMMER 2 DIMMER 3 DIMMER 4. Adjusting the Dimmer Level The preset values for Dimmer 1, Dimmer 2, Dimmer 3 and Dimmer 4 can be configured to a different value for Display
(screen) and LED respectively. 1 Press and hold F [DIMMER]. The Dimmer configuration screen appears.
]/ F4 [
.2 Press F2 [DIMMER] to select a dimmer preset. 3 Press F3 [
] to select Display or 4 Press F5 []/ F6 [+] or turn [MULTI/CH] to change the The setting values and default values are shown below. LED. setting value. Dimmer 1 2 3 4 Display Display LED Display LED Display LED Display LED Setting Value 5 to 100 (5-step) 5 to 100 (5-step) 5 to 100 (5-step) 5 to 100 (5-step) 5 to 100 (5-step) 5 to 100 (5-step) 0 to 100 (5-step) 5 to 100 (5-step) Default 100 100 75 75 50 50 25 25 Configuring the screen brightness to 0 and exiting the menu turns all the lights off. Pressing [MENU] at this time displays the screen with the dimmest level of brightness. 4-2 Adjusting AF Gain Below are the steps to adjust the volume so that sound can be heard from the speaker. Turn the [AF] control. Turning the control to the right raises the volume, while turning to the left lowers it. If no sound is heard or if only a light noise-like sound is heard even when the [AF] control is turned all the way to the right, the squelch may be closed. Adjust the squelch level in this case. The volume of the beep sound, sidetone and announcement cannot be adjusted using the [AF]
control. Adjusting RF Gain Below are the steps to adjust the gain of the RF amplifier. Under normal circumstances, turn the [RF] control all the way to the right. To enhance clarity when there is external noise or interference by other stations, turn the control slightly to the left to lower the gain level. Turn the [RF] control. Start by checking the peak scale of the S meter, followed by turning the [RF] control in the anti-clockwise direction without lowering the peak value of the S meter. Doing so attenuates signals weaker than this level and eases reception from the desired station. Depending on the type of antenna, gain level and band condition, better effect may sometimes be achieved by turning the [RF] control slightly to the left rather than all the way to the right. In the FM mode, turning the [RF] control does not change the gain level. Under normal circumstances, turn the
[RF] control all the way to the right. Adjusting the Squelch Level Below are steps to adjust the threshold level for squelch, a function for eliminating noise that is heard when receiving a frequency with no signal. Turn the [SQL] control. Configure the squelch level to the position where noise disappears. When squelch opens upon receiving a signal, the
[BUSY/TX] LED lights up in green. The position of the [SQL] control at which noise disappears varies according to the strength of the noise and surrounding conditions such as temperature. The position of the control knob at which noise disappears also varies depending on whether this transceiver is in the FM mode or in other modes. Selecting VFO A/ B This transceiver is equipped with two VFOs, A and B. The two VFOs operate independently of each other, and thus can be configured to different frequencies and modes. Additionally, one VFO can be configured to the TX frequency and the other to the RX frequency. Press [A/B]. Pressing [A/B] each time switches between VFO A and VFO B. The currently selected VFO is indicated as <<
>> or
<<
Pressing and holding down [A/B] configures both VFO A and VFO B to the same frequency and mode.
>>. Selecting an Operating Band Below are steps to select the frequency bandwidth to use. A different frequency bandwidth can be selected for VFO A and VFO B. By using the numeric keypad or [GENE] key, it is possible to call up an amateur frequency between 1.8 MHz and 50/70 (E type) MHz or a general band frequency at one touch. This transceiver comes with a band memory feature that is able to store up to 5 pairs of frequencies and modes (3 pairs in the default setting) that were used most recently for each band. Press [1 (1.8)] to [0 (50)] or [GENE]. Pressing one of the above keys saves the current VFO frequency and mode and calls up the next memory band at the same time. Pressing the key each time switches to the next band memory in sequence from band memory 1 to band memory 5. Frequencies that are out of the range of the band memory will not be stored. The default values for each of the band memories are as follows. Frequency K Type Band/
(MHz)/
Mode 1.8 MHz/
1.62 to 2 3.5 MHz/
3 to 4 7 MHz/
6.5 to 7.5 10 MHz/
10 to 10.5 14 MHz/
13.5 to 14.5 18 MHz/
18 to 19 21 MHz/
20.5 to 21.5 24 MHz/
24 to 25 28 MHz/
27.5 to 30 50 MHz/
50 to 54 General/
0.030 to 60 1 Band Memory 1.8/
CW 3.5/
LSB 7.0/
LSB 10.1/
CW 14.0/
USB 18.068/
USB 21.0/
USB 24.89/
USB 28/
USB 50/
USB 0.1357/
CW Default Setting (MHz)/Mode Band Band Memory Memory 4 2 1.83/
1.81/
CW CW 3.8/
3.6/
LSB LSB 7.05/
7.15/
LSB LSB 10.13/
10.11/
CW CW 14.20/
14.1/
USB USB 18.15/
18.1/
USB USB 21.2/
21.1/
USB USB 24.96/
24.92/
USB USB 28.3/
29/
USB FM 51/
50.125/
FM USB 0.472/
5.3305/
CW USB Band Memory 3 1.82/
CW 3.7/
LSB 7.1/
LSB 10.12/
CW 14.15/
USB 18.11/
USB 21.15/
USB 24.94/
USB 28.5/
USB 50.2/
USB 1/
AM Band Memory 5 1.84/
CW 3.9/
LSB 7.2/
LSB 10.14/
CW 14.25/
USB 18.16/
USB 21.3/
USB 24.98/
USB 29.3/
FM 52/
FM 5.4035/
USB BASIC OPERATIONS 4 Frequency E Type Band/
(MHz) 1.8 MHz/
1.62 to 2 3.5 MHz/
3 to 4 7 MHz/
6.5 to 7.5 10 MHz/
10 to 10.5 14 MHz/
13.5 to 14.5 18 MHz/
18 to 19 21 MHz/
20.5 to 21.5 24 MHz/ 24 to 25 28 MHz/
27.5 to 30 50 MHz/
50 to 54 General/
0.030 to 74.8 Band Memory 5 1.82/
CW 3.7/
LSB 7.2/
LSB 10.14/
CW 14.25/
USB 18.16/
USB Band Band Memory Memory 3 1 1.85/
1.83/
CW CW 3.6/
3.5/
LSB LSB 7.1/
7.0/
LSB LSB 10.12/
10.1/
CW CW 14.15/
14.0/
USB USB 18.11/
18.068/
USB USB 21.0/ USB 21.1/ USB 21.15/
USB 24.89/
24.94/
USB USB 28.5/
28/
USB USB 50/
50.2/
USB USB 0.472/
70.1/
USB CW Default Setting (MHz)/Mode Band Band Memory Memory 4 2 1.81/
1.84/
CW CW 3.65/
3.55/
LSB LSB 7.05/
7.15/
LSB LSB 10.11/
10.13/
CW CW 14.20/
14.1/
USB USB 18.1/
18.15/
USB USB 21.2/ USB 21.3/ USB 24.96/
USB 29/
FM 51/
FM 0.999/
AM 24.98/
USB 29.3/
FM 52/
FM 5.2585/
USB 24.92/
USB 28.3/
USB 50.15/
USB 0.1357/
CW When the number of band memories is reduced, the change will be applied when the band memory is switched. Changing the Number of Band Memories The number of band memories can be changed. Configure in Menu [3-11] Number of Band Memories Setting Value 1/ 3 (default)/ 5 4-3 4 BASIC OPERATIONS Selecting an Operating Mode Below are steps to select an operating mode. It is also possible to configure the operating mode to DATA mode for data communication. SSB (LSB-USB) Mode Press [LSB/USB]. Pressing [LSB/USB] each time switches between LSB and USB. CW/ CW-R Mode Press [CW/ CW-R]. Pressing [CW/ CW-R] each time switches between CW and CW-R. FSK/ FSK-R/ PSK/ PSK-R Mode Press [FSK/PSK]. Pressing [FSK/PSK] each time switches between FSK and PSK. Pressing and holding down [FSK/PSK] each time in the respective modes switches the mode to FSK-R and PSK-R. FM/ AM Mode Press [FM/AM]. Pressing [FM/AM] each time switches between FM and AM. While in the FM mode, pressing and holding down [FM/AM]
each time switches between FM and FMN (FM Narrow). The mode and DATA mode settings are stored in the FM narrow and normal settings are stored in each of the band memory. following bandwidths: HF, 50 MHz and 70 MHz. 4-4 DATA Mode This is a mode for data communication by connecting an external device. 1 Press the mode key to configure to FM, AM or SSB
(LSB/USB) mode. 2 Press [DATA]. Pressing [DATA] each time switches between DATA OFF and DATA ON. DATA OFF DATA ON LSB-D USB-D FM-D FMN-D AM-D LSB USB FM FMN AM During LSB Mode During USB Mode During FM Mode During FMN Mode During AM Mode Turn OFF the speech processor before performing data Settings such as the method of standby and muting communication. audio input path that is not used during transmission can be configured for each of the DATA OFF and DATA ON statuses. Auto Mode By configuring the auto mode frequency point and the corresponding operating mode in advance, the operating mode will switch automatically when the frequency exceeds the auto mode frequency point after it has been changed. Auto mode is a convenient function that allows automatic Up to 32 points can be configured for the auto mode frequency. Turning ON/OFF Auto Mode 1 Press [MENU]. 2 Press F [AUTO MODE] to display the Auto Mode switching of the operating mode according to the band plan. screen. 3 Pressing F1 [A.MODE] each time switches the Auto
>> is displayed. Mode to ON or OFF. When the Auto Mode is turned ON, <<
This display disappears when Auto Mode is turned OFF. Configuring Auto Mode Frequency Points 1 Display the Auto Mode screen. 2 Turn the Tuning control to select a frequency point. Align the frequency of the selected band with the frequency to register. 3 Press the Mode key or press and hold down the key to switch to the mode to which the band is to be registered. LSBUSBCWCW-RFSKFSK-RPSKPSK-RFMFMNAM 4 Press F4 [COPY] to copy the frequency and mode. The frequency and mode of the selected band is imported into the list as a new classification. To delete a registered classification, press F2 [
]/ F3
] or turn the [MULTI/CH] control to select the row to
[
delete, followed by pressing F5 [DELETE] to delete the row. Doing so shifts up the classifications after the deleted row in the list. Preset Frequency Range frequency and mode for all the points. 5 Repeat the steps from 2 to 5 to configure the 6 Press F6 [OK]. When the Auto Mode is turned ON, the mode that is assigned to the respective channels will be automatically selected. In the SSB mode, LSB mode will be selected for frequencies below 10.1 MHz, and USB mode will be selected for frequencies that are 10.1 MHz or higher. The table below shows an example when auto mode frequency is configured to the HF/50/70 MHz band. Frequency 1.620 MHz 2.000 MHz 3.500 MHz 3.525 MHz 10.100 MHz 10.150 MHz 14.000 MHz 14.070 MHz 14.112 MHz 18.068 MHz 18.110 MHz 21.000 MHz 21.070 MHz 21.125 MHz 21.150 MHz 24.890 MHz 24.930 MHz 28.000 MHz 28.070 MHz 28.150 MHz 28.200 MHz 29.000 MHz 30.000 MHz 50.000 MHz 50.100 MHz 51.000 MHz 52.000 MHz 30 kHzf<1.62 MHz 1.62 MHzf<2.0 MHz 2.0 MHzf<3.5 MHz 3.5 MHzf<3.535 MHz 3.535 MHzf<10.1 MHz 10.1 MHzf<10.15 MHz 10.15 MHzf<14.0 MHz 14.0 MHzf<14.07 MHz 14.07 MHzf<14.112 MHz 14.112 MHzf<18.068 MHz 18.068 MHzf<18.11 MHz 18.11 MHzf<21.0 MHz 21.0 MHzf<21.07 MHz 21.07 MHzf<21.125 MHz 21.125 MHzf<21.15 MHz 21.15 MHzf<24.89 MHz 24.89 MHzf<24.93 MHz 24.93 MHzf<28.0 MHz 28.0 MHzf<28.07 MHz 28.07 MHzf<28.15 MHz 28.15 MHzf<28.2 MHz 28.2 MHzf<29.0 MHz 29.0 MHzf<30.0 MHz 30.0 MHzf<50.0 MHz 50.0 MHzf<50.1 MHz 50.1 MHzf<51.0 MHz 51.0 MHzf<52.0 MHz Mode AM CW LSB CW LSB CW USB CW-R FSK USB CW USB CW FSK-R CW USB CW USB CW FSK CW USB FM-DATA 52.0 MHzf<60.0 MHz (K type) 52.0 MHzf<74.8 MHz (E type) USB CW USB FM USB BASIC OPERATIONS 4 Adjustment of Frequencies The steps to adjust the TX and RX frequencies are described below. Adjustment Using the Tuning Control Turn the Tuning control to increase or decrease the frequency. Adjustment Using the Microphone Key Press the [UP] or [DWN] key on the microphone to increase or decrease the frequency. FINE Tuning The step frequency of the Tuning control can be configured to one-
tenth of the step size. Doing so allows fine-tuning of the frequency. Press [FINE]. Pressing [FINE] each time toggles FINE tuning between ON and OFF. When fine tuning is set to OFF, the 1 Hz digit frequency display will be grayed out. When in the FM or AM mode, both the 10 Hz and 1 Hz digits are grayed out. Setting fine tuning to ON turns off the gray-out display and shows the frequency in full up to the 1 Hz digit. Depending on the operating frequency, the 1 Hz digit display may not gray out on the operating frequency display of the transverter even when fine tuning is set to OFF. Configuring the Number of Steps per Revolution of the Tuning Control The number of steps per revolution of the Tuning control can be changed. Configure in Menu [3-07] Tuning Control: Number of Steps per Revolution Setting Value 250/ 500/ 1000 (default) [Step]
Configuring the Fast Forward Rate of the Tuning Control This function enables the speed of frequency change to increase by 2 to 10 times with respect to the speed of turning when the Tuning control is turned at a fast speed. Configure in Menu [3-08] Tuning Speed Control Setting Value Off (default)/ 2 to 10 (1 step) Configuring the Sensitivity for Starting the Fast Forward Operation Configuring this to a larger value increases the sensitivity for starting the fast forward operation. Configure in Menu [3-09] Tuning Speed Control Sensitivity Setting Value 1 to 5 (default) to 10 (1 step) 4-5 4 BASIC OPERATIONS Frequency Adjustment Using the [MULTI/CH] Control Turning the [MULTI/CH] control enables the frequency to be changed quickly. The frequency increases or decreases in increments based on the configured step size. Turn the [MULTI/CH] control to increase or decrease the frequency. The default frequency per step is 1 kHz in the SSB mode, 0.5 kHz in the CW/ FSK/ PSK mode, 5 kHz in the AM mode and 10 kHz in the FM mode. Rounding the Frequency When the frequency is adjusted by turning the [MULTI/CH]
control, the new frequency is automatically rounded to the integer multiple of the step size. Rounding of the frequency can also be disabled. Configure in Menu [3-00] Frequency Rounding Off
(Multi/Channel Control) Off/ On (default) Setting Value Configuring the Frequency Step Size of the
[MULTI/CH] Control The frequency per step when the [MULTI/CH] control is turned can be configured or changed to a different value for each mode. SSB Mode Configure in Menu [3-01] SSB Mode Frequency Step Size (Multi/Channel Control) 0.5/ 1 (default)/ 2.5/ 5/ 10 [kHz]
Setting Value CW/ FSK/ PSK Mode Configure in Menu [3-02] CW/FSK/PSK Mode Frequency Step Size (Multi/Channel Control) 0.5 (default)/ 1/ 2.5/ 5/ 10 [kHz]
Setting Value FM Mode Setting Value AM Mode Configure in Menu [3-03] FM Mode Frequency Step Size (Multi/Channel Control) 5/ 6.25/ 10 (default)/ 12.5/ 15/ 20/ 25/ 30/ 50/ 100 [kHz]
Configure in Menu [3-04] AM Mode Frequency Step Size (Multi/Channel Control) Setting Value 5 (default)/ 6.25/ 10/ 12.5/ 15/ 20/ 25/ 30/ 50/ 100 [kHz]
Switching the AM Broadcast Frequency in 9 kHz Steps In the BC band (medium frequency band) from 522 kHz to 1710 kHz and LF band (long frequency band) from 153 kHz to 279 kHz, the RX frequency can be adjusted in steps of 9 kHz by turning the [MULTI/CH] control. Configure in Menu [3-05] 9 kHz Step in AM Broadcast Band (Multi/Channel Control) Off (K type: default)/ On (E type: default) Setting Value 4-6 Adjusting Frequency in MHz Steps The frequency can be adjusted in units of MHz. 1 Press [MHz]. Pressing [MHz] each time toggles the MHz step function between ON and OFF. When the function is turned ON, <<
2 Turn the [MULTI/CH] control while the function is turned ON. The frequency increases or decreases according to the MHz frequency step configured in Menu [3-06].
>> lights up. Configuring the Frequency Step Size in MHz Configure in Menu [3-06] MHz Step Setting Value 100/ 500/ 1000 (default) [kHz]
Direct Input of Frequency Value If the desired frequency is far apart from the current frequency value, the fastest way is to input the frequency value directly using the numeric keypad. 1 Press [ENT]. A screen to input the frequency for the operable band appears with all the frequency digits displayed as -. 2 Key in a frequency value using the numeric keypad.
- changes into a numeric value when a numeric key is pressed and a value can be input starting from the highest-order digit. To enter 1.82 MHz, press [0/50], [1/1.8], [8/24] followed by
[2/3.5], and press [ENT] when input is complete. To enter a frequency lower than 6 MHz for K type transceivers, start by keying in a 0. To enter a frequency lower than 8 MHz for E type transceivers, start by keying in a 0. Pressing [CLR] halfway through the input process clears the input and restores the VFO frequency display before the input. During fine tuning, a frequency up to 59.99999 MHz can be input
(input of 60 MHz is not allowed). Pressing [ENT] halfway through the input process fills the remaining digits with 0 and completes the input. When a frequency value out of the TX and RX range is input, an alarm tone is output and the input value is automatically cleared. If the first input value is between 0 and 5, input starts from the 10 MHz digit. If the first input value is between 6 and 9, input starts from the 1 MHz digit. 0 that is entered up to the 10 Hz digit will not appear as 0 in the display. Inputting a frequency value automatically switches RIT and XIT to OFF but does not clear the offset frequency. When fine tuning is OFF, the smallest digit for input is the 10 Hz digit in modes other than AM and FM, and 100 Hz in the AM and FM mode. When in the auto mode, the mode switches automatically after input of frequency is complete.
- is displayed for all digits of the frequency value. Frequency Input History The latest 10 frequency values that were input using the numeric keypad are stored in the transceiver. To use the same frequency value, it is possible to retrieve it from the history. 1 Press [ENT] to enable input of a frequency value. 2 Turn the [MULTI/CH] control to display the history. record number (E0 to E9) are displayed. The first frequency value shown is the most recent input. record numbers in ascending order. The larger the record number, the older the record. Turning the control to the right jumps to the subsequent Frequency values that were previously entered and the BASIC OPERATIONS 4 Transmission Audio Transmission 1 Press and hold the [PTT] key on the microphone or press the [SEND] key. The transmitting status is activated and the [BUSY/TX] LED lights up in red. 2 Speak into the microphone in the normal tone and loudness. 3 Release the [PTT] key on the microphone or press the
[SEND] key. Doing so restores the receiving status. 3 Press [ENT] to configure the selected frequency to VFO. When 10 frequency values have been registered, the oldest input in the history will be deleted when another frequency value is registered. Frequency Lock The frequency lock function disables operation of specific keys or control knobs to prevent the frequency from being altered accidentally due to erroneous operation of the key or control knobs. Press [LOCK] to lock the frequency value. The [LOCK] LED lights up in orange. The following operations are disabled when frequency lock is turned on. Frequency tuning Change of memory channel Change of quick memory channel Direct input of frequency value Registration of memory channel Starting program scan or VFO scan Starting memory scan or quick memory scan Switching between the VFO and memory channel modes Frequency band selection Memory shift Configuring the frequencies for VFO A and VFO B to the same value Switching between VFO A and VFO B Mode selection Switching to FINE tuning CW auto tune Quick memory channel mode switch Registration of quick memory channel Touchscreen tuning When Tuning Control Lock is selected in Menu [3-10], only the Tuning control will be locked. Lock Target This function allows the selection of a control knob to be locked. Configure in Menu [3-10] Lock Function Setting Value Frequency Lock (default)/ Tuning Control Lock Frequency Lock: Locks both Tuning and [MULTI/CH]
controls. Tuning Control Lock: Locks only the Tuning control. CW Transmission Performing the following steps when a key or paddle is connected enables transmission in the CW mode. 1 Press [CW/ CW-R] to select CW mode. 2 Press [VOX] to enable break-in. 3 Operate the keyer or paddle. Adjusting Microphone Gain Microphone gain can be adjusted in the SSB or AM mode as follows while referring to the ALC meter display. 1 Press and hold the [PTT] key on the microphone or press the [SEND] key. The transmitting status is activated and the [BUSY/TX] LED 2 Speak into the microphone in the normal tone and 3 Turn the [MIC/PITCH] control to adjust the microphone loudness. gain level. Microphone gain is displayed as MIC:nnn at the top of the screen. [nnn: 0 to 100]
lights up in red. When in the SSB mode Turn the [MIC/PITCH] control while speaking into the microphone. The ALC meter fluctuates according to the volume level. Ensure that the maximum level does not exceed the ALC zone during the adjustment. When in the AM mode Turn the [MIC/PITCH] control while speaking into the microphone. Adjust in such a way that the PWR meter fluctuates slightly according to the volume level. 4 Release the [PTT] key on the microphone or press the
[SEND] key. Depending on the squelch level setting, the [BUSY/TX] LED may light up in green or go off. 4-7 TX Output Power Limiter The TX output power limiter can be used to limit the TX output power. This is a function to prevent the TX output power level from exceeding the preconfigured level for each band when the
[POWER] control is turned. It can also be used to limit TX output power only in the DATA mode with a specific band. Turning ON/OFF TX Output Power Limiter Press F [MAX-Po]. Pressing F [MAX-Po] each time toggles the TX output power limiter function between ON and OFF. When the TX output power limiter is turned ON, pressing F
[MAX-Po] displays the confirmation screen for turning off the TX output power limiter. Configuring the TX Output Power Limiter 1 Press and hold F [MAX-Po] to display the TX output power limiter screen.
]/ F5 [
]/ F3 [
.2 Press F4 [
3 Press F2 [
] to select a frequency
] to select the TX output band. power to limit. Select the TX output power item to limit as follows. Max Power Limit: For configuring the TX output power limit during transmission. The TX output power limit can be configured separately for TX Tune Power: For configuring the TX output power limit during TX tuning. to select a limit value for TX output power. To restore the default setting, press and hold F1 the SSB, CW, FSK/PSK, FM/AM and DATA modes. 4 Press F6 [] / F7 [+] or turn the [MULTI/CH] control
[(RESET)]. A different TX output power limit cannot be configured for the antenna connectors (antenna 1/2). If Advanced Menu [06] TX Power Down with Transverter Enabled is configured to On, the F [MAX-Po] and watt display at the right edge of the screen will disappear when the transverter or drive output is turned ON. 4 BASIC OPERATIONS Speak into the microphone in the normal tone and loudness. Make sure that your mouth is not too close to the microphone and do not speak too loudly. Doing so may increase the extent of distortion, thus causing audibility to deteriorate at the receiving end. To use a speech processor, refer to Speech Processor. Note that the output level tend to be larger when a microphone with a built-in AF amplifier is used. Microphone gain in the FM mode can be configured in Advanced Menu [10] Microphone Gain (FM Mode). Adjusting TX Output Power Maintain a TX output power level that is as low as possible while ensuring that communication can be carried out smoothly. Doing so reduces the likelihood of interference with other stations. The TX output power level can also be adjusted while transmission is in progress. Turn the [POWER] control to adjust the TX output power. Turning the [POWER] control to the right increases the output level, while turning it to the left reduces the output level. The selectable range varies with the band and mode in use as follows. HF Band 50 MHz Band 70 MHz Band (E type) 5 to 25 [W]
5 to 25 [W]
5 to 12.5 [W]
Output is displayed in a step size of 1 W. An output of Other than AM 5 to 100 [W]
5 to 100 [W]
5 to 50 [W]
AM 12.5 W will be shown as 12 W. Fine Adjustment of TX Output Power It is possible to alter the step size when the [POWER] control is turned. Configure in Menu [6-04] Transmit Power Step Size Setting Value 1 [W]/ 5 (default) [W]
1[W]: Adjusts the TX output level in a step size of 1 W. 5[W]: Adjusts the TX output level in a step size of 5 W (e.g., 5, 10, 15...). 4-8 Meter The meter displays the measured reading of the S meter during reception and that of the selected meter during transmission. Changing the Meter Type A digital meter and two types of analog meters are available for selection. Changing the Meter Type from the Menu Configure in Menu [0-09] Meter Display Pattern Setting Value Digital/ Analog (White) (default)/ Analog (Black) Changing the Meter Type via Touchscreen Operation Touch the meter display area while an analog or digital meter is displayed Touching the screen each time switches the meter in the following sequence: Digital Analog (White) Analog
(Black). When in the compressed mode, touching the meter will not change the display. Switching between TX Meters Press F [METER]. Press F [METER] each time switches the display as follows according to the meter type. Analog meter display when the TX meter (digital) is OFF:
Po SWR Id COMP* ALC Vd Display at the bottom of the TX meter (digital) when the TX meter (digital) is ON:
SWR Id COMP* Vd TEMP The last line of the display in the digital meter display mode:
SWR Id COMP* Vd TEMP When a mini digital meter is displayed:
Po SWR Id COMP* ALC Vd TEMP Po SWR COMP ALC ld Vd TEMP Indicates the TX output power. (Output power at the peak) Indicates the standing wave ratio which reflects the matching status of the antenna. Indicates the amount of TX audio amplitude that is compressed by the speech processor. Indicates the ALC level. Indicates the drain current of the final FET. Indicates the voltage of the final FET. Indicates the temperature of the internal circuit. An external meter can also be used to display the signal level by connecting an analog meter to the METER terminal on the rear panel. processor is ON.
*: COMP meter can only be selected when the speech BASIC OPERATIONS 4 FM Mode S-meter Sensitivity The default deflection type in the FM mode is the same as that in the other modes. Selecting High switches the transceiver to the same deflection type (high sensitivity) as our conventional models. Configure in Menu [0-07] FM Mode S-Meter Sensitivity Setting Value Normal (default)/ High This function is available when Menu [0-11] S-Meter Scale is configured to Type 1. Analog Meter Response Configure the response speed of the analog meter indicator. Configure in Menu [0-08] Meter Response Speed
(Analog) Setting Value 1 to 3 (default) to 4 (1 step) Meter with Peak Hold Display the peak hold of the digital meter. Configure in Menu [0-10] Meter Display Peak Hold Setting Value Off/ On (default) S Meter Scale Switch the type of deflection for the S meter. Configure in Menu [0-11] S-Meter Scale Setting Value Type 1 (default)/ Type 2 Type 1: Same scale as our HF products. Type 2: Initial deflection is more sensitive compared to Type 1. Additional notes for Type 2 The S meter indicator will appear deflected at all times The movement may not be smooth as it is a pseudo Narrowing the RF gain may disrupt the continuity from when there is external noise. representation of the S meter deflection. S0 to S4. 4-9 Analog MeterDigital Meter 4 BASIC OPERATIONS TX Meter (Digital) In addition to the analog meter display, a two-tiered digital meter can also be displayed at the same time. Drive Output (DRV) The allowable output frequency ranges from the drive output
(DRV) are the 135 kHz band (135.700 kHz to 137.799 kHz), 475 kHz band (472.000 kHz to 478.999 kHz) and the amateur bands between 1.9 and 50/70 MHz. The output impedance is 50 and output level is approximately 1 mW (0 dBm). Turning ON/OFF Drive Output Press [DRV]. Pressing [DRV] each time toggles drive output between ON and OFF. When drive output is ON, the [DRV] LED lights up in green. During output from the DRV terminal, TX signals will not be output from the ANT 1 and ANT 2 connectors. Transmission from the DRV terminal will not be displayed on the PWR meter. ALC (automatic level control) can be operated by inputting ALC voltage from an external device to the ALC terminal of the REMOTE connector. The operating status will be displayed on the meter in this case. The DRV output level is not controlled when there is no ALC voltage input. As such, the output level is determined according to the MIC input or [CAR] control settings. Pay careful attention to the connection when making use of drive output as described above. Adjusting the Drive Output Level Turn the [POWER] control. nnn% is displayed according to the selected drive output level. [nnn: 5 to 100]
A different drive output level can be configured for the AM and modes other than the AM mode. The resolution [1% / 5%] for changing the drive output level can be switched using the Menu 6-04 Transmit Power Step Size setting. Band/Mode CW/FSK/PSK/SSB/FM/
SSB-DATA/FM-DATA AM/AM-DATA CW/FSK/PSK/SSB/FM/
SSB-DATA/FM-DATA AM/AM-DATA CW/FSK/PSK/SSB/FM/
SSB-DATA/FM-DATA AM/AM-DATA HF 50M 70M
(E Type) Setting Value 5 to 100 [%] (1 step or multiples of 5) 5 to 25 [%] (1 step or multiples of 5) 5 to 100 [%] (1 step or multiples of 5) 5 to 25 [%] (1 step or multiples of 5) 5 to 100 [%] (1 step or multiples of 5) 5 to 25 [%] (1 step or multiples of 5) Default 100 25 100 25 100 25
. Configure in Menu [0-12] TX Digital Meter Setting Value Off (default)/ On
. The TX meter (digital) only appears in the analog meter display mode. The TX meter (digital) is displayed in a two-tiered bar format. ALC is shown at the upper level, while the display at the lower level varies according to the setting of the F [METER] digital meter. During transmission, the analog meter always displays the TX output power. Switching the Antenna Switch the antenna that is connected to the antenna connector. The ANT 1/2, RX ANT and DRV settings are automatically stored in the antenna band memory. When the same band is selected subsequently, the same antenna will be selected automatically. Press and hold F [ANT/PRE]. Pressing and holding F [ANT/PRE] switches the option between ANT 1 and ANT 2. When ANT 1 is selected, <<
>> is displayed. When ANT 2 is selected, <<
>> is displayed. Selectable Antenna Frequency Range (MHz) 10.5 to 14.5 0.03 to 0.522 14.5 to 18.5 0.522 to 2.5 2.5 to 4.1 18.5 to 21.5 21.5 to 25.5 4.1 to 6.9 25.5 to 30.0 6.9 to 7.5 7.5 to 10.5 30.0 to 60.0 60.0 to 74.8 (E type) RX Antenna Select an RX antenna. To use an RX antenna such as an HF low-band Beverage antenna or a directional loop antenna, connect it to the RX IN terminal on the rear panel. The input impedance is 50 . A self-made or commercially available BPF or trap filter can also be inserted between the RX IN and RX OUT terminals. Press [RX ANT]. Pressing [RX ANT] each time enables or disables the RX antenna of the selected band. When the RX antenna is enabled, <<
the screen.
>> is displayed on 4-10 2416735ALC Voltage+12VControl VoltageTX(Transmission)Detection CircuitAMPLinear Amplifier (Typical Input at 1 mW)Output Power at Approx. 1 mw (0 dBm)Connect Using a Coaxial CableGNDALCLKYDRV ConnectorREMOTE Connector(View from Rear Panel) Built-in Antenna Tuner It is important to ensure that the impedance of the coaxial cable and that of the antenna coincide with each other. An external antenna tuner or the built-in antenna tuner is used to adjust the impedance between the antenna and this transceiver. Impedance Matching with the Antenna 1 Select a TX frequency. 2 Press F [ANT] to select an antenna. When an external antenna tuner is connected to the ANT 1 connector, select ANT 2 if the built-in antenna tuner is to be used. The built-in antenna tuner cannot be used with ANT 1 when it is connected to an external antenna tuner. 3 Press and hold [AT] to perform tuning.
>> and [AT] LED will start to blink. R< blinks
<<
To undo the tuning, press [AT] again. The transceiver switches to the CW mode and starts tuning. TX output power is automatically configured to 10 W and the SWR meter will be selected as the TX meter. when the antenna tuner is ON during reception. If the SWR (standing wave ratio) of the antenna is extremely high (10:1 and above), an alarm tone (SWR in the Morse code) will be output, and the built-in antenna tuner will be disabled. Adjust the antenna to lower the SWR before restarting the tuning operation. 4 Check to ensure that tuning is complete.
>> and When tuning is completed successfully, a Morse code tone When tuning is complete, the blinking <<
T is output.
[AT] LED become lit in solid light. R< blinks when the antenna tuner is ON during reception. If matching is not achieved for a duration of 20 seconds, an alarm tone will be output (continuous output of 5 in the Morse code). When this occurs, check the SWR meter and press [AT] to stop tuning when the SWR value is low. Tuning of the built-in antenna tuner will not be performed During transmission, pressing and holding [AT] starts If matching is not achieved for a duration of 60 seconds, outside the permitted TX frequency range. the tuning. tuning will end automatically. When this occurs, the
>> will antenna tuner circuit turns OFF, <<
disappear, and the [AT] LED will go off. If tuning does not end automatically even though the SWR of the antenna 3:1 or lower, adjust the antenna system to lower the SWR and try to perform tuning again. The SWR may not reach 1:1 even though tuning has ended. BASIC OPERATIONS 4 Preset The tuning results can be stored as preset information in the built-
in antenna tuner according to the preset frequency categories. When the built-in antenna tuner is ON, the preset information that corresponds to the current TX frequency is automatically configured for the built-in antenna tuner. Press [AT].
<<
When the TX frequency is altered, the preset information that
>> appears on the screen. When the antenna
>> is displayed. The tuner is ON while receiving, <<
preset information that corresponds to the current TX frequency is configured for the built-in antenna tuner. corresponds to the preset frequency category is automatically configured for the built-in antenna tuner. To turn off the built-in antenna tuner, press [AT] again. Preset Frequency Categories for Built-in Antenna Tuner (MHz) 0.030 f < 1.850 1.850 f < 2.500 2.500 f < 3.525 3.525 f < 3.575 3.575 f < 3.725 3.725 f < 4.100 4.100 f < 6.900 6.900 f < 7.050 7.050 f < 7.100 7.100 f < 7.500 7.500 f < 10.500 10.500 f < 14.100 14.100 f < 14.500 14.500 f < 18.500 18.500 f < 21.150 21.150 f < 21.500 21.500 f < 25.500 25.500 f < 28.300 28.300 f < 29.000 29.000 f < 30.000 30.000 f < 51.000 51.000 f < 52.000 52.000 f < 53.000 53.000 f < 60.000 60.000 f < 74.800 (E type) Holding Transmission at the End of Antenna Tuning Transmission can be held after antenna tuning has ended. Configure in Advanced Menu [7] TX Hold After AntennaTuning Setting Value Off (default)/ On Off: Returns to receiving state after antenna tuning has ended. On: Continues 10 [W] transmission in the CW mode after antenna tuning has ended. When transmission is held after antenna tuning has ended, the held status will be canceled when transmission operations such as [SEND] or PF [DATA SEND] is performed or when [AT] is pressed. 4-11 4 BASIC OPERATIONS Switching Antenna Tuner Behavior during Reception Signals received may be made to pass through the built-in antenna tuner. Turning ON this function may help to reduce reception interference from other distant frequencies. Configure in Advanced Menu [8] Antenna Tuner during RX Setting Value Off (default)/ On Off: Signals received do not pass through the built-in antenna tuner. On: Signals received pass through the built-in antenna tuner. When full break-in is ON in the CW mode, the antenna tuner will function during reception regardless of the above setting. If the TX and RX frequencies are different during split operation, the antenna tuner will not function during reception regardless of the above setting. Configuring the Built-in Antenna Tuner Behavior for Each Band Two options to either store the ON/OFF status of the built-in antenna tuner separately for each band category or to store the same status for all bands are available. Configure in Advanced Menu [9] Antenna Tuner Operation per Band Setting Value Off (default)/ On Off: Stores the same ON/OFF status of the built-in antenna tuner for all bands. On: Stores the ON/OFF status of the built-in antenna tuner for each band category. Connecting the External Antenna Tuner AT-300 To use the external antenna tuner AT-300, connect it to the ANT 1 connector and AT connector. AT-300 will not function if it is connected to the ANT 2 connector. AT connector is a control terminal that is used exclusively for AT-300. It cannot be used to control other external antenna tuners. When an external antenna tuner other than AT-300 is connected, make use of TX tuning. AT-300 cannot be used with the 50/70 MHz band. When using a 50/70 MHz band antenna, connect it to the ANT 2 connector. When AT-300 is connected to the AT connector and ANT 1 is used, the signal bypasses the built-in antenna tuner circuit. Production of the AT-300 has been discontinued. 4-12 AT-300ANT 1 ConnectorTS-890 5 COMMUNICATING AIDS Split Operation The same frequency is used for both reception and transmission during normal communication. Select either VFO A or VFO B in this case. However, depending on the circumstances, a different frequency may be chosen for reception and transmission. In this case, it is necessary to use two VFOs. This is known as split operation. Split operation is used in cases such as when using an FM repeater or when calling a DX station. 1 Press [SPLIT].
>> lights up when the transceiver enters the split
<<
mode. 2 Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B. The value on the left is the RX frequency. (Indicated by in the example) The value on the right is the TX frequency. (Indicated by in the example) To copy a selected VFO frequency to the other VFO, press 3 Select a frequency. and hold [A/B]. 4 Press [A/B] to select the other VFO. 5 Select a frequency. 6 Press [SPLIT]. Exiting Split Operation The transceiver switches to the simplex mode and the light for
<<
>> goes off. Direct Input of Frequency Difference Specified by DX Station To directly configure the frequency difference between the frequency specified by the DX station and the RX frequency, perform the steps below while receiving signals from the DX station. 1 Press and hold [SPLIT].
>> starts to blink. 2 Enter the frequency specified by the DX station in
<<
units of kHz. To exit the configuration process, press [CLR]. If the frequency specified by the DX station is a positive value, enter the specified frequency in units of kHz using the numeric keypad. If the frequency specified by the DX station is a negative value, enter a 0 at the beginning of the frequency value. For example, if +5 kHz is specified, enter 5. If -5 kHz is specified, enter 0 followed by 5. After input is complete, the TX frequency is configured and split operation is now enabled.
<<
>> changes from a blinking to a solid display. Turning the Tuning Control to Search for a TX Frequency To search for a TX frequency, perform the steps below while receiving signals from the DX station. 1 Press and hold [SPLIT].
>> starts to blink. 2 Turn the Tuning control to search for a TX frequency. 3 Press [SPLIT].
<<
To exit the configuration process, press [CLR]. The frequency that is found in step 2 is configured as the TX frequency and split operation is now enabled.
<<
>> changes from a blinking to a solid display. COMMUNICATING AIDS 5 F Display This item displays the difference between the RX frequency and TX frequency during split operation. Configure in Menu [6-15] Delta Frequency Display Setting Value Off/ On (default)
>> is displayed below
>> is displayed below the TX frequency, the When the F display is ON, <<
the TX frequency display during split operation. When <<
band memory number on the right will not be displayed. When RIT or XIT is ON, the F value is the difference between the TX frequency and the RX frequency with the RIT or XIT frequency added. Changing the split frequency using the [RIT/XIT]
control While in the split mode with the RIT/XIT function set to OFF, the split frequency can be adjusted by turning the [RIT/XIT] control. Configure in Menu [3-12] Split Frequency Offset by RIT/XIT Control Setting Value Off (default)/ TX Frequency Offset while RX/ RX Frequency Offset while TX/ Both TX Frequency Offset while RX: Split transmission frequency can be adjusted while receiving. While receiving signals from a DX-pedition station, turning the [RIT/XIT] control changes the TX frequency in advance to the frequency specified by the target station. RX Frequency Offset while TX: Split reception frequency can be adjusted while transmitting. While ones own station is transmitting as a DX-pedition station, turning the [RIT/XIT]
control changes the RX frequency in advance to the frequency specified for the target station. Both: Enables both the above. Adjustment of the split frequency using this function is disabled during TF-SET. Configuring the Band Direct Key during Split Operation Three options are available for selection with regard to the behavior when the band direct key is pressed during split operation. Configure in Menu [3-13] Band Direct Keys in Split Mode Setting Value RX Band (default)/ RX Band and Cancel Split Mode/
RX/ TX Band RX Band: Changes the receiving band. RX Band and Cancel Split Mode: Changes the receiving band and cancels the split mode. RX/TX Band:
Changes both the receiving and transmitting bands at the same time. The transmitting band and receiving band is assigned with the same memory number. Each band can be adjusted while maintaining the split status. 5-1 5 COMMUNICATING AIDS TF-SET (Setting the TX Frequency) TF-SET is a function for temporarily switching the TX frequency and RX frequency. Signals can be received at ones own frequency while the TF-SET switch is pressed and held down, and the TX frequency can also be changed in this state. Doing so allows checking of whether there is interference in the newly-
selected TX frequency. A call is made to the target station when there is no interference and at the right timing to ensure smooth communication with DX stations that are receiving calls from a large number of stations. In other words, the communication status of the DX station in the presence of interfering signals are taken into consideration and transmission is carried out using the TF-SET function at the instant when the DX station is in the receiving state and there is no transmission from other stations. Putting this function to good use enables communication with a larger number of DX stations. 1 Configure the split operation frequency. 2 Press and hold [TF-SET]. The TX frequency and RX frequency are switched. 3 Turn the Tuning control while pressing and holding
[TF-SET], or press [UP]/[DWN] on the microphone. Signals are received at the new TX frequency. Reception starts at the original RX frequency. 4 Release [TF-SET]. Adjustment of the split frequency using the [RIT/XIT]
Turning on the frequency lock before using the TF-SET control is disabled during TF-SET. function helps to prevent the transceiver from losing communication with the DX station due to erroneous operation. The digital AGC circuit of this transceiver divides the time AGC AGC (Automatic Gain Control) is a function for controlling the IF gain automatically so as to minimize fluctuations in the strength of the signal that is being received. The AGC time constant is configured to FAST, MID or SLOW according to the receiving status and operation mode (other than FM mode). constant into 20 levels from SLOW to FAST, with 1 being the fastest and 20 the slowest. Generally, the time constant is configured to a fast time constant in the CW and FSK modes where fluctuations in the signal strength are well defined, and a slow time constant is used in the SSB and AM modes where changes are gradual. However, a fast time constant is also useful in the SSB and AM modes to perform tuning quickly or when receiving weak signals. AGC can also be turned off. A different default time constant for AGC is configured for each mode as shown below. Mode SSB SSB-DATA Display AGC-S CW FSK PSK AM Default AGC Time Constant Setting Setting SLOW SLOW FAST FAST FAST SLOW SLOW Switching the AGC Time Constant 1 Select a mode other than FM. 2 Press [AGC] to select an AGC time constant. Pressing [AGC] each time switches the selection in the following sequence: AGC-F AGC-M AGC-S. AM-DATA AGC-S AGC-F
. Adjusting the AGC Time Constant Preset Value 1 Press and hold [AGC] to display the AGC configuration screen. 2 Press F3 [AGC] or [AGC] to select FAST, MID or 3 Press F4 []/ F5 [+] or turn the [MULTI/CH] control SLOW. to change the AGC time constant. Setting Value 1 to 20 5-2 The AGC time constant is fastest when it is configured to 1, and slowest when configured to 20. The default AGC time constant values in the respective operation modes are as follows. COMMUNICATING AIDS 5 Mode SSB SSB-DATA CW FSK PSK AM AM-DATA FAST 9 9 9 7 7 9 9 MID 12 12 12 11 11 13 13 SLOW 14 14 14 14 14 16 16 AGC OFF Turns off AGC according to the status of the signals received. RF gain is fixed when AGC is set to OFF, which makes it easier to hear weak signals in some cases. If AGC is turned OFF while the S meter is deflecting due to the signal, sound may be output to the speaker or headphones at an unexpectedly loud volume. Turn the [RF] control to turn down the RF gain level in advance. After turning off AGC, adjust RF gain by turning the [RF] control until the signal can be heard clearly. To turn off AGC, perform the steps below. 1 Press and hold [AGC] to display the AGC configuration screen. 2 Press and hold F6 [(OFF)] to configure AGC to OFF.
<<AGC OFF>> lights up and the preset value display area is grayed out. AGC Quick Recovery This function performs recovery from the suppression that occurs when the RX signal contains pulse noise. The strength of pulse noise at which this function is activated is determined by adjusting the threshold level. 1 Press and hold [AGC] to display the AGC 2 Press F2 [PULSE] to display the AGC Quick configuration screen. Recovery configuration screen. 3 Press F3 [ON/OFF] to set the function to On. 4 Press F4 []/ F5 [+] or turn the [MULTI/CH] control to change the threshold level. Setting Value 1 to 5 (default) to 10 This function may not be effective for pulse noise occurring in short time interval. 5-3 5 COMMUNICATING AIDS RX Equalizer This function allows the sound quality to be altered by adjusting the characteristics of the RX frequency. 6 types of RX equalizer are available, which can be configured separately for each mode. A set of equalizer characteristics can be configured freely for each of the options between User 1 and User 3. Turning ON/OFF RX Equalizer Press F [RX EQ]. Pressing F [RX EQ] each time toggles the RX equalizer between ON and OFF. Selecting an RX Equalizer Characteristic 1 Press and hold F [RX EQ] to display the RX Equalizer configuration screen. When the RX DSP equalizer is set to ON, the effect
(HB1/ HB2/ FP/ BB1/ BB2/ FLAT/ U1/ U2/
U3) is displayed at the lower end of the key guide. When the RX DSP equalizer is OFF, OFF is displayed at the lower end of the key guide. Adjusting the Equalizer Characteristics The equalizer characteristics can be customized according to the users preferences. Also, the customized characteristics can be stored as user-defined settings. 1 Select a equalizer characteristic. 2 Press F4 [ADJ] to display the RX Equalizer Adjustment screen. 2 Press F2[
] / F3[
] or turn the [MULTI/CH]
control to select an equalizer characteristic. The selected equalizer characteristic turns on. Characteristic Purpose Boosts the high frequency component. This is effective for audio sound that contains a low frequency component. Boosts the high frequency component. The low frequency attenuation level for this option is half of that of the High Boost 1 option. This option attenuates frequency components that is outside the audio bandwidth so that the audio can be heard more clearly. Boosts the low frequency component. This is effective for audio sound that contains a high frequency component. Boosts the low frequency component. The low frequency is further boosted compared to Bus Boost 1. This option has a flat frequency response. Frequency characteristics can be adjusted according to the users preferences and stored in the options between User 1 and User 3. The flat frequency characteristic is selected in the default setting. High Boost 1 (HB1) High Boost 2 (HB2) Formant Pass (FP) Bass Boost 1 (BB1) Bass Boost 2 (BB2) Flat (FLAT) User 1 (U1) User 2 (U2) User 3 (U3) 5-4
] / F4[
] to select the frequency to
.3 Press F3[
adjust. 4 Press F5 []/ F6 [+] or turn the [MULTI/CH] control to adjust the frequency level. Touching a point on the RX Equalizer Adjustment screen selects the corresponding band and changes the frequency to the selected level. An alternative way is to touch a rough point followed by fine-
tuning in steps 3 and 4. Pressing and holding F2 [(RESET)] resets all the frequency levels to the default setting. Besides the User 1 to User 3 options, the equalizer characteristics of the other options can also be altered on the RX Equalizer Adjustment screen. If the configured level of the RX DSP equalizer deviates from the configured level of the adjacent frequency, the desired amount of attenuation may not be obtained. Copying Equalizer Data The customized equalizer characteristics can be copied to one of the options from User 1 to User 3. 1 Press and hold F [RX EQ] to display the RX 2 Press F2[
Equalizer configuration screen.
] to select the equalizer to save. Pressing F4 [ADJ] on the RX Equalizer screen displays the RX Equalizer Adjustment screen. Equalizer data can be copied from either the RX Equalizer screen or RX Equalizer Adjustment screen.
] / F3[
RX Characteristic CurveFrequency (Hz)-30-2510010310210105-5-10-20-1510OFFHB1HB2FPBB1BB2FLAT 3 Press F5 [COPY]. A message appears prompting you to confirm the destination to copy the equalizer characteristics. Pressing F7 [CANCEL] ends the equalizer data copy operation without copying and restores the display to the RX Equalizer screen or RX Equalizer Adjustment screen. 4 Press F2 [USER 1], F3 [USER 2] or F4 [USER 3] to specify the destination to copy the data to. The equalizer selected in step 2 is copied to USER 1, USER 2 or USER 3. After copy is complete, the message to confirm the destination for copying the equalizer characteristics disappears and the display is restored to the RX equalizer screen or RX equalizer adjustment screen. Saving Equalizer Data Multiple sets of customized DSP equalizer settings data can be created and saved. Before doing so, configure the destination for saving the data in File Storage Location of the USB/File Management Menu to Internal Memory or USB Flash Drive. (See 11-2) To save the data to a USB flash drive, insert a USB flash drive formatted using this transceiver into
(USB-A). 1 Press and hold F [RX EQ] to display the RX 2 Press F2[
3 Press F7 [SAVE]. Equalizer configuration screen. save. A message indicating that saving is complete is displayed.
] to select the equalizer to
] / F3[
.4 Press F4 [OK]. The saved file is named in the yyyymmdd_hhmmss format. The extension of the saved file is .equ.
(Example) If the date is 10:20:30 a.m., February 15, 2018:
20180215_102030.equ The name of the destination folder is as follows. (The name varies depending on the destination for saving files.) USB flash drive: KENWOOD\TS-890\SETTINGS Built-in memory: SETTINGS\RX_EQ When removing the USB flash drive, make sure to execute Safe Removal of USB Flash Drive. (See 11-6)
\RX_EQ COMMUNICATING AIDS 5 drive containing the RX equalizer data into Reading Equalizer Data RX DSP equalizer data that is saved in the internal memory or USB flash drive can be read. To read the data from a USB flash drive, insert the USB flash 1 Press and hold F [RX EQ] to display the RX 2 Press F2[
] to select the equalizer to 3 Press F6 [READ] to display the screen for selecting Equalizer configuration screen. read. the file to read.
(USB-A).
]/ F3[
.4 Select the file to read. To read data from the internal memory, press F7 [INT.MEM]. To read data from the USB flash drive, press F7
[USB.MEM]. (If a USB flash drive is not connected, a message screen will appear prompting you to get ready the USB flash drive.) Pressing F5 [NAME] allows the file name to be changed. Pressing F6 [DELETE] displays a message to confirm deletion of the file. Pressing F4 [OK] deletes the file.
] to select the RX equalizer data file to read. Alternatively, the RX equalizer data file can also be selected by turning the [MULTI/CH] control.
]/ F3[
5 Press F2[
6 Press F4 [OK]. After the RX equalizer data has been read successfully, a message indicating that reading is complete is displayed. 7 Press F4 [OK] to end the process. 5-5 Restrictions are applied to the following functions in the SWL mode. Function Status Transmission Disabled Sending of voice message Disabled Disabled Decoding/Encoding Sending of CW message Disabled Disabled TX output power limiter Disabled Meter switching Disabled TX filter switching Turning ON transverter Disabled Disabled FM tone Disabled Antenna tuning Configuration of the TX equalizer and related Disabled settings Band Switching in the SWL Mode (VFO Mode) Press F [BAND The broadcast/meter band is displayed when the
]/ F [BAND frequency falls within the band range. The preset broadcast bands are shown in the table below.
]. Broadcast/
Meter Band LW MW 120 m 90 m 60 m 49 m 41 m 31 m 25 m 21 m 19 m 16 m 15 m 13 m 11 m Lower Limit
[kHz]
145 525 2300 3200 4750 5900 7200 9400 11600 13570 15100 17480 18900 21450 25670 Upper Limit
[kHz]
285 1705 2495 3400 5060 6200 7450 9900 12100 13870 15800 17900 19020 21850 26100 Default [kHz]/ Mode 145 525 2300 3200 4750 5900 7200 9400 11600 13570 15100 17480 18900 21450 25670 AM The band segments of the SWL mode that is preconfigured on this transceiver are represented in a slightly different way compared to conventional meter bands. Different band segments are used so as to achieve wider coverage to include the broadcast bands of the different regions and other bands. 5 COMMUNICATING AIDS Preamplifier The preamplifier can be configured to one of the two options: low gain type that places priority on IMD (PRE 1) and high gain type that places priority on sensitivity (PRE 2). Press F [ANT/PRE]. Pressing F [ANT/PRE] each time switches the selection in the following sequence: PRE 1 PRE 2 OFF. The preamplifier selection is stored for each antenna The default values are as follows. selection band. Less than 7.5 MHz: OFF 7.5 MHz to less than 21.5 MHz: PRE 1 More than 21.5 MHz: PRE 2 RX Monitor If weak signals are received while the squelch is closed, the signals tend to be interrupted. Also, you may sometimes want to monitor the condition of the RX frequency while in the CTCSS standby state. In this case, the RX monitor is used to open the squelch temporarily. RX Monitor (Menu [0-15] to [0-31]) can be assigned to a PF key. While the PF key that is assigned with RX Monitor is pressed and held down, the squelch opens and the RX frequency can be monitored. The RX monitor turns OFF once the key is released. Scanning is paused while PF [RX Monitor] is pressed. SWL (BCL) Mode The SWL (BCL) mode is intended for SWL (Short Wave Listening) and BCL (Broadcast Listening) by displaying the horizontal dial of the 9R-59 communications receiver on the screen. 1 Press F [SWL] on the menu screen to display the SWL screen. 2 Press [MENU] followed by F [SWL]. Returns to the normal screen. Switching to the SWL mode is not possible while the An indicator is not displayed if a memory channel that is transverter is ON. not registered is being called up. 5-6 Transmission in Data Mode Transmission via PTT Switch, SS Terminal and SEND Switch transmission by making use of the [PTT] switch on the microphone, SS terminal of the REMOTE connector and [SEND]
on the front panel. Under normal circumstances, the microphone audio is transmitted via this operation. This transceiver continues to transmit signals while the [PTT]
switch is pressed and held down. This transceiver transmits signals when the SS terminal of the REMOTE connector is short-circuited to GND. Pressing [SEND] each time toggles between transmission and reception. Transmission via DATA PTT or DATA SEND DATA PTT (PKS terminal of ACC 2 connector) or the PF key that is assigned with DATA SEND is used to switch between transmission and reception. For more details, please refer to PF Keys (Programmable Function Keys). This function comes in handy when transmitting audio or data from an external device. This operation transmits normal audio signals or audio signals that are input to the ANI terminal of the ACC 2 connector. A different audio path can be specified. For more details, please refer to Configuration of the Input Path of TX Audio (8-1). This transceiver continues to transmit signals while DATA PTT
(PKS terminal of the ACC 2 connector) is short-circuited to GND. between transmission and reception. Pressing the PF key that is assigned with DATA SEND toggles COMMUNICATING AIDS 5 RIT/XIT RIT (Receiver Incremental Tuning) RIT is a function for fine-tuning only the RX frequency in 10 Hz steps within the 9.99 kHz range without altering the TX frequency. This is used when the TX frequency of the station that this transceiver is communicating with has become slightly deviated. When the FINE mode is ON, the offset frequency of RIT switches to a step size of 1 Hz. RIT functions in the same way in all modes as well as when VFO or the memory channel mode is in use. 1 Press [RIT]. 2 Turn the [RIT/XIT] control. The [RIT] LED lights up and the RIT offset frequency is displayed. Fine-tune the RX frequency for RIT. To clear the offset frequency for RIT, press [CL]. The RIT offset frequency value is reset to 0. 3 Press [RIT] to end the process. RIT is turned off. The RX frequency is restored to the value prior to performing step 1. RIT Shift This is a function for setting the frequency adjusted with RIT to a RX band. Press and hold [RIT]. The RX frequency that is adjusted using RIT is set to a RX band and the RIT function is turned off. XIT (Transmitter Incremental Tuning) XIT is a function that can be used to fine-tune the TX frequency in 10 Hz steps within the 9.99 kHz range without altering the RX frequency. When the FINE mode is ON, the offset frequency of XIT 1 Press [XIT]. switches to a step size of 1 Hz. 2 Turn the [RIT/XIT] control. The [XIT] LED lights up and the XIT offset frequency is displayed. Fine-tune the TX frequency for XIT. To clear the offset frequency for XIT, press [CL]. The XIT offset frequency value is reset to 0. 3 Press [XIT] to end the process. XIT is turned off. The TX frequency is restored to the value prior to performing step 1. XIT Shift This is a function for shifting from operation using XIT to the split mode at one touch. Press and hold [XIT]. When the TX frequency that is adjusted using XIT is set to a TX band, operation switches to the split mode at the same time and the XIT function is turned off. If the frequency is changed in the entry mode, the RIT/XIT function is automatically turned off. 5-7 5 COMMUNICATING AIDS Adjusting the Carrier Level The steps to adjust the carrier level in the CW, FSK, PSK and AM modes are as follows. 1 Press [CAR] to display the Carrier Level configuration screen. 2 Transmit in the CW, FSK, PSK or AM mode. 3 Press F4 []/ F5 [+] or turn the [MULTI/CH] control to adjust the carrier level while referring to the ALC meter. Setting Value 0 to 50 (default) to 100 (1 step) CW/ FSK mode: Adjust the carrier level while ensuring that the AM/ PSK mode: Adjust the carrier level until the ALC meter SSB/ FM mode: The carrier level value is fixed. (Cannot be ALC meter reading does not exceed the ALC zone. needle starts to deflect. adjusted) Note that the TX output will be disabled if the setting value of carrier level is 0. Operation in CW Mode In the world of amateur radio, there is active communication in the CW mode. This is because this mode of communication consumes less power than SSB, and can be regarded as the simplest type of digital communication that combines the use of dots and dashes. The built-in electronic keyer of this transceiver offers a wide variety of functions to support the operation of the users. For more details, please refer to Electronic Keyer. Select a frequency band and configure the frequency. 1 Select band and frequency. 2 Press [CW/ CW-R] to select CW mode. 3 Press [SEND] to transmit. 4 Operate the electronic keyer or paddle to transmit a Morse code signal. While transmission is in progress, a sidetone for monitoring the Morse code of ones own station can be heard. The frequency of the sidetone changes in tandem with the pitch frequency. 5 After the Morse code is transmitted, press [SEND]
to end the transmission. This transceiver is restored to the receiving state. The sidetone volume can be adjusted in Menu [1-02]
Sidetone Volume. CW Break-in Break-in is a convenient function that places this transceiver in the TX mode simply by switching to the key-down state when in the CW mode, and restores this transceiver to the RX mode upon switching to the key-up state. Break-in is divided into 2 types, full break-in and semi break-in. Full Break-in Switches this transceiver from the TX mode to the RX mode at almost the same time as the key-up operation. Semi Break-in This transceiver does not return to the RX mode immediately after the key-up operation, but remains in the TX mode and switches to the RX mode only after the preconfigured delay time has elapsed. Turning ON/OFF Break-in Press [VOX]. Pressing [VOX] each time toggles break-in between the ON and OFF states. When break-in is ON, the [VOX] LED lights up. 5-8 Adjusting the Break-in Mode and Break-in Delay Time 1 Press [VOX] to set break-in to ON. 2 Turn the [DELAY] control to adjust the delay time after key-up. Setting Value FULL-BK/ 50 to 500 (default) to 1000 [ms] (50 step) Turn the [DELAY] control all the way to the left, and the full break-in mode is activated when FULL-BK is displayed. Turning the control to the right lengthens the delay time while turning the control to the left shortens it. FULL-BK or DELAY:nn ([nn: 1 to 20 (equivalent to 50ms to 1000ms)]) is displayed at the top right corner of the filter information area. 3 Operate the electronic keyer or paddle. Transmission/reception is repeated automatically according to the dot and dash Morse code. Before using this transceiver in combination with a linear amplifier, check whether the linear amplifier supports full break-in. If its compatibility with full break-in is unknown or if it is not compatible, operate using the semi break-in mode. same time. Full break-in and semi break-in cannot be used at the Adjusting the Sidetone and Pitch Frequency During key-down in the CW mode, a tone can be heard from the speaker of this transceiver. This tone is known as a sidetone. When this tone is heard, it means it is possible to monitor the Morse code transmitted by ones own station. In the CW mode for direct keying of the carrier, a BFO (beat frequency oscillator) is needed to convert the carrier wave into audible sound. The difference in frequency between the BFO and carrier wave can be heard in the form of a beat. This difference in frequency is called RX pitch. Turn the [MIC/PITCH] control. Configure to a sidetone frequency that can be heard most clearly. Turning the [MIC/PITCH] control to the right increases the frequency, while turning the control to the left decreases it. Both the sidetone and the RX pitch have the same frequency. COMMUNICATING AIDS 5 Auto Zero-in (CW Auto Tune) This function automatically tunes the TX frequency to coincide with the RX frequency of the target station in order to communicate with a station receiving in the CW mode. 1 Turn the Tuning control and adjust roughly until the 2 Press [CW T.] to set auto zero-in (CW auto tune) to RX audio of CW can be heard. ON.
>> starts to blink.
<<
The TX frequency is automatically adjusted to match the RX frequency of the target station, and the pitch of the RX signal coincides with the sidetone and RX pitch frequency.
>>
disappears. If auto zero-in (CW auto tune) cannot be started up, the frequency is restored to the original value. After auto zero-in (CW auto tune) has ended, <<
Using auto zero-in (CW auto tune) allows tuning up to 50 Hz from the RX frequency of the target station. Auto zero-in (CW auto tune) may not be successful when the keying speed at the receiving station is slow, when there is interference or when the signals are weak. When RIT is ON, auto zero-in (CW auto tune) functions with respect to the frequency shifted using RIT. The operable range of auto zero-in (CW auto tune) varies depending on the status of reception. For example, if the DSP filter width is 500 Hz, auto zero-in (CW auto tune) will function with respect to RX signals within an approximate RX pitch frequency range of 300 Hz. CW BFO Sideband This is a function for switching CW (USB) and CW-R (LSB) with CW (LSB) and CW-R (USB). Example: Set the CW carrier point to LSB so that the CW RX tone rises at the same time when the frequency is raised. Configure in Menu [5-05] CW BFO Side Band Setting Value 300 to 700 (default) to 1100 [Hz] (5-step) Setting Value USB (default)/ LSB Adjusting the Sidetone Volume Configure in Menu [1-02] Sidetone Volume Setting Value Off/ 1 to 10 (default) to 20 (1 step) Sidetone volume like the playback volume of the CW message cannot be altered using the [AF] control. CW Rise Time The rise time of CW refers to the time interval from key-down to the point where the output waveform reaches the highest peak. Configure in Menu [5-15] CW Rise Time Setting Value 1/ 2/ 4/ 6 (default) [ms]
The default setting (6 [ms]) is suited for low-speed to medium-speed keying. For high-speed keying, configure to 4 [ms], 2 [ms] or 1 [ms]. CW Automatic Transmission from SSB Mode When the menu below is configured to ON and paddle or key-down of the electronic keyer is performed during operation in the SSB mode, the SSB mode switches automatically to the CW mode and transmission is enabled in the CW mode. The mode switches automatically from USB to CW or LSB to CW-R. Upon shifting from the SSB mode to the CW mode, carrier frequency offset will function even when Carrier Frequency Offset (SSB Mode to CW Mode) is set to OFF. For this reason, to call a station that transmitted a CW after the CW is received during operation in the SSB mode, this can be done easily using the paddle or electronic keyer operation. Configure in Menu [5-06] Automatic CW TX with Keying in SSB Mode Off (default)/ On Setting Value Menu [5-06] Automatic CW TX with Keying in SSB Mode does not function during transmission and when in the split mode. 5-9 Operating the CW Communication Screen Key F1 [MORE]
F2 [LOG]
F2 [
]
F3 [PAUSE]
F3 [CLEAR]
F4 [START]
F4 [STOP]
F4 [QUICK]
F5 [DEC.OFF]
F5 [DEC.ON]
F5 [DEC.FIL]
F6 [CW.MSG]
F6 [CW.DEC]
F6 [THLD]
F7 [EXTEND]
Behavior Switches the key guide. Turns ON/OFF the communication log function. Pressing and holding this key displays the screen for selecting a log file that is saved. Clears the characters inside the character string buffer area one at a time. Pressing and holding down the key clears the characters continuously. Pauses update (drawing) of the TX/RX details display area. Pressing the key again resumes the update (drawing). Clears the character strings inside the character string buffer area. Pressing and holding down the key clears the information inside the TX/RX details display area all at once. Starts encoding of the character strings in the TX/RX details display area. Stops encoding and returns to the decoding state. Turns ON/OFF the quick mode. Stops decoding. Resumes the decode function. Switches the decoding filter. Switches to the CW message screen. Switches to the CW communication screen. Switches to the threshold level configuration mode. Enlarges the size of the CW communication screen. Pressing it again restores the screen to the standard size. Indicator Displays Display
. Behavior Appears when the log function is ON. Appears when the log function is ON and in the standby mode. Appears when signal decoding is in progress. Appears when encoding the character strings in the TX character string buffer. Appears when the decode function is stopped or disabled. Appears when CW message is configured to the repeat setting. Appears during the repeat interval of the CW message. Appears when the quick mode is ON. Appears when in the insert mode. Appears when it is a count-up trigger message of the contest number. 5 COMMUNICATING AIDS Frequency Offset when Shifting from SSB to CW Mode Upon switching to the CW mode to communicate with a station that transmitted a CW after the CW signal is received during operation in the SSB mode, it is usually necessary to correct the frequency by turning the Tuning control slightly. However, turning on this function enables the frequency to be corrected automatically. Configure in Menu [5-07] Carrier Frequency Offset
(SSB Mode to CW Mode) Setting Value Off (default)/ On Encoding/Decoding Morse Code Below are the steps to decode the RX signals of CW and display them as character strings on the screen. Details of the transmitted CW signals are also displayed as character strings. Displaying the CW Communication Screen 1 Set to the CW mode. 2 Press F3 [DECODE] to display the CW communication screen. Decoding in Progress (Decodes and Displays the Received Signal)
. Encoding in Progress (Analyzes and Displays the Transmission Code)
. Indicator Displays Indicates the status of the function. TX/RX Details Displays the character strings that are transmitted or received. TX Character String Buffer Character strings to be transmitted. CW Message List Displays the fixed phrases that are registered in the CW message memory. The number of channels displayed varies according to the display screen size. (Standard: 4CH; Expanded: 8CH) Threshold Level Displays the threshold value of the RX signal strength for decoding. 5-10 Threshold LevelTX DetailsCW Message ListIndicator DisplaysTX/RX Details Characters/character strings that are received or transmitted Eight code abbreviations are supported, namely BT, AR, AS, The code abbreviations are displayed in the TX/RX details are displayed in the TX/RX details display area. HH, SK, KN, BK and SN. display area in the same way as normal character strings. For example, when AR (code with no space between A and R) is received, AR is displayed. The code abbreviations KN, BT and AR have the same Morse code as the symbols (, = and + respectively. When these Morse codes are received, they will be displayed as the code abbreviations received. (Symbols are not displayed.) The * symbol has the same Morse code as the alphabet X. When this Morse code is received, it will be displayed as the alphabet X received. The codes might not be decoded correctly depending on the signal quality. If the keying speed of the target signal changes halfway, the characters immediately before or after the change cannot be decoded correctly. Characters that cannot be decoded are indicated using an underscore (_). Time stamp and frequency information can be added to the TX or RX data that is displayed in the TX\RX details display area. This transceiver does not support Japanese characters. Press [Page Up] / [Page Down] on the USB keyboard to scroll through the information displayed in the TX/RX details display area. transmission or reception displayed using [Page Up] on the USB keyboard, the display moves automatically to the bottom of the screen. Noise Reduction 1, Noise Reduction 2, audio peak filter and RX DSP equalizer do not function during CW decoding. Adjusting the Decode Threshold Level The threshold value for the signal strength to activate decoding can be adjusted as follows. Raising the threshold level may reduce erroneous detection due to noise. 1 Press F6 [THLD] to switch to the threshold level When encoding is started with the details of the past configuration mode. 2 Press F4 []/ F5 [+] or turn the [MULTI/CH] control to select a threshold level. Setting Value 1 to 10 (default) to 30 (1-step) Adjust the threshold value in the ascending order according to the receiving status of noise, for example. Start from a small value between the range of 1 to 30 and configure the threshold value to a point where reception is good. level to the default setting. Pressing and holding F2 [(RESET)] resets the threshold 3 Press F1 [
] to end the process. COMMUNICATING AIDS 5 Decode Filter A decode filter (narrow-band filter used exclusively for decoding) can be used when there is significant interference or noise while decoding the Morse code. Press F5 [DEC.FIL]. Pressing F5 [DEC.FIL] each time switches the decode filter mode (Off/Normal/ Narrow). The selected mode is displayed for about 2 seconds. Transmitting Character Strings via USB Keyboard Operation Text input by the USB keyboard can be transmitted in Morse code. 1 Connect the USB keyboard (commercially 2 Press F3 [DECODE] to display the CW 3 Press F4 [QUICK]. available) to this transceiver. communication screen. Press F4 [QUICK] each time toggles the quick mode between ON and OFF.
<<
>> appears when the quick mode is ON. 4 Select a frequency for communication. 5 Enter a character string using the USB keyboard. When Quick Mode is ON:
After characters are input using the USB keyboard, a TX details display area is displayed and encoding starts immediately. When Quick Mode is OFF:
After characters are input using the USB keyboard, they are displayed in the TX details display area. To start encoding, press [Enter] on the USB keyboard or the F4 [START] key. Sending a character string using the USB keyboard while the update (drawing) of TX/RX display area is paused cancels the paused state. The maximum number of characters that can be entered in the TX details display area is 4300 characters. The consecutive code (code abbreviation) applies to the characters after inputting ~ (tilde) and continues until there is a space between the characters. For example, when ~ HH and ~ OSO are input, they denote a correction code and emergency communication respectively. To start encoding from a consecutive code while quick mode is ON, input the first character of the consecutive code within the time interval equivalent to 7 dots (space between words) after inputting ~ (tilde). 5-11 Contest Number Behavior To use a contest number, %N needs to be embedded in the The %N portion will be substituted with the current contest The contest number is counted up after all the contents in the message of the message channel. number during encoding. character string buffer area are encoded. Paddle Operation on CW Communication Screen Morse code that is input via paddle operation (straight key, bug key, etc.) can be converted into text and displayed on the screen. This function can also be used to practice the input of Morse code. Paddle Operation when the TX Details Display Area is Empty When break-in is ON, the Morse code input is transmitted and information that is keyed is displayed in the TX details display area character by character. When break-in is OFF, the Morse code input is not transmitted and information that is keyed is displayed in the character string buffer area character by character. Encoding does not start even when the quick mode is set to ON. Encoding does not start even when characters are added using the USB keyboard after the character strings that are added via paddle operation. the character string buffer area, press F4 [START] or
[Enter] on the USB keyboard. To enable encoding of the character strings displayed in Paddle Operation during Encoding of Character Strings in the TX Details Display Area When Interrupt Keying is ON, encoding of character strings is temporarily stopped and resumes only after keying is complete. When Interrupt Keying is OFF, encoding of character strings is stopped. If the signals input via paddle operation are codes that cannot be converted into text, the characters are not added to both the TX details display area and TX/RX details display area. Saving CW Communication Logs The CW, RTTY and PSK communication screens can be saved using the communication log function. Please refer to Communication Log on page 5-27. 5 COMMUNICATING AIDS Encoding Character Strings Using the CW Message Memory Fixed phrases can be registered in the CW message memory for use during transmission. Use the CW message memory when transmitting a fixed phrase. Otherwise, the USB keyboard can also be used to input the character string. Press F2 [CH 1] to F5 [CH 4]. The phrase registered in the corresponding message channel is displayed in the TX details display area and encoding starts immediately. The registration number is x. If a character string already exists in the TX details display area, encoding starts after the fixed phrase is added to the end of the character string. If encoding of a character string is already in progress, the fixed phrase is added to the end of the character string and encoding will continue. A space is inserted before the fixed phrase when it is added to the end of an existing character string. Message CH supports only messages registered via text input. (Even when Paddle is selected for registering messages in the menu, the message CH information registered via text input using the USB keyboard is displayed on the CW communication screen.) If the message displayed in the message list is too long to fit into the display range, this will be indicated by a ... display to the right of the truncated message.
>> lights up. Upon switching to the repeat wait mode, <<
Encoding Operation of Message Channel with Repeat Function Enabled Upon pressing the key that corresponds to a message channel for which the repeat function is enabled, <<
After encoding of the character strings in the TX details display area is complete, the transceiver switches to the repeat wait mode. After the specified time interval has elapsed, the same character strings of the channel for which the repeat function is enabled is encoded again, and this process goes on. After encoding of the information in the TX details display area is fully complete, all the information in the area is cleared. Only the character string of the repeat channel is displayed in white fonts, and the transceiver switches to the repeat wait mode.
>> lights up, after which <<
>> is illuminated. (These will light up in the grayed-out state when the decoding function is stopped.) state has elapsed, <<
operation resumes. encoding operation or repeat wait state and returns the transceiver to the decoding state. (The light for the <<
and <<
While <<
added using the USB keyboard or the F2 [CH 1] to F5 [CH 4]
keys.
>> is illuminated, characters cannot be deleted using the backspace key of the USB keyboard or the F2 [
Pressing F4 [STOP] or [ESC] on the USB keyboard stops the
>>
When the specified time interval after entering the repeat wait
>> is illuminated, character strings cannot be
>> disappears and encode
>> displays go off.) While <<
] key. 5-12 Electronic Keyer This transceiver comes with a built-in electronic keyer that can be used simply by connecting a paddle to the PADDLE jack on the front panel. Depending on the settings, it can also be used as a bug key (semi-auto electronic keyer). A straight key can also be connected to the PADDLE jack. Selecting the PADDLE Jack Behavior Select the device to be connected to the PADDLE jack. Configure the behavior in Menu [5-00] Paddle Jack Configuration (Front) Setting Value Straight Key/ Paddle (default)/ Paddle (Bug Key Mode) Selecting the KEY Jack Behavior For operation in the CW mode without using the built-in electronic keyer, connect the plug of a straight key, bug key, external electronic keyer or PC keyer to the KEY jack. The built-in electronic keyer can also be used by connecting a paddle to the KEY jack. Select the device to be connected to the KEY jack on the rear panel. Configure in Menu [5-01] Key Jack Configuration
(Rear) Setting Value Straight Key (default)/ Paddle/ Paddle (Bug Key Mode) Connect a PC keyer or an external electronic keyer with a positive-polarity wire using a shield wire. Behavior when Paddle (Bug Key Mode) is selected While dots are combined according to the usual The keying speed is variable, but the message keyer, dashes are keyed while the paddle is pressed. memory function does not work. same time, priority is given to dash. When both dot and dash are configured to ON at the Operation Mode of the Electronic Keyer 2 operation modes of the built-in electronic keyer are available for selection (A or B). Configure in Menu [5-02] Electronic Keyer Squeeze Mode Setting Value Mode A/ Mode B (default) Mode A: When both paddles are open, code transmission ends after the code elements (dot or dash) are transmitted. Both dot and dash memory are not active. Mode B: When both paddles are open, code transmission ends after a dash (or dot) is transmitted following the dot (or dash) that is currently being transmitted. Both dot and dash memory are active. COMMUNICATING AIDS 5 Reversing Dot and Dash It is possible to reverse dot and dash of the paddle without having to rewire the electronic keyer. Reversing the position for operating the paddle according to the operators preferences or dominant hand helps to ease keying. Configure in Menu [5-03] Dot and Dash Reversed Keying Setting Value Off (default)/ On Dot and dash is reversed when this function is set to On. This setting applies to both the mic paddle mode and paddle that is connected to the PADDLE or KEY jack. Mic Paddle Mode The [UP] and [DOWN] keys of the microphone is used in place of the paddle for keying. Configure in Menu [5-04] Paddle (Microphone Up/
Down Keys) Setting Value Off (default)/ On When this is On, keying can be performed using the [UP]
and [DOWN] keys of the microphone. Response will be slower in the mic paddle mode In the default setting, the [DOWN] key is assigned with compared to the normal paddle operation. dot and the [UP] key with dash. Adjusting the Keying Speed The keying speed of the electronic keyer can be adjusted freely. To ensure that CW is transmitted precisely, it is necessary to adjust the keying speed according to the skill level of the user. Also, it is recommended that the keying speed be as closely aligned as possible with the CW speed of the target station. Turn the [KEY] control to adjust the keying speed. The keying speed can be adjusted within the range of 4 to 60
[wpm] (20 to 300 characters/minute). Turning the [KEY] control to the right increases the keying speed, while turning the control to the left slows it down. The keying speed is displayed while the [KEY] control is being operated. After operating the [KEY] control, the TX output power display shows the keying speed for a duration of 2 seconds. Only dots are supported in the bug key mode. 5-13 5 COMMUNICATING AIDS Changing the Weighting The electronic keyer allows the dot-dash weighting to be adjusted automatically. Weighting is the ratio of the dash length to the dot length. 2 weighting modes are available for selection: the auto weighting mode changes the ratio automatically in tandem with the keying speed, while the ratio is fixed in the manual weighting mode and not affected by the keying speed. When [2.5] (1:2.5) to [4.0] (1:4) is selected, the dot-dash weight ratio is fixed regardless of the keying speed. Configure in Menu [5-08] CW Keying Weight Ratio Setting Value Automatic (default)/ 2.5 to 4.0 (0.1 step) When this is configured to Automatic, the keying speed and weight ratio settings are as follows. Adjusting the Keying Speed Weight Ratio Reverse When the weighting mode is configured to Automatic, increasing the keying speed increases the weight ratio. Configuring the menu below to ON decreases the weight ratio when the keying speed increases. Configure in Menu [5-09] CW Keying Reversed Weight Ratio Setting Value Off (default)/ On When weight reverse is enabled in the Automatic weighting mode, the keying speed and weight ratio settings are as follows. Adjusting the Keying Speed 4 to 24 25 to 44 45 to 60 4 to 24 25 to 44 45 to 60 Weight 1:2.8 1:3.0 1:3.2 Weight 1:3.2 1:3.0 1:2.8 CW Message Memory This transceiver comes with memory channels that can store up to 8 CW messages. In addition to paddle operation, a message can be registered by entering a text using the USB keyboard or via operating this transceiver. CW message memory channels come in handy for messages that are repeatedly transmitted as registering the messages in advance allows them to be used repeatedly such as during contest. Switching the Method of Registering CW Messages A method for registering messages can be selected from the options below. Configure in Menu [5-11] CW Message Entry Setting Value Text String/ Paddle (default) Text String: Registers messages using text strings. Paddle: Registers messages via paddle operation. Registering CW Messages via Text Input Check to ensure that the CW message registration method in Menu [5-11] is configured to Text String, followed by performing the steps below to register a CW message. CW messages can be stored in any of the channels from 1 to 8. 1 Press F2 [KEYER] to display the CW Message screen (for text input). When this transceiver is in a mode other than CW, F2
[KEYER] is not displayed in the key guide. Press
[CW/CW-R]. If the channel to register the CW message is not displayed in the key guide, press F1 [MORE]. Doing so switches the key guide. 2 Press and hold F2 [CH 1] to F5 [CH 4] or F2 [CH 5]
to F5 [CH 8] to select the channel to register the CW message. The CW message edit screen is displayed. Pressing F7 [NEXT] each time switches between F2 [CH 1] to F5 [CH 4] and F2 [CH 5] to F5 [CH 8]. 3 Use the function keys, [MULTI/CH] control or USB keyboard to enter a CW message. Enter a message that contains not more than 50 characters. The default setting is blank. Key F1 [SPACE]
F2 []/ F3 [+]
]/ F5 [
F4 [
F [BACK SPACE]
5-14 Behavior Inserts a space. Selects a character.
] Moves the cursor. Deletes the character to the left of the cursor. COMMUNICATING AIDS 5 4 Press F6 [STOP] to end registration of the CW message. The display returns to the CW Message screen. If the memory is used up (indicated as 100%), the CW message registration process ends automatically even when it is still in progress. Morse code that is input is converted into text strings and displayed in the channel list of the CW Message screen. For channels that do not contain any CW message, the corresponding channel numbers are displayed in gray. CW messages cannot be registered if the PADDLE or KEY jack is not configured to the PADDLE mode. Operate the paddle to register a CW message. The Morse code displayed in the channel list uses the same functions as Morse code decoding. For this reason, the spacing may be wider or different characters may be displayed depending on the habit and the speed of the operator performing the keying. displayed in the same way as Morse code decoding. displayed correctly. The * symbol and code abbreviations are also Japanese texts can be registered but will not be Contest Number Configuring the Starting Contest Number (Text Input Only) The starting contest number can be configured when the contest numbers are 3-digit serial numbers that run from 001 (001 method). Configure in Menu [5-12] Contest Number Setting Value 001 (default) to 9999 (1 step) Selecting a Method for Sending out Contest Number
(Text Input Only) When a CW message that contains a %N input is transmitted, numeric values 1, 9 and 0 are converted into alphabets A, N and O (or T) respectively in the Morse code format and sent out as a contest number. Configure in Menu [5-13] Contest Number Format Off (default)/ 190 to ANO/ 190 to ANT/ 90 to NO/ 90 to NT Coding Example Setting Value Option 190 to ANO 190 to ANT 90 to NO 90 to NT Text String Sent out as Contest Number 190 90 Output Code ANO ANT NO NT Key F [DEL]
F [CHAR]
Behavior Deletes the character to the right of the cursor. Switches the type of character to edit. Pressing the key each time switches the selection in the following sequence:
ABC (upper case) !# (symbols) ABC (upper case) Pressing F7 [CANCEL] returns the display to the CW message screen without registering the input message. When %N is saved as part of a CW message, this will be substituted with a contest number during transmission. A continuous text string that is input after ~ and up to that before an inserted space becomes a consecutive code such as AR or BT. Characters that can be input are as follows. D A J Q N 3 0
/
,
@ ~ % <
I K V W X 8
=
-
G T 6
) H U 7
:
E R 4
>
F S 5
(
B O 1
?
C P 2
. 9
+
L M Z Y _
"
Space 4 Press F6 [SAVE] to save the CW message. Registering CW Messages via Paddle Operation Check to ensure that the CW message registration method in Menu [5-11] is configured to Paddle, followed by performing the steps below to register a CW message. CW messages can be stored in any of the channels from 1 to 8. 1 Press F2 [KEYER] to display the CW Message screen. 2 Press and hold F2 [CH 1] to F5 [CH 4] or F2 [CH 5]
to F5 [CH 8] to select the channel to register the CW message. A message prompting registration of a CW message is displayed. While in the input standby mode, pressing F7 [CANCEL]
returns the display to the CW message screen without registering the message. 3 Register a CW message via keying with a paddle. When keying using a paddle starts, the display switches to a CW message (paddle) registration screen. Continuing keying in this state registers the CW message. During registration of a CW message, memory usage (%) is displayed on the screen. If paddle operation is not performed during the registration process, a space will be inserted at every interval equivalent to 7 dots. 5-15
( )( )( )( ) 5 COMMUNICATING AIDS Selecting a Channel for Counting up the Contest Numbers (Text Input Only) The CW message channel for which contest numbers are counted up can be registered using this setting. Configure in Menu [5-14] Channel Number (Count-
up Message) Setting Value Off (default)/ Channel 1 to Channel 8 Decrementing the Contest Number (Text Input Only) If communication is not established after a contest number is sent to the receiving station, the contest number that is sent next will be decremented (reduced) by 1. 1 Press F2 [KEYER] to display the CW Message screen. Playing/Transmitting CW Messages This transceiver can be configured as follows to play back or transmit a registered CW message. The CW message screen and function key displays are different when Menu [5-11] CW Message Entry is configured to Paddle and when it is configured to Text String. Descriptions in this manual are based on the Paddle setting, but the steps are the same when it is configured to Text String. Also, a CW message needs to be registered in advance before it can be played back or transmitted. 1 Press F2 [KEYER] to display the CW Message 2 To play back a CW message, press [VOX] to set screen. break-in to OFF. When break-in is set to OFF, the [VOX] LED light goes off. To transmit a CW message, set break-in to ON. When break-
3 Press F2 [CH 1] to F5 [CH 4] or F2 [CH 5] to F5 [CH 8] to select a CW message. Playback or transmission starts. To cancel the operation, in is set to ON, the [VOX] LED lights up. press F5 [STOP]. 2 Press F7 [NEXT] to select a channel group for which the contest numbers are to be displayed.
>> is displayed beside the channel for counting up the
<<
contest number, and F6 [-1] is displayed in the key guide. Pressing F7 [NEXT] each time switches between F2 [CH 1] to F5 [CH 4] and F2 [CH 5] to F5 [CH 8]. For more details on the method for selecting a channel group, please refer to Registering CW Messages via Text Input. 3 Press F6 [-1] to reduce the contest number by 1. When the setting of the channel for counting up the contest number in Menu [5-14] is configured to Off,
>> is not displayed and F6 [-1] is also not shown
<<
in the key guide. When Menu [5-14] Channel Number (Count-up Message) is configured to a setting other than Off, the contest number is added immediately after playback or transmission of the CW message for the selected channel has ended. Operating the paddle while Menu [5-10] Interrupt Keying is On pauses playback or transmission of the message memory. After paddle operation has ended, playback or transmission resumes from the paused state. Operating the paddle while Off is configured stops playback or transmission of the message memory. To transmit a CW message without using break-in, press
[SEND] instead of performing step 2. Repeat Playback of CW Messages Press F4 [REPEAT]. Pressing F4 [REPEAT] each time toggles the repeat function between ON and OFF. When the repeat mode is ON, <<
selected CW message memory.
>> lights up for the 5-16 Configuring the Repeat Playback Interval The time interval for repeating playback of a CW message can be configured. Configure in Menu [5-16] CW/Voice Message Retransmit Interval Time Setting Value 0 to 10 (default) to 60 [s] (1 step) Configuring to a larger value lengthens the playback interval. Interrupt Keying Operating the paddle while playback or transmission of a CW message is in progress allows the CW message playback or transmission process to be interrupted for the Morse code input using the paddle to be inserted. Configure in Menu [5-10] Interrupt Keying Setting Value Off (default)/ On Deleting a CW Message The steps to delete a CW message that is registered in Channel 1 to Channel 8 are as follows. 1 Press F2 [KEYER] to display the CW Message 2 Select a channel number that contains the CW 3 Press and hold F5 [(DELETE)] to delete the CW screen. message to delete. message. COMMUNICATING AIDS 5 RTTY Operation This transceiver comes with a built-in demodulator for RTTY operation, a RX decoder and a TX encoder. It is possible to operate in RTTY (FSK) independently by combining the use of a commercially available USB keyboard. Also, it is possible to operate in the RTTY mode by connecting an external device. Before operating in the RTTY mode, adjust the carrier level while checking the ALC meter. Displaying the RTTY Communication Screen 1 Press [FSK/PSK] to select RTTY (FSK) mode. 2 Press F3 [DECODE]. The RTTY communication screen appears. Text Display Area + FFT Scope
. Text Display Area + X-Y Scope
. Switching between the FFT Scope and X-Y Scope Display The display toggles between the audio FFT scope and X-Y scope each time the scope display is touched. The RTTY communication screen will not be displayed if Menu [2-06] FSK Spacing is not configured to 170
[Hz]. Noise Reduction 1, Noise Reduction 2, Beat Canceler 1, Beat Canceler 2, audio peak filter and RX DSP equalizer do not function during decoding of RTTY messages. The layout of the RTTY communication screen is as follows. Indicator Displays Indicates the status of the function. TX/RX Details Displays the character strings that are transmitted or received. TX Details Character strings to be transmitted. 5-17 Threshold LevelWaterfallTX DetailsFFT ScopeIndicator DisplaysTX/RX Details Saving RTTY Communication Logs The CW, RTTY and PSK communication screens can be saved using the communication log function. Please refer to Communication Log on page 5-27. Adjusting the RTTY Decode Threshold Level Noise that occurs when there is no signal may sometimes be erroneously detected as text, which results in the display of unwanted text. To reduce the occurrence of such issues, adjust the threshold level. Raise the threshold level when there is frequent erroneous detection due to noise. 1 Press F5 [THLD]. The threshold level setting can now be adjusted. 2 Press F4 []/ F5 [+] or turn the [MULTI/CH] control to adjust the level. Setting Value 1 to 10 (default) to 30 (1 step) Adjust the threshold value in the ascending order according to the receiving status of noise, for example. Start from a small value between the range of 1 to 30 and configure the threshold value to a point where reception is good. To restore the default setting, press and hold F2 [(RESET)]. 3 Press F1 [
] to end the process. FFT Scope/X-Y Scope Display Setting The tuning scope displayed on the RTTY communication screen can be switched to an FFT scope or X-Y scope display. Configure in Menu [2-09] RTTY Tuning Scope Setting Value FFT Scope (default)/ X-Y Scope The display toggles between the FFT Scope and X-Y Scope each time the scope display on the screen is touched. FFT Scope Waveform Averaging The waveform displayed on the FFT scope can be averaged. Averaging of the waveform reduces random noise and makes observation of the target signal easier. Configure in Menu [2-00] FFT Scope Averaging
(RTTY Decode) Setting Value 0 (default) to 9 (1 step) (minimum to maximum averaging) 5 COMMUNICATING AIDS FFT Scope The audio FFT scope is used for viewing the tuning status. The two vertical lines on the left and right represent the mark and space frequencies respectively. Adjust the tuning frequency while receiving a signal such that the two peaks overlap evenly with the two lines. Waterfall The waterfall is a time-series display of the RX signal spectrum which functions in tandem with the FFT scope. The entire waterfall display can also be shifted in tandem with changes in the RX frequency. X-Y Scope The X-Y scope displays the tuning status in the RTTY (FSK) mode as a cross pattern. The cross patterns bisect at right angles (90 degrees) when this transceiver is correctly tuned to the signal. Threshold Level Displays the threshold value of the RX signal level for decoding. Operating the RTTY Encode/Decode Screen The following operations are enabled when the RTTY communication screen opens. Pressing the [Page Up] or [Page Down] key scrolls the display of the TX or RX details. Key F1 [MORE]
F3 [PAUSE]
F4 [LOG]
F4 [(CLEAR)]
F5 [THLD]
F5 [MEMORY]
F6 [X-Y LEV]
F7 [EXTEND]
Behavior Switches the key guide. Pauses update (drawing) of the TX/RX details display area. Pressing the key again resumes the update (drawing). Turns ON/OFF the communication log function. Pressing and holding this key displays the screen for selecting a log file that is saved. Pressing and holding the key clears the text displayed on the TX/RX details screen. Switches to the threshold level configuration mode. Switches to the RTTY Message screen. Switches between the speed and density of the X-
Y scope. Enlarges the size of the RTTY communication screen. Pressing it again restores the screen to the standard size. Indicator Displays Display
. Behavior Appears when the communication log function is ON. Appears when the communication log function is ON and in the standby mode. Appears when signal decoding is in progress. Appears when encoding the characters in the TX buffer. Appears when the decode function is stopped or disabled. Appears when transmitting the message memory. Appears when in the insert mode. Appears when in the overwrite mode. 5-18 COMMUNICATING AIDS 5
(USB-A). Temporarily Placing Character Strings in the TX Details Display Area before Transmission 1 Connect the USB keyboard to 2 Press F3 [DECODE] to display the RTTY communication screen. 3 Enter a character string using the USB keyboard. The input character string is displayed and temporarily placed in the TX details display area. 4 Press [F12] on the USB keyboard to send out the character string. Character strings that are stored in the TX details display Upon entering the TX mode, the [BUSY/TX] LED lights up in area are sent out by this transceiver.
>> is displayed in the status bar. red, and <<
In the TX details display area, the color of the individual characters change successively once they are transmitted. Character strings that have been transmitted appear successively in the TX/RX details display area. 5 Press [F12] on the USB keyboard to end transmission.
>> is displayed in the status bar. After
>> display go off. Pressing [ESC] while transmission of the character If there remain characters in the TX details display area that are not transmitted when [F12] is pressed in step 5,
<<
transmission of all the character strings is complete, the transceiver switches to the RX mode and the light of the
[BUSY/TX] LED and <<
strings is in progress switches this transceiver to the RX mode. Transmission of the character strings stops, and character strings in the character string buffer that are not yet transmitted are cleared. Time stamp and frequency information can be added to the TX or RX data that is displayed in the TX details display area. Refer to Displaying a Time Stamp
(5-28). Sending a character string using the USB keyboard while the TX/RX display is paused by pressing F3
[PAUSE] cancels the paused state. The character strings that can be placed temporarily in the TX details display area can contain a maximum of 4300 characters. Alphanumeric characters and symbols that can be input using a USB keyboard are as follows. C I B A D O P Q R 5 2
(
, 3
) 4
. E S 6
-
F T 7
?
G H U 8
:
K J Y V W X 9
#
Space
;
!
/
L M N 1 0 Z
$
&
Line Break Selecting a Waterfall Display Type Configure in Menu [2-17] Waterfall when Tuning
(RTTY/PSK Audio Scope) Setting Value Straight (default)/ Follow Straight: Uses a straight line to show transition in the level of the target signal displayed on the waterfall when the RX frequency is altered. Follow: Tracks and displays the latest audio FFT level at the portion where the waterfall starts flowing when the RX frequency is altered. Tracking Speed/Density Level of X-Y Scope Switch between the speed and density of the X-Y scope. Press F6 [XY LEV.]. Pressing F6 [XY LEV.] each time switches the level. The tracking speed is displayed on the X-Y scope display. Setting Value Lv1/ Lv2 (default)/ Lv3
.
(USB-A). Transmitting Character Strings Using USB Keyboard A commercially available USB keyboard can be used to input and transmit character strings. Transmitting the Input Character String Immediately 1 Connect the USB keyboard to 2 Press F3 [DECODE] to display the RTTY 3 Press [F12] on the USB keyboard to enter the TX
>> is 4 Enter a character string using the USB keyboard. The input character string is displayed in the TX details display area and transmitted immediately. In the TX details display area, the color of the individual characters change successively once they are transmitted. Characters that have been transmitted appear successively in the TX/RX details display area. communication screen. mode. The [BUSY/TX] LED lights up in red, and <<
displayed in the status bar. 5 Press [F12] on the USB keyboard to end transmission. If there remain characters in the TX details display area that are not transmitted when [F12] is pressed in step 5,
<<
transmission of all the character strings is complete, the transceiver switches to the RX mode and the light of the
[BUSY/TX] LED and <<
>> is displayed in the status bar. After
>> display go off. 5-19 5 COMMUNICATING AIDS RTTY Message Memory Fixed phrases that are often used in the RTTY mode can be registered in advance as an RTTY message in the RTTY message memory. Configuring a message to be saved to auto transmission
(Auto TX) or auto reception (Auto RX) enables the RTTY message to be transmitted via simple operation. Up to 8 types of RTTY messages can be registered to Channels 1 to 8 in the memory. Registering RTTY Messages 1 Press F5 [MEMORY] on the RTTY communication screen to display the RTTY Message screen. Configuring Auto TX/RX for the RTTY Message Memory The transmission and reception behavior can be configured when an RTTY message memory channel is selected. Auto TX places this transceiver in the TX mode before transmitting a message when a message memory channel is selected, and maintain the TX mode after all messages have been sent out. For auto RX, pressing [F12] after selecting a message memory channel for transmission places this transceiver in the TX mode. When the message is sent out, this transceiver is automatically restored to the RX mode. Combining auto TX and auto RX enables both transmission and reception to be performed automatically. 1 Press F3[
2 Press F6 [AUTO.TX] to set auto TX to ON. control to select the message for auto TX/RX.
<<
>> is displayed to the right of the RTTY message.
] or turn the [MULTI/CH]
] / F4[
] / F4[
.2 Press F3[
] or turn the [MULTI/CH]
control to select the channel for saving the RTTY message. 3 Press F5 [MSG] to enter the RTTY message memory edit mode. When auto TX is set to OFF, the <<
goes off, and the RTTY message of the channel is temporarily placed in the character string buffer but not transmitted automatically.
>> display 3 Press F7 [AUTO.RX] to set auto RX to ON.
>> is displayed to the right of the RTTY
<<
message. When auto RX is set to OFF, the <<
>> display goes off, and this transceiver is not restored to the RX mode after the RTTY message for the channel has been sent out. To sent an RTTY message for which AUTO TX is configured to OFF, select the channel in which the RTTY message is stored. Check to ensure that the character string (RTTY message) is forwarded to the character string buffer, followed by pressing [F12] on the USB keyboard. transmitting an RTTY message for which AUTO RX is set to OFF, press [F12] on the USB keyboard after the RTTY message has been sent out. To switch this transceiver to the RX mode after
.4 Use the function keys, [MULTI/CH] control or USB keyboard to enter a character string. Key F1 [SPACE]
F2 []/ F3 [+]
]/ F5 [
F4 [
F [BACK SPACE]
F [DEL]
F [CHAR]
Behavior Inserts a space. Selects a character.
] Moves the cursor. Deletes the character to the left of the cursor. Deletes the character to the right of the cursor. Switches the type of character to edit. Pressing the key each time switches the selection in the following sequence:
ABC (upper case) !# (symbols) ABC (upper case) 5 Press F6 [SAVE] to save the RTTY message. Pressing F7 [CANCEL] discards the content that is currently Alphanumeric characters and symbols that can be input (up being edited and exits the character string input mode. to 70 characters) E A C D O P Q R S 6 5 2
(
,
-
K J Y V W X 9
#
;
Space F G H T 7
?
L M N 0 Z 1
$
&
Line Break U 8
:
4
. 3
) B
!
/
I 5-20 Transmitting Character Strings from the RTTY Message Memory A message that is registered in the RTTY message memory can be transmitted as follows. 1 Press F5 [MEMORY] to display the RTTY Message screen. 2 Press F3 [CH 1] to F6 [CH 4] or F3 [CH 5] to F6 [CH 8] to select the channel that contains the message to be transmitted. The RTTY message of the channel corresponding to the function key is being transmitted automatically. If the channel guide is not displayed, press F2 [MORE]. Pressing F7 [NEXT] each time switches between F3 [CH 1] to F6 [CH 4] and F3 [CH 5] to F6 [CH 8]. After transmitting the RTTY message that is indicated by an
>> display beside it, this transceiver returns
<<
to the RX mode. Settings Related to RTTY Encode/Decode Enabling Decode UOS (Unshift on Space) If a space character is included in the RTTY signal that is received, the character following the space can be forcibly interpreted as a character code (alphabet). In RTTY, garbled characters may appear due to the signal strength or noise. To avoid this from happening as much as possible, the character after a space character is interpreted as a more frequently used character code (alphabet). Configure in Menu [2-01] RX UOS Setting Value Off/ On (default) On: Encodes space characters. Off: Does not encode space characters. To receive a numeric value or symbol that immediately follows a space character, turn off the UOS function. Newline Code Setting Configure the newline code when receiving an RTTY signal. Configure in Menu [2-02] Newline Code Setting Value CR+LF/ All (default) All: Inserts a line break for every newline code. CR+LF: Inserts a line break only when a CR+LF code is received. COMMUNICATING AIDS 5 Diddle Operation Diddle allows the user to select the type of code to transmit when the characters to be sent run out during transmission in the RTTY
(FSK) mode. Configure in Menu [2-03] Diddle Setting Value Off/ Blank Code (default)/ Letters Code Off: Does not send out a character code. Blank Code: Sends out a space character. Letters Code: Sends out a character code. Encode UOS This is used for sending out a numeric value or symbol that immediately follows a space during transmission in the RTTY
(FSK) mode. Enabling this function allows the receiving station to recognize the code that comes after a space as a numeric value or symbol, thus reducing the occurrence of garbled characters. Configure in Menu [2-04] TX UOS Setting Value Off/ On (default) On: Uses encode UOS. Off: Does not use encode UOS. Sending a Newline Code at the Start or End of a Transmission A newline code (CR+LF) can be sent out when RTTY encode/
decode starts or ends. A line break is inserted before and after the RTTY message on the decode screen of the receiving station, which makes it easier to identify the transmitted RTTY message. Configure in Menu [2-05] Automatic Newline Insertion Setting Value Off/ On (default) On: Sends out a newline code. Off: Does not send out a newline code. RTTY Parameters Configuring the Mark Frequency Configure the frequency of the mark signal that is used for communication in the RTTY (FSK) mode. The 1275 Hz frequency is referred to as a low tone, and the 2125 Hz frequency as a high tone. The high tone is used under normal circumstances. Configure in Menu [2-08] FSK Tone Frequency Setting Value 1275/ 2125 (default) [Hz]
Configuring the RTTY Shift Width The difference between the mark signal frequency and space signal frequency is called shift width. Configure the shift width during communication in the RTTY mode. Configure in Menu [2-06] FSK Spacing Setting Value 170 (default)/ 200/ 425/ 850 [Hz]
RTTY shift width cannot be altered when the RTTY When the shift width in RTTY exceeds 170 Hz, the audio communication screen is open. peak filter for the selected band cannot be set to ON. To operate in the RTTY mode using the built-in demodulator, encoder and decoder of this transceiver, configure the setting to 170 [Hz]. 5-21 5 COMMUNICATING AIDS Frequency Reverse in RTTY Mode Decoding cannot be performed correctly when the RTTY signal received is in the reverse state (frequencies of the mark signal and space signal are reversed). When this occurs, press and hold
[FSK/ PSK] to reverse the RTTY signal received so that the reverse signal can be decoded. Operating RTTY Using an External Device To operate in the RTTY mode using an external device instead of the built-in encoder and decoder functions of this transceiver by configuring this transceiver to the RTTY (FSK) mode, make use of the ACC 2 connector. Connect the keying output line of the external device to pin 2 (RTTY) of the ACC 2 connector and the demodulation input line of the external device to pin 3 (ANO) of the ACC 2 connector. Also, connect the TX control (PTT) line to pin 13 (SS) of the ACC 2 connector. For RTTY transmission using PKS/SS signals of the ACC 2 connector, encoding is performed using the RTK signals input to the ACC 2 connector. However, if the built-in encoder is activated during transmission via the PKS/SS signals, encoding will be performed using the built-in encoder and the RTK signals from the ACC 2 connector will be ignored. (Transmission of the built-in message memory is also possible during RTTY operation using an external device.) See below for examples of the connection setup (1-4). Connection with a PC Connection with devices with a built-in TNC ACC 2 Keying Polarity Setting When communicating using an external device in the RTTY (FSK) mode, input keying signals to pin 2 (RTTY) of the ACC 2 connector. Configure in Menu [2-07] FSK Keying Polarity Setting Value Off (default)/ On Configure the keying polarity of this pin 2 (RTTY) according to the specifications of the external device. When Menu
[2-07] FSK Keying Polarity is configured to Off and pin 2
(RTTY) is short-circuited to GND, signals are transmitted at the mark frequency configured in Menu [2-08] FSK Tone Frequency. When Menu [2-07] FSK Keying Polarity is configured to On, signals are transmitted as space signals with the mark frequency shifted by the amount configured in Menu [2-06]
FSK Spacing. Audio Peak Filter Using the audio peak filter may help to improve the decodability of RTTY messages when operating in the RTTY (FSK) mode with this transceiver connected to an external device. Press F [APF] to set the audio peak filter to ON. When audio peak filter is turned on, ON is displayed in the When audio peak filter is turned off, OFF is displayed in the lower row of F [APF]. lower row of F [APF]. 5-22 PSK Operation This transceiver is equipped with a built-in demodulator, encoder and decoder for operating in the PSK31 and PSK63 modes. Operation in the PSK31 or PSK63 mode can be performed easily by connecting a commercially available USB keyboard. PSK can also be operated using a data communication software program that makes use of the sound function of a PC. When transmitting in the PSK mode, adjust the carrier until the ALC meter starts to deflect. When an external device is used, adjust the audio signal level from the external device, followed by adjusting the ALC meter until it starts to deflect. Displaying the PSK Communication Screen 1 Press [FSK/PSK] to select PSK mode. 2 Press F3 [DECODE]. Text Display Area + FFT Scope The PSK communication screen appears. Text Display Area + Vectorscope
. Switching between the FFT Scope and Vectorscope Display The display toggles between the audio FFT scope and waterfall and vectorscope each time the scope display on the screen is touched. Noise Reduction 1, Noise Reduction 2, Beat Canceler 1, Beat Canceler 2 and RX DSP equalizer do not function during decoding of PSK messages. The layout of the PSK communication screen is as follows. Indicator Indicates the status of the function. TX/RX Details Displays the character strings that are transmitted or received. TX Details Display Character strings to be transmitted. Space FrequencyMark FrequencyBFOBFOMark FrequencySpace Frequency170 Hz2125 Hz2125 Hz170 HzReverseNormalTX Details DisplayWaterfallThreshold LevelFFT ScopeIndicatorTX/RX Details FFT Scope The audio FFT scope is used for viewing the tuning status. If there are multiple signals in the band, the target signal is tuned such that it becomes a 1500 Hz tone. Zero-in needs to be performed accurately in the PSK mode. Zero-
in the target signal while monitoring the FFT scope and vectorscope. Waterfall Displays the transition in the spectrum of the TX audio signal in tandem with the FFT scope. Vectorscope The vectorscope indicates the way in which the PSK signals received are tuned. It comes in handy when tuning to the signal of the target station while monitoring the waveform on the vectorscope. Threshold Level Displays the threshold value of the RX signal input level for decoding. Operating the PSK Communication Screen The following operations are enabled when the PSK communication screen opens. Pressing the [Page Up] or [Page Down] key scrolls the display of the TX or RX details. Key Behavior F1 [MORE]
F2 [B/QPSK]
F3 [31/63]
F3 [PAUSE]
Switches the key guide. Switches between the BPSK and QPSK modes. Switches between the PSK31 and PSK63 modes. Pauses update (drawing) of the TX/RX details display area. Pressing the key again resumes the update
(drawing). Turns ON/OFF the communication log function. F4 [LOG]
Pressing and holding this key displays the screen for selecting a log file that is saved. F4 [(CLEAR)] Pressing and holding the key clears the text displayed on the TX/RX details screen. F5 [THLD]
Switches to the threshold level configuration mode. F5 [MEMORY] Switches to the PSK Message screen. F6 [AFC]
F7 [EXTEND]
Switches the AFC function. Enlarges the size of the PSK communication screen. Pressing it again restores the screen to the standard size. COMMUNICATING AIDS 5 Indicator Displays Display
. Behavior Appears when the communication log function is ON. Appears when the communication log function is ON and in the standby mode. Appears when signal decoding is in progress. Appears when encoding the character strings in the TX character string buffer. Appears when the decode function is stopped or disabled. Appears when transmitting the auto standby channel during transmission of the message memory. Displays the baud rate. Displays the communication mode. Appears when in the insert mode. Appears when in the overwrite mode. Appears when AFC is ON. Displays the difference in frequency at the bottom. Appears when NET is ON. Saving PSK Communication Logs The CW, RTTY and PSK communication screens can be saved using the communication log function. Please refer to Communication Log on page 5-27. Adjusting the PSK Decode Threshold Level Noise that occurs when there is no signal may sometimes be erroneously detected as text, which results in the display of unwanted text. To reduce the occurrence of such issues, adjust the threshold level. Raise the threshold level when there is frequent erroneous detection due to noise. 1 Press F5 [THLD]. The threshold level setting can now be adjusted. 2 Press F4 []/ F5 [+] or turn the [MULTI/CH] control to adjust the level. Setting Value 1 to 10 (default) to 30 (1 step) Adjust the threshold value in the ascending order according to the receiving status of noise, for example. Start from a small value between the range of 1 to 30 and configure the threshold value to a point where reception is good. 3 Press F1 [
] to end the process. 5-23 5 COMMUNICATING AIDS FFT Scope/Vectorscope Display Setting The tuning scope displayed on the PSK communication screen can be switched to an FFT scope or vectorscope display. Configure in Menu [2-13] PSK Tuning Scope Setting Value FFT Scope (default)/ Vector Scope The display toggles between the FFT scope and vectorscope each time the scope display on the screen is touched. FFT Scope Waveform Averaging The waveform displayed on the FFT scope can be averaged. Averaging of the waveform reduces random noise and makes observation of the target signal easier. Configure in Menu [2-10] FFT Scope Averaging
(PSK Decode) AFC (Automatic Frequency Control) The AFC (Automatic Frequency Control) function can be used to tune the PSK signal that is being received. Press F6 [AFC] to set the AFC function to On. Pressing F6 [AFC] each time toggles the option in the When the AFC function is ON, the <<
following sequence: OFF AFC ON AFC&NET ON OFF.
>> display lights up. The amount of frequency correction made by the AFC function is displayed below AFC. Pressing and holding F6[AFC] while the AFC function is ON increases or decreases the displayed frequency which indicates the amount of correction made by the AFC function. Setting Value 0 (default) to 9 (1 step) (minimum to maximum averaging)
. Configuring the AFC Tuning Range Configure the frequency range for tuning the PSK signals that are received using the AFC function. Configure in Menu [2-11] PSK AFC Tuning Range Setting Value 8/ 15 (default) [Hz]
NET The NET function transmits signals by applying the frequency that is automatically tuned by AFC. Press F5 [AFC] to select AFC & NET. Pressing F5 [AFC] each time toggles the option in the following sequence: OFF AFC function ON AFC function & NET function ON OFF.
<<
>> and <<
>> light up. Switching between BPSK and QPSK The PSK mode is further divided into 2 sub-modes, namely BPSK and QPSK. BPSK is the more commonly used mode. QPSK excels at correcting errors and boasts a higher decoding rate than BPSK. Press F2 [B/QPSK]. Pressing the key each time toggles the mode between BPSK and QPSK. The display to the right of the status bar toggles between <<
>> when the mode is switched.
>> and <<
This is fixed at BPSK when the PSK63 mode is selected. Selecting a Waterfall Display Type Configure in Menu [2-17] Waterfall when Tuning
(RTTY/PSK Audio Scope) Setting Value Straight (default)/ Follow Straight: Uses a straight line to show transition in the level of the target signal displayed on the waterfall when the RX frequency is altered. Follow: Tracks and displays the latest audio FFT level at the portion where the waterfall starts flowing when the RX frequency is altered. Vectorscope Turn the Tuning control to perform tuning such that the emission lines displayed on the vectorscope radiate from the center into the same direction. Make use of the fine-tuning function if there is difficulty While transmission is in progress, the vectorscope does in performing tuning. not function and points to the 12 oclock direction. 5-24 Unmodulated Carrier SignalIdle Signal of BPSK or QPSKIn Tune (QPSK)In Tune (BPSK) Switching between PSK31 and PSK63 This transceiver supports PSK31 as well as PSK63. The latter has a transfer rate that is twice that of the BPSK mode. Perform the following step to toggle between PSK31 and PSK63. Press F3 [31/63]. It is possible to toggle between BPSK31 and BPSK63 or between QPSK31 and QPSK63. The display to the right of the status bar toggles between <<
>>
when the mode is switched.
>> and <<
This is fixed at BPSK when the PSK63 mode is selected.
(USB-A). Transmitting Character Strings from USB Keyboard A commercially available USB keyboard can be used to input and transmit character strings. Transmitting the Input Character String Immediately 1 Connect the USB keyboard to 2 Press F3 [DECODE] to display the PSK 3 Press [F12] on the USB keyboard to switch this
>> is 4 Enter a character string using the USB keyboard. The input character string is displayed in the TX details display area and transmitted immediately. In the TX details display area, the color of the individual characters change successively once they are transmitted. Characters that have been transmitted appear successively in the TX/RX details display area. communication screen. transceiver to the TX mode. The [BUSY/TX] LED lights up in red, and <<
displayed in the status bar. 5 Press [F12] on the USB keyboard to switch this transceiver to the RX mode. If there remain characters in the TX details display area that are not transmitted when [F12] is pressed in step 5,
<<
transmission of all the character strings is complete, the transceiver switches to the RX mode and the light of the
[BUSY/TX] LED and <<
>> is displayed in the status bar. After
>> display go off. COMMUNICATING AIDS 5
(USB-A). Temporarily Placing Character Strings in the Character String Buffer before Transmission 1 Connect the USB keyboard to 2 Press F3 [DECODE] to display the PSK communication screen. 3 Enter a character string using the USB keyboard. The input character string is stored temporarily in the TX details display area. 4 Press [F12] on the USB keyboard to send out the character string that is stored in the character string buffer. Upon entering the TX mode, the [BUSY/TX] LED lights up in
>> is displayed in the status bar. red, and <<
In the TX details display area, the color of the individual characters change successively once they are transmitted. 5 Press [F12] on the USB keyboard to switch this transceiver to the RX mode.
>> is displayed in the status bar. After
>> display go off. Pressing [ESC] while transmission of the character If there remain characters in the TX details display area that are not transmitted when [F12] is pressed in step 5,
<<
transmission of all the character strings is complete, the transceiver switches to the RX mode and the light of the
[BUSY/TX] LED and <<
strings is in progress switches this transceiver to the RX mode. Transmission of the character strings stops, and character strings in the TX details display area that are not yet transmitted are cleared. Time stamp and frequency information can be added to the TX or RX data that is displayed in the TX/RX details display area. Sending a character string using the USB keyboard while the TX/RX display is paused by pressing F3 [PAUSE]
cancels the paused state. The character strings that can be placed temporarily in the TX details display area can contain a maximum of 4300 characters. Characters and symbols that can be input using a USB keyboard are as follows. F G H U 7 5 h f u w L M N O A Z P Q R 1 0 2 o l m n b c a q r p
.
/
"
-
#
!
{
|
`
;
<
:
~
}
Line Break No The chart above shows the characters and symbols that can be
$ % &
(
? @ [
=
,
*
]
_ Space B C D S 3 d s I V W E 6 8 i g x v
)
\
K Y k z E T 4 e t J X 9 j y input when English is selected in Menu [9-01]. To input Japanese characters, please download and refer to the Japanese instruction manual from our website.
+
^
>
5-25 Configuring Auto TX/RX for the PSK Message Memory The transmission and reception behavior can be configured when a PSK message memory channel is selected. Auto TX places this transceiver in the TX mode before transmitting a message when a message memory channel is selected, and maintain the TX mode after all messages have been sent out. For auto RX, pressing [F12] after selecting a message memory channel for transmission places this transceiver in the TX mode. When the message is sent out, this transceiver is automatically restored to the RX mode. Combining auto TX and auto RX enables both transmission and reception to be performed automatically. 1 Press F3 [DECODE] to display the PSK 2 Press F5 [MEMORY] to display the PSK Message 3 Press F3[
] or turn the [MULTI/CH]
communication screen. screen. control to select the channel containing the message for auto TX/RX.
<<
4 Press F6 [AUTO.TX] to set auto TX to ON.
>> is displayed to the right of the PSK message.
]/ F4[
. When auto TX is set to OFF, the <<
>> display goes off, and the PSK message of the channel is temporarily placed in the character string buffer but not transmitted automatically. 5 Press F7 [AUTO.RX] to set auto RX to ON.
<<
When auto RX is set to OFF, the <<
>> is displayed to the right of the PSK message.
>> display goes off, and this transceiver is not restored to the RX mode after the PSK message for the channel has been sent out. To sent an PSK message for which AUTO TX is set to ON, select the channel in which the PSK message is stored. Check to ensure that the character string (PSK message) is forwarded to the TX details display area, followed by pressing [F12] on the USB keyboard. transmitting an PSK message for which AUTO RX is set to OFF, press [F12] on the USB keyboard after the PSK message has been sent out. To switch this transceiver to the RX mode after 5 COMMUNICATING AIDS PSK Message Memory Fixed phrases that are often used in the PSK mode can be registered in advance as a message in the message memory. Adding the auto TX and auto RX functions to the fixed phrases enables messages to be sent out via simple operation. Up to 8 types of messages can be registered. Registering Messages 1 Press F3 [DECODE] to display the PSK 2 Press F5 [MEMORY] to display the PSK Message communication screen. screen.
]/ F4 [
.3 Press F3 [
control to select the channel for registering the message. If F3 [
] are not displayed in the key guide, press F1 [MORE] to toggle the key guide display.
] or turn the [MULTI/CH]
] and F4 [
4 Press F5 [MSG]. 5 Use the function keys, [MULTI/CH] control or USB keyboard to enter a character string. Key F1 [SPACE]
F2 []/ F3 [+]
]/ F5 [
F4 [
F [BACK SPACE]
F [DEL]
F [CHAR]
Behavior Inserts a space. Selects a character.
] Moves the cursor. Deletes the character to the left of the cursor. Deletes the character to the right of the cursor. Switches the type of character to edit. Pressing the key each time switches the selection in the following sequence:
ABC (upper case) abc (lower case)
!# (symbols) ABC (upper case) Pressing F7 [CANCEL] discards the content that is currently being edited and exits the character string input mode. 6 Press F6 [SAVE] to save the edited message. 5-26 Transmitting Character Strings from the PSK Message Memory A message that is registered in the PSK message memory can be transmitted as follows. 1 Press F3 [DECODE] to display the PSK 2 Press F5 [MEMORY] to display the PSK Message communication screen. screen. 3 Press F3 [CH 1] to F6 [CH 4] or F3 [CH 5] to F6 [CH 8] to select the channel that contains the message to be transmitted. The PSK message of the channel corresponding to the function key is being transmitted automatically. However, the PSK message will not be transmitted automatically if auto TX is set to OFF. If the channel guide is not displayed, press F2 [MORE]. Pressing F7 [NEXT] each time switches between F3 [CH 1] to F6 [CH 4] and F3 [CH 5] to F6 [CH 8]. After transmitting the PSK message that is indicated by an
>> display beside it, this transceiver returns
<<
to the RX mode. Settings Related to PSK Configuring the PSK Tone Frequency Configure the tone frequency when signals are received in the PSK mode. Configure in Menu [2-12] PSK Tone Frequency Setting Value 1.0/ 1.5 (default)/ 2.0 [kHz]
Reversing the Direction of Phase Change in the QPSK Mode When the QPSK signal received cannot be decoded correctly, Decoding cannot be performed correctly when the BFO Pressing and holding the [FSK/PSK] mode key enables try decoding with the BFO frequency switched from the LSB side to the USB side. frequency of the PSK signal received is in the reverse state
(frequencies of the lower and upper sidebands are reversed). reverse signals to be decoded. PSK Operation Using a PC For details on operation in the PSK mode using a data communication software program that makes use of the sound function of a PC instead of the built-in encoder and decoder functions of this transceiver while this transceiver is configured to the SSB-DATA mode, please refer to PC Connection. As audio from an external input cannot be transmitted in the PSK mode, make use of the SSB or SSB-DATA mode. transmitted using the DATA VOX function. Alternatively, audio from an external device can also be COMMUNICATING AIDS 5 Communication Log The CW, RTTY and PSK communication screens can be saved using the communication log function. Before doing so, configure the destination for saving the data in File Storage Location of the USB/File Management Menu to Internal Memory or USB Flash Drive. (See 11-12) To save the data to a USB flash drive, insert a USB flash drive
(USB-A). formatted using this transceiver into 1 Set to the CW, RTTY (FSK) or PSK mode. 2 Press F3 [DECODE] to display the corresponding 3 Press F4 [LOG] to set the communication log communication screen. function to On. Pressing F4 [LOG] each time toggles the communication log function between ON and OFF. Log: On appears on the communication screen for about 1 second when the communication log function is ON, and Log: Off is displayed for about 1 second when the function is OFF. When the communication log function is functioning in the ON mode, the communication log ON indicator is displayed on the title bar. is displayed on the transceiver is in the standby mode, title bar. (When there is insufficient space in the USB flash drive or when a USB flash drive is not inserted when the destination for saving the logs is configured to a USB flash drive.) The file name is made up of the date and time in When the communication log function is ON and the
(Example) If the date is 10:20:30 a.m., February 15, 2018:
numerical format together with an underscore. The extension of the file is based on the selection made in Menu [2-14] CW/RTTY/PSK Log File Format. The date and time is expressed in the following sequence:
yyyymmdd_hhmmss. 20180215_102030.txt CW: KENWOOD\TS-890\DECODE\CW RTTY: KENWOOD\TS-890\DECODE\RTTY PSK: KENWOOD\TS-890\DECODE\PSK When removing the USB flash drive, make sure to execute Safe Removal of USB Flash Drive. (See 11-6) The file is stored in the following folder. Selecting a Log File Format Select a format for the log file to be saved. Configure in Menu [2-14] CW/RTTY/PSK Log File Format Setting Value html/ txt (default) html: Saves the log file in the html format. txt: Saves the log file in the text format. 5-27 5 COMMUNICATING AIDS Displaying a Time Stamp A time stamp can be automatically inserted into the TX/RX details display area when switching between the RX and TX mode. Selecting a Time Stamp Type It is possible to select whether to display only the time stamp or to display both the time stamp and frequency. Configure in Menu [2-15] CW/RTTY/PSK Time Stamp Setting Value Off/ Time Stamp/ Time Stamp+Frequency (default) Off: Does not display a time stamp. Time Stamp: Displays only the time stamp. Time Stamp+Frequency: Displays both the time stamp and frequency. Selecting a Clock Type Configure the clock for displaying the time stamp to a Local Clock or Secondary Clock. Configure in Menu [2-16] Clock (CW/RTTY/PSK Time Stamp) Setting Value Local Clock (default)/ Secondary Clock When encoding or decoding starts, a line break and time stamp will be inserted before displaying the encoded or decoded character string. A time stamp is inserted when there is a change in the encoding or decoding status. Editing the Communication Log File 1 In the CW communication screen, press and hold F2 [LOG]. In the RTTY and PSK communication screens, press and hold F4 [LOG]. The screen for selecting log file appears. Operation in FM Mode Operating in the FM mode enables high-quality voice communication as well as communication that is noise-resistant. Communication in the FM mode is also supported on the 29 MHz, 50 MHz and 70 MHz (E type) bands. To communicate with a distant station for which communication cannot be established directly, do so via a repeater. Adjusting Microphone Gain during Operation in FM Mode 1 Adjust the frequency. 2 Press [FM/AM/FM-N] to select FM mode. 3 Press F [ADV.] on the menu screen. 4 Select Advanced Menu [10] Microphone Gain (FM 5 Press [SEND], or press and hold [PTT] on the Mode). microphone. This transceiver is placed in the TX mode and a level meter is displayed. 6 Speak into the microphone in the normal tone and loudness. 7 Press F4 []/ F5 [+] or turn the [MULTI/CH] control to adjust the microphone gain. Setting Value 0 to 50 (default) to 100 (1 step) of the level meter falls within the zone. Adjust the microphone gain level such that the peak value 8 Press [SEND] or release [PTT] on the microphone. 9 Press F1 [
Doing so places this transceiver in the RX mode.
]. When using a microphone with a low sensitivity such as the MC-90, adjust the microphone gain to a higher level. When a microphone with a low sensitivity is used, the modulation factor may stabilize by setting the speech processor to ON. 2 Press F2[
]/ F3[
] to select a file. Pressing F4 [VIEW] displays the log information of the selected file. To read data from the internal memory, press F7 [INT.MEM]. To read data from the USB flash drive, press F7
[USB.MEM]. (If a USB flash drive is not connected, a message will appear prompting you to get ready the USB flash drive.) Pressing F5 [NAME] allows the file name to be changed. Pressing F6 [DELETE] displays a message to confirm deletion of the file. Pressing F4 [OK] deletes the file. 5-28 COMMUNICATING AIDS 5 Selecting a Tone Press F4 [TONE] to select TONE. Pressing F4 [TONE] each time toggles the tone signal selection in the following sequence: TONE CTCSS (CT) CROSS Blank (deselected). Operation in Narrow FM Mode It is possible to switch to a narrow bandwidth during operation in the FM mode. The occupied bandwidth and maximum modulation factor are shown in the table below. Selecting FM Narrow according to the modulation factor of the target station helps to avoid distortion and deterioration in the clarity of the RX audio. Occupied Bandwidth Maximum Modulation Mode Factor 16 kHz or lower 10 kHz or lower FM (Wide) FM Narrow Press and hold [FM/AM]. Pressing and holding [FM/AM] each time switches between FM and FMN (Narrow). 5 kHz or lower 2.5 kHz or lower
. Operating the FM Repeater Switching this transceiver to split operation and turning on the tone signal while in the FM mode enables this transceiver to be used in the repeater operation mode. Configuring the Tone Frequency 1 Press and hold F4 [TONE] to display the FM Tone Frequency screen. 2 Press F4 []/ F5 [+] or turn the [MULTI/CH] control to select the tone frequency. Configuring the Tone Signal Registering the tone settings to a memory channel and calling up the frequency or operation information from the memory channel eliminates the need to configure the tone frequency each time. For more details on the memory channel settings, please refer to Memory Channel. or region this transceiver is being used. The tone frequency may vary depending on the country 67.0 69.3 71.9 74.4 77.0 79.7 82.5 85.4 88.5 91.5 94.8 97.4 100.0 103.5 107.2 110.9 Tone Frequency (Hz) 177.3 114.8 179.9 118.8 123.0 183.5 186.2 127.3 189.9 131.8 192.8 136.5 141.3 196.6 199.5 146.2 151.4 156.7 159.8 162.2 165.5 167.9 171.3 173.8 The default setting is 88.5 Hz. To restore the default setting, press and hold F1 203.5 206.5 210.7 218.1 225.7 229.1 233.6 241.8
[(RESET)]. 250.3 254.1 1750 Frequency screen. Tone Frequency Scan Tone frequency that is contained in signals received in the FM mode can be searched and displayed with the following steps. This is useful when there is a need to know the tone frequency of the repeater station. 1 Press and hold F4 [TONE] to display the FM Tone 2 Press F7 [SCAN] to start tone frequency scan. Scanning stops when a tone frequency is detected, and the frequency is displayed in the FREQ. [Hz] field. Pressing F7 [SCAN] while tone frequency scan is in progress stops the scan operation. Pressing F7 [SCAN] again resume scanning. The scan operation stops when the RX signal is interrupted during tone frequency scan. Scanning resumes when a RX signal is detected by this transceiver. 5-29 88.5 Hz29.520 MHz29.620 MHz29.620 MHz88.5 Hz29.520 MHz 5 COMMUNICATING AIDS CTCSS Operation CTCSS is the abbreviation for Continuous Tone Coded Squelch System. It is used to add a CTCSS tone frequency that is determined in advance with the target station to the audio signal to be transmitted. When the CTCSS tone frequency contained in the RX signal received from the target station coincides with the CTCSS tone frequency of ones own station, the squelch opens and the RX audio can be heard. A different value can be selected for CTCSS tone frequency and tone frequency, but CTCSS and tone cannot be used concurrently. CTCSS tone frequency: Squelch opens upon receiving a CTCSS tone for which the FM wave is superimposed with the same CTCSS tone frequency as that configured on this transceiver. During CTCSS frequency scan, it is possible to detect the CTCSS tone frequency that is contained in the RX signal. When a signal is received while CTCSS tone frequency scan is in progress, the RX audio can be heard even when the CTCSS tone frequency does not coincide with that configured on this transceiver. Selecting CTCSS Press F4 [TONE] to select CTCSS (CT). Pressing F4 [TONE] each time toggles the tone signal selection in the following sequence: TONE CTCSS (CT) CROSS Blank (deselected). Configuring the CTCSS Frequency 1 Press and hold F4 [TONE] to display the FM Tone Frequency screen. 2 Press F4 []/ F5 [+] or turn the [MULTI/CH] control to select the CTCSS frequency. Frequency screen. The scan operation stops when the RX signal is interrupted CTCSS Frequency Scan CTCSS frequency that is contained in signals received in the FM mode can be searched and displayed with the following steps. This is useful when there is a need to know the CTCSS frequency of the mobile station. 1 Press and hold F4 [TONE] to display the CTCSS 2 Press F7 [SCAN] to start tone frequency scan. Scanning stops when a CTCSS frequency is detected, and the Pressing F7 [SCAN] while CTCSS frequency scan is in frequency is displayed in the FREQ. [Hz] field. progress stops the scan operation. Pressing F7 [SCAN] again resume scanning. during CTCSS frequency scan. Scanning resumes when a RX signal is detected by this transceiver. Cross Tone Make use of cross tone for communication with a repeater that requires a different tone for transmission to the repeater (uplink) and reception from the repeater (downlink). Cross Tone frequency uses the tone frequency during The tone squelch operates using the CTCSS frequency during transmission and the CTCSS frequency during reception. reception, while the preconfigured tone frequency is used to transmit a tone during transmission. Selecting Cross Tone Press F4 [TONE] to select CROSS. Pressing F4 [TONE] each time toggles the tone signal selection in the following sequence: TONE CTCSS (CT) CROSS Blank (deselected). Configuring the TX/RX Tones 1 Press and hold F4 [TONE] to display the FM Cross Tone Frequency screen. 250.3 254.1 67.0 69.3 71.9 74.4 77.0 79.7 82.5 85.4 88.5 91.5 94.8 97.4 100.0 103.5 107.2 110.9 CTCSS Frequency (Hz) 114.8 177.3 179.9 118.8 183.5 123.0 186.2 127.3 131.8 189.9 192.8 136.5 196.6 141.3 146.2 199.5 151.4 156.7 159.8 162.2 165.5 167.9 171.3 173.8 The default setting is 88.5 Hz. To restore the default setting, press and hold F1 [(RESET)]. 203.5 206.5 210.7 218.1 225.7 229.1 233.6 241.8 5-30
]/ F3 [
.2 Press F2 [
] to select TONE (TX) or CTCSS (RX). 3 Press F4 [] / F5 [+] or turn the [MULTI/CH] control to select the tone frequency or CTCSS frequency. To restore the default setting of the selected row, press and hold F1 [(RESET)]. REJECTING INTERFERENCE 6 Image of the IF filter passband characteristics Filter Scope The following information is displayed on the filter scope screen. Selected RX filter (A, B or C) Demodulated audio signal Parameters including the IF filter passband width Pitch frequency in the CW mode Notch point of the notch filter Passband width of the roofing filter 6 REJECTING INTERFERENCE Attenuator The attenuator is a function for attenuating the RX signals. If there is interference due to strong signals near the target signal, turning on the attenuator helps to reduce interference caused by nearby frequencies. It is also effective in situations where the RX audio is distorted when the RX signal is too strong. This transceiver comes with three different types of attenuators. Press F [ATT]. Pressing F [ATT] each time switches the attenuation level. Setting Value Off (default)/ 6 dB/ 12 dB/ 18 dB Pressing and holding F [ATT] each time switches the options The attenuation level is stored for each antenna selection The status of the attenuator (attenuation level) is displayed in the reverse sequence. band. in the key guide. Switching the IF Filter Band Characteristics Switching the RX Filter (A, B, C) The setting for the band characteristics of the IF filter on this transceiver can be switched at one touch according to the operating status to one of the three types (A, B or C). The band characteristics are configured by combining the roofing filter or IF and AF filter, high-cut/low-cut and WIDTH/
SHIFT. A different RX filter setting (A, B or C) can be stored for each of the SSB, CW, FSK, PSK, FM and AM modes. Press [IF FIL]. Pressing [IF FIL] each time switches the RX filter in the order of A, B and C. The selected filter is displayed at the top left of the filter scope. The RX filter does not switch to Type C if Menu [6-10] RX Filter Numbers below is configured to 2. Configuring the Selectable Types of RX Filters The selectable types of RX filters can be configured to three (A, B and C) or two (A and B). Configure in Menu [6-10] RX Filter Numbers Setting Value 2/ 3 (default)
. Audio signals are not shown when the audio scope Audio signals are not shown when the RTTY/PSK An out-of-range marker (
screen is displayed. communication screen is displayed.
) is displayed if an image of the passband characteristics is not displayed in the drawing area. Audio FFT is generally displayed within the trapezoidal waveform, but may extend beyond it in some rare cases such as when there is input of a large signal. Sideband on the positive side with respect to the carrier wave is drawn on the audio scope. In principle, sideband also exists on the negative side of the carrier wave in the AM mode. As such, changing the notch point may cause it to shift to the sideband on the negative side. When a notch filter is used concurrently, the marker of the notch point may shift to the sideband on the negative side. In this case, the marker is displayed in the folded state. When the marker is in the folded state, it is displayed in a color that is different from the usual color. 6-1 SSBAM/FMPSKFSKCW 6 REJECTING INTERFERENCE RX Filter Screen The steps to configure the settings for the different types of RX filters are as follows. Displaying the RX Filter Screen Press and hold [IF FIL] to display the RX Filter screen. Selecting a Roofing Filter A roofing filter helps to reduce strong interference signals that are next to the target signal. 1 Press [IF FIL] or F2 [FILTER] to select an RX filter 2 Press F3 [ROOF].
(FIL-A/B/C). Pressing F3 [ROOF] each time switches the passband width. Setting Value Auto (default)/ 270/ 500/ 2.7 k/ 6 k/ 15 k [Hz]
Auto: A roofing filter with a bandwidth wider than the passband width of the DSP filter is automatically selected using high cut/
low cut or Width/Shift. (If there are 2 or more bandwidths that satisfy the conditions, the narrower one is selected.) In the AM mode, a 6 kHz roofing filter is automatically selected if the high cutoff frequency is 3 kHz or lower, and a 15 kHz roofing filter is selected if the high cutoff frequency is higher than 3 kHz. In the FM mode, the option is fixed at 15 kHz and cannot be changed. YG-82CN-1 is attached. options in the reverse sequence.
[MULTI/CH] control. RFT:xxxx is displayed at the bottom right of the filter scope.
[xxxx:270/ 500/ 2.7k/ 6k/ 15k]
The IF passband width for the AM mode is twice the 270 Hz is available for selection when the optional Pressing and holding F3 [ROOF] each time switches the The passband width can also be altered by turning the value of the high cutoff frequency. Example: If the frequency is 3,000 Hz, the IF passband width will be 6 kHz. Switching the IF Filter Shape 3 types of IF filter shapes are available for selection according to the condition of interference and operation. 1 Press [IF FIL] or F2 [FILTER] to select an RX filter. 2 Press F4 [IF]. Pressing F4 [IF] each time switches the shape of the filter. Setting Value Medium (default)/ Soft/ Sharp Pressing and holding F4 [IF] each time switches the options The filter shape can also be altered by turning the The IF filter option is displayed as - and cannot be altered in the reverse sequence.
[MULTI/CH] control. in the FM mode. Switching the AF Filter Type 3 types of audio frequency passbands are available for selection. 1 Press [IF FIL] or F2 [FILTER] to select an RX filter. 2 Press F5 [AF]. Pressing F5 [AF] each time switches the shape of the IF filter. Setting Value Medium (default)/ Wide/ Narrow Pressing and holding F5 [AF] each time switches the options in the reverse sequence. Configuring the Behavior of the HI/SHIFT and LO/
WIDTH Controls (SSB/SSB-DATA Only) The high cut/low cut selection in the SSB mode and Shift/Width selection in the SSB-DATA mode are preconfigured in the default setting, but they can be changed in the menu. SSB Mode Configure in Menu [6-11] Filter Control in SSB Mode (High/Low and Shift/Width) Setting Value High & Low Cut (default)/ Shift & Width SSB-DATA Mode Configure in Menu [6-12] Filter Control in SSB-
DATA Mode (High/Low and Shift/Width) High & Low Cut/ Shift & Width (default) Setting Value 6-2 REJECTING INTERFERENCE 6 Changing the Cutoff Frequency In the SSB, AM and FM modes, the passband width of the filter can be altered by changing the cutoff frequency (low or high). The passband width can be changed so that the interfering signal falls outside the bandwidth of the filter. Changing the Passband Width and Shift Amount When in the CW or SSB-DATA mode, the passband width and shift amount of the DSP filter can be altered. When in the RTTY (FSK) or PSK mode, the passband width can be changed. The passband width can be changed so that the interfering signal falls outside the bandwidth of the filter. Turn the [HI/SHIFT] or [LO/WIDTH] control. Turning the [HI/SHIFT] control to the right increases the cutoff frequency (high) while turning the control to the left decreases the frequency. Turning the [LO/WIDTH] control to the right increases the cutoff frequency (low) while turning the control to the left decreases the frequency. The amount of change and the filter shape are displayed. 1 Turn the [LO/WIDTH] control to change the passband width. Turning the control to the right widens the passband width, while turning to the left narrows it. 2 Turn the [HIGH/SHIFT] control to shift the frequency band. Turning the control to the right shifts the frequency to the high bandwidth, while turning to the left shifts it to the low bandwidth. The shift frequency band cannot be adjusted in the FSK and PSK modes. Mode Low Cutoff Frequency High Cutoff Frequency
(Hz) Setting Value SSB/ SSB-
DATA AM/ AM-
DATA FM/ FM-
DATA 0/ 50/ 100 to 200 (default) to 2000 (100-step) 0/ 100 (default) to / 200/ 300 0/ 50/ 100 to 200 (default) to 1000 (100-step)
(Hz) Setting Value 4000/ 5000 600 to 2800 (default) to 3000 (100-step)/ 3400/
2000 to 3000 (100-step)/
3500/ 4000/ 5000 (default) 1000 to 2800 (default) to 3000 (100-step)/ 3400/
4000/ 5000 When configured to Auto, a roofing filter with a bandwidth wider than the passband width of the DSP filter is selected using high cut/low cut or Width/Shift. When Auto is configured in the AM mode, a 6 kHz roofing filter is automatically selected if the high cutoff frequency is 3 kHz or lower, and a 15 kHz roofing filter is selected if the high cutoff frequency is higher than 3 kHz. When the RX Filter screen is displayed, turning the [HI/
SHIFT] or [LO/WIDTH] control changes the value of the cutoff frequency (low and high). The cutoff frequency value (low and high) is displayed on the RX Filter screen. In the FM mode, the option is fixed at 15 kHz and cannot be changed. When the low cutoff frequency is increased until it reaches the high cutoff frequency, the high cutoff frequency will also change at the same time while keeping the passband width at 0 Hz. When the high cutoff frequency is decreased until it reaches the low cutoff frequency, the low cutoff frequency will also change at the same time while keeping the passband width at 0 Hz. Mode SSB/ SSB-
DATA CW FSK PSK Passband Width (Hz) Setting Value 50/ 80/ 100/ 150/ 200/
250/ 300/ 350/ 400/ 450/
500/ 600/ 700/ 800/ 900/
1000/ 1100/ 1200/ 1300/
1400/ 1500/ 1600/ 1700/
1800/ 1900/ 2000/ 2100/
2200/ 2300/ 2400/ 2500/
2600 (default)/ 2700/
2800/ 2900/ 3000 50/ 80/ 100/ 150/ 200/
250/ 300/ 350/ 400/ 450/
500 (default)/ 600/ 700/
800/ 900/ 1000/ 1500/
2000/ 2500 250/ 300/ 350/ 400/ 450/
500 (default)/ 1000/
1500 50/ 80/ 100/ 150/ 200/
250/ 300/ 350/ 400/ 450/
500 (default)/ 600/ 700/
800/ 900/ 1000/ 1200/
1400/ 1500/ 1600/ 1800/
2000/ 2200/ 2400/ 2600/
2800/ 3000 Shift Frequency (Hz) Setting Value Step 50 to 1500 (default) to 2500
-800 to 0 (default) to
+800 50 10 6-3 5 KHz2 KHz600 Hz0 HzInterfering SignalTarget SignalInterfering SignalHigh Cut Frequency RangeLow Cut Frequency RangeInterfering SignalInterfering SignalTarget Signal 6 REJECTING INTERFERENCE Preset Passband Characteristics The frequently-used filter settings (high cut, low cut and WIDTH/
SHIFT) can be preset according to the style in which this transceiver is used. Switching the Passband Characteristics 3 types frequency passbands are available for selection for the audio peak filter. Press F2[
width.
]/ F3[
] to select a passband Setting Value Wide (320Hz)/ Medium (160Hz) (default)/ Narrow
(80Hz) Shifting the Passband Width Shifting the passband width of the audio peak filter helps to avoid interference with nearby frequencies. Press F4[ SHIFT] or F5[SHIFT ], or turn the
[MULTI/CH] control to shift the passband width. Setting Value
-200 to 0 (default) to +200 [Hz] (5-step) The shift amount of the passband width is 200 Hz with the pitch frequency as the center frequency. The selected passband width for the audio peak filter shifts from the pitch frequency toward a higher or lower bandwidth. Configuring the Peak Gain To further enhance the target CW signal, raise the gain level. Press F6 [GAIN +] or F7 [GAIN -] to adjust the gain level. Setting Value 0dB (default) to +6dB
. 1 Press [IF FIL] or F2 [FILTER] to select an RX filter. 2 Press F6 [FIL SET]. The current filter settings (high cut, low cut and WIDTH/SHIFT) are stored as the preset values. When preset values are applied, the values will be highlighted in the display for approximately 0.5 seconds. Pressing F7 [FIL CLR] restores the passband width changed using the [HI/SHIFT] and [LO/WIDTH] controls to the preset value. Audio Peak Filter in the CW Mode During reception in the CW mode, if the signal intelligibility deteriorates due to noise or other reasons, allowing the RX signal to pass through the bandwidth with the pitch frequency as the center frequency helps to improve the intelligibility of the RX signal. Turning ON/OFF Audio Peak Filter 1 Select CW mode. 2 Press F [APF]. Pressing F [APF] each time toggles the audio peak filter of the selected band between ON and OFF. When audio peak filter is on, ON is displayed on the key guide. OFF is displayed when the audio peak filter is turned off. Displaying the Audio Peak Filter Screen Press and hold F [APF] to display the audio peak filter screen of the selected band. 6-4 Audio Peak Filter in the FSK Mode When receiving signals in the FSK mode, allowing both the mark and space frequencies to have a peak help to reduce the occurrence of garbled characters, thus improving the decodability. This audio peak filter is compatible with the high tone (mark frequency of 2125 Hz) as well as the low tone (mark frequency of 1275 Hz). 1 Select FSK mode. 2 Press F [APF]. Pressing F [APF] each time toggles the audio peak filter of the selected band between ON and OFF. When audio peak filter is on, ON is displayed on the key guide. OFF is displayed when the audio peak filter is turned off. When the shift width in RTTY exceeds 170 Hz, the audio Internally demodulated signals are not processed for the The passband cannot be shifted for the audio peak filter peak filter for the selected band cannot be set to ON. audio filter in the FSK mode. in the FSK mode. REJECTING INTERFERENCE 6 Noise Blanker The noise blanker is used to reduce pulse noise. This transceiver is equipped with two types of noise blankers: NB 1 that employs analog signal processing and NB2 that performs DSP (digital signal processing) at the IF level. Furthermore, two types of NB2 with different operating principles are available for selection. NB1 and NB2 can be selected for use according to the noise conditions. They can also be employed at the same time. Noise blanker cannot be used in the FM mode. Turning ON/OFF Noise Blanker 1/2 Press [NB1] or [NB2]. Pressing [NB1] or [NB2] each time toggles noise blanker 1 and noise blanker 2 respectively between ON and OFF.
>>
>> or <<
When noise blanker 1 or 2 is ON, <<
When both noise blanker 1 and 2 are ON, <<
>> is is displayed on the screen. displayed on the screen. Adjusting the NB1 Level 1 Press and hold [NB1] to display the Noise Blanker 1 configuration screen. 2 Press F4 [] or F5 [+], or turn the [MULTI/CH] control to change the level. Setting Value 1 to 10 (default) to 20 (1 step) Configuring to a larger value reduces the noise further. Configuring to a value with a higher level of noise blanker effect may cause the transceiver to malfunction and distort the RX audio depending on the condition of the RX signal or interfering signal. 6-5 6 REJECTING INTERFERENCE NB2 NB2 is a function for blanking pulse noise with a long pulse width which cannot be blanked by NB1. NB2 is further divided into Type A and Type B, which can be employed according to the circumstances. NB2 can also be used together with NB1. Type A
. As pulse noise remains after blanking when Type A is used, pulse noise might be audible when the target signal is strong or when there is strong interference within the passband. Even in such a situation, it has the effect of bringing up the target signal when AGC gain is low due to pulse noise. Type A is most effective in cases where weak target signals are buried in strong pulse noise. Type B
. When pulse noise with a long pulse width is blanked using Type B, the time interval for which the target signal is removed becomes longer due to the long blanking time, and this causes the silence period to stand out. 1 Press and hold [NB2] to display the Noise Blanker 2 Press F6 [TYPE]. 2 configuration screen. Pressing F6 [TYPE] each time toggles the screen between Type A and Type B. Type A Screen
. Type B Screen 2 screen which shows the current type in use. Pressing and holding [NB2] displays the noise blanker The default setting is Type A. Type selection is separately available for audio mode
(SSB/AM (including DATA mode)) and non-audio mode
(CW/FSK/PSK). 6-6 Configuring the NB2 Effect Level (Type A)/ NB2 Pulse Sensitivity Level (Type B) 1 While the Type B screen is displayed, press F2 2 Press F4 []/ F5 [+] or turn the [MULTI/CH] control
] to select Level.
[
to change the level.
]/ F3 [
Setting Value 1 to 6 (default) to 10 (1 step) Type A: Configuring to a larger value reduces the noise further. Type B: Configuring to a larger value blanks the RX signal and pulse noise with small difference in signal level. Configuring to a value with a higher level of noise blanker effect may cause the transceiver to malfunction and distort the RX audio depending on the condition of the RX signal or interfering signal. Configuring the Blanking Duration (Type B Only) 1 Press F2 [
2 Press F4 []/ F5 [+] or turn the [MULTI/CH] control
] to select Width.
]/ F3 [
to change the blanking duration. 1 to 10 (default) to 20 (1 step) Setting Value Configuring to a larger value lengthens the blanking time. Configuring the NB2 Attenuation Level (Type B Only) 1 Press F2 [
2 Press F4 []/ F5 [+] or turn the [MULTI/CH] control
] to select Depth.
]/ F3 [
to change the attenuation level. Setting Value 1 to 20 (default) (1 step) Configuring to a larger value increases the attenuation level. Notch Filter Notch filter is capable of suppressing beat interference at the IF level. It can be employed to eliminate beat noise and bring up weak signals or during operation while checking the noise condition. The notch filter can be used in the SSB, CW, FSK, PSK and AM modes. Turning ON/OFF Notch Filter 1 Press [NCH]. Pressing [NCH] each time toggles the notch filter between ON and OFF. When the notch filter is ON, NOTCH is displayed on the screen. When notch filter is ON, an indicator showing the notch point is displayed in the RX filter passband characteristics inside the filter scope. 2 Turn the [NOTCH] control. Adjust the notch frequency to the point where beat or interference is to be suppressed. Type A suppresses mainly the pulse noise without blanking the target signal. The level of the effect (Level) can be adjusted.Type ATarget SignalPulse NoiseTarget SignalPulse NoiseAs with NB1, Type B blanks the pulse noise together with target signal. The pulse sensitivity level (Level), blanking duration (Width) and attenuation level (Depth) can be adjusted.Type B The notch point indicator moves as the notch frequency changes. Once the notch point has been set in the CW mode,
>> (Middle) altering the PITCH and SHIFT values will not change the notch point set for beat suppression. Switching the Notch Filter Bandwidth The bandwidth of the stopband for the notch filter can be configured to normal, middle or wide. The middle and wide stopbands are wider than the bandwidth of the normal stopband by two and three times respectively.
>> (Normal) <<
>> (Wide) Press and hold [NCH]. Pressing and holding [NCH] each time switches the bandwidth and changes the display as follows.
<<
<<
Noise Reduction This transceiver comes with two types of noise reduction functions NR1 and NR2 which are effective for reducing continuous noise. When NR1 is used, the optimal method is activated according to the mode in use. Noise Reduction 1 (NR1) In the SSB, FM and AM modes, noise reduction uses a spectrum subtraction system that places focus on the clarity. In the CW, FSK and PSK modes, noise reduction employs an LMS filter system that emphasizes the periodic signal. The noise reduction effect for NR1 can be adjusted. Noise Reduction 2 (NR2) NR2 employs an SPAC system for all modes which extracts the periodic signal. This system detects periodic signals that are contained in the RX signals, connects the detected periodic signals and plays them as part of the RX audio. For this reason, this method is effective for signals with a single frequency such as CW signals. varying the autocorrelation time for periodic signal detection. recommended for modes other than CW.) NR2 allows configuration to the optimal RX conditions by NR2 is most effective in the CW mode. (Use of NR1 is Beat signals are also suppressed when NR1 is used in the SSB, FM and AM modes as it suppresses stationary signals. This is a theoretical behavior and not a malfunction. clarity may deteriorate, or pulse noise or distortion may occur. This is a theoretical behavior and not a malfunction. When NR2 is set to ON in the SSB mode, the signal NR2 cannot be used in the FM mode. REJECTING INTERFERENCE 6 Turning ON/OFF Noise Reduction 1 Press [NR]. Pressing [NR] each time toggles the option in the following sequence: NR1 NR2 OFF. When NR1 or NR2 is ON, <<
>> is
>> or <<
displayed on the screen. NR1 and NR2 cannot be turned on at the same time. Configuring the NR1 Effect Level 1 Press [NR] to select Noise Reduction 1. 2 Press and hold [NR] to display the Noise Reduction 1 effect level configuration screen. 3 Press F4 []/ F5 [+] or turn the [MULTI/CH] control to change the level of effect. Setting Value 1 to 5 (default) to 10 (1 step) For NR1, configuring to a larger value reduces the noise further. However, as the impact on the RX audio also gets stronger if the effect level is excessively high, adjust it to an appropriate level. Configuring the NR2 Correlation Time 1 Press [NR] to select Noise Reduction 2. 2 Press and hold [NR] to display the NR2 Time Constant configuration screen. 3 Press F4 []/ F5 [+] or turn the [MULTI/CH] control to change the correlation time. 2 to 20 (default) [ms] (2-step) Setting Value As the optimal correlation time varies with the RX signal and noise type when NR2 is used, configure the correlation time while receiving the signals. NR2 adjusts the correlation time for periodic signal extraction. It is different from NR1, which adjusts the effect level. 6-7 6 REJECTING INTERFERENCE Beat Canceler Beat canceler is capable of suppressing multiple periodic interfering signals (beats) within the RX bandwidth through digital processing at the AF level. This function can be used in the SSB, AM and FM modes. Turning ON/OFF Beat Canceler Press [BC]. Pressing [BC] each time switches the beat canceler mode in the following sequence: Beat Canceler 1 Beat Canceler 2 OFF.
>>
When beat canceler 1 or beat canceler 2 is ON, <<
or <<
Beat canceler 1 suppresses weak beats and continuous beats. Beat canceler 2 suppresses intermittent beats such as CW signals.
>> is displayed on the screen. Although the beat canceler suppresses the overall auditory beat, the gain of the target signal cannot be recovered using the AGC function. Thus, if the beat signal is larger than the target signal, using a notch filter activates the AGC function to enhance the clarity of the target signal. DSP Monitor DSP monitor is a function for temporarily expanding the passband width of the IF filter and AF filter via DSP in order to monitor the signal condition of nearby frequencies such as when receiving a specific frequency using a filter with a narrow passband width during contesting. Assigning DSP Monitor to PF Key Register DSP MONITOR in Menu [0-15] PF A: Key Assignment to Menu [0-31] Microphone UP: Key Assignment Expanding the Passband Width Using DSP Monitor Press and hold down the PF key that is assigned with the DSP monitor function. The passband width of the filter is expanded while the key is held down. During DSP monitoring, the audio peak filter is forcibly turned OFF. 6-8 BC 1BC 2
1 2 | Users Manual 3 | Users Manual | 1.72 MiB |
7 SCOPE FUNCTIONS Bandscope With the signal strength represented on the vertical axis and frequency on the horizontal axis, the bandscope provides a visual representation of the condition of the RX frequency band. The bandscope comes in the following 3 modes. Center mode: A mode where the center of the horizontal axis represents the RX frequency. Fixed mode: A mode where the lower and upper frequency limits of the frequency band to be displayed are fixed. Auto scroll mode: A mode where the scope range scrolls automatically while maintaining the span when the lower or upper limit of the marker scope range is exceeded. By displaying a waterfall below the bandscope display, the RX frequency, surrounding conditions as well as transition in the signal strength can be viewed. The vertical axis of the waterfall display represents time while the horizontal axis represents frequency. Signal strength is represented in a spectrum in the order of white
(strong), red to yellow (medium) and green to blue (weak). The color changes according to the strength of the signal to be observed. The speed of the waterfall drop can be adjusted. When the waterfall is displayed, the height of the bandscope display is reduced to one-third of the original size. The filter passband is constantly represented by a translucent display in the bandscope. OVF is displayed when excessive signal is received. In this case, configure an attenuator for the bandscope. Displaying the Bandscope Press [SCP] to display the scope screen. Pressing and holding [SCP] each time toggles the display between Bandscope and Audio Scope. Bandscope SCOPE FUNCTIONS 7 Switching the Bandscope Display Type 1 Display the bandscope. 2 Press [SCP]. While a bandscope is displayed, pressing [ESC] ends the Pressing [SCP] each time switches the selection in the following sequence.
(Standard size) Bandscope + Waterfall
(Enlarged size) Bandscope + Waterfall
(Standard size) Bandscope No scope display (ends scope display) bandscope display. Adjusting the Reference Level If there is difficulty distinguishing the target signal from the noise when there is significant noise or when observing weak signals when there is little noise, the reference level of the bandscope can be adjusted to ease identification of the target signal. 1 Press F5 [REF.LEV] to display the setting value of the reference level at the center of the bandscope screen. 2 Turn the [MULTI/CH] control to adjust the reference level while observing the bandscope waveform and waterfall spectrum on the bandscope screen. If F5 [REF.LEV] is not displayed, press F1 [MORE]. Setting Value
-20 to 0 (default) to +10 dB (0.5 dB step) 3 Press F5 [REF.LEV] to end adjustment of the reference level. If the target signal cannot be identified on the bandscope screen even after adjusting the reference level due to the excessively high input signals, switch to a different attenuator for the bandscope. Audio Scope
. Configuring the Speed of Waterfall Drop The speed at which the waterfall is flowing can be selected from the options available. Press F4 [SPEED]. Pressing F4 [SPEED] each time switches the flow speed. Setting Value Speed1/ Speed2/ Speed3/ Speed4 (default) After altering the speed, Speed n is displayed in the Pressing and holding F4 [SPEED] switches the options in waterfall area for about 1 second. the reverse sequence. 7-1 7 SCOPE FUNCTIONS Waterfall Display during Tuning (Center Mode) This is a function for switching the behavior of the waterfall display when the frequency is changed. Configure in Menu [8-03] Waterfall when Tuning
(Center Mode) Setting Value Straight (default)/ Follow Auto Scroll Mode Straight: Uses a straight line to show transition in the level of the target signal displayed on the waterfall when the frequency is altered. Follow: Tracks and displays the latest FFT level at the portion where the waterfall starts flowing when the frequency is altered. Fixed Mode Reduced Bandscope Display A small bandscope (with a waterfall display) can be displayed on screens such as those for the different settings, RTTY communication and PSK communication. 1 Display the menu, configuration modes except equalizer configuration and the RTTY/PSK communication screen. A small bandscope is displayed. 2 Press [SCP]. Switching the Display Frequency Span When the bandscope is displayed in the Center mode or Auto Scroll mode, the display frequency span (the width between the lower and upper frequency limits in the bandscope screen) can be adjusted. Press F3 [SPAN]. Pressing F3[SPAN] each time switches the frequency span. 2.5kHz/ 5kHz/ 10kHz/ 15kHz/ 25kHz (default)/
50kHz/ 100kHz/ 250kHz Setting Value Pressing and holding F3[SPAN] each time switches the options in the reverse sequence. The selected display frequency span is displayed in the toolbar of the bandscope screen as SPAN 50kHz, for example. Selecting Relative or Absolute Frequency Display for the Grid (Center Mode) During carrier point center display in the Center mode, the mode of frequency scale display at the bottom of the bandscope can be switched to one of the options available. Configure in Menu [8-06] Frequency Scale (Center Mode) Setting Value Relative Frequency (default)/ Absolute Frequency Relative Frequency: The frequency scale display at the bottom of the scope area represents the relative frequency from the center of the scope. Absolute Frequency: The frequency scale display at the bottom of the scope area represents the absolute frequency. Marker Shift This function shifts the scope range in the auto scroll mode operation so that the marker is displayed at a position that makes observation easier. Shifting the marker to the left edge in the upper frequency transmitted by the DX station as well as in digital communication will widen the display area of the bandscope. Making it easier to determine the TX frequency and to observe in the various digital modes. Shifting the Marker Press F2 [SHIFT]. The marker shifts to the preset shift position. While the reduced bandscope is displayed, the horizontally arrayed F keys are switched to the function keys of the configuration screen and thus the bandscope settings cannot be changed. Switching the Scope Display Mode 1 Display the bandscope screen. 2 Press F2 [S.MODE]. Pressing F2 [S.MODE] each time switches the selection to Center Mode, Auto Scroll Mode and Fixed Mode in sequence. If [S.MODE] is not displayed, press F1 [MORE]. Center Mode (CENTER MODE) Displays a bandscope with the display frequency as the center at all times. Auto Scroll Mode (A.SCROLL MODE) The basic behavior is the same as that of the Fixed mode, except that the scope range scrolls automatically while maintaining the span when the marker (tuning frequency) exceeds the lower or upper limit of the scope range. Fixed Mode (FIXED MODE) The scope range is fixed for each of the amateur bands, and the operating frequency is displayed with a marker. Center Mode
. 7-2 Changing the Shift Position of Marker Shift 1 Press and hold F2 [SHIFT]. The transceiver enters the shift position configuration mode. The value indicating the position of the selected vertical grid line is displayed. 2 Move the shift position to the desired position using the [MULTI/CH] control. Pressing and holding F [SHIFT] moves the shift position to the center. 3 Press F [SHIFT]. The transceiver exits the shift position configuration mode. Depending on the relationship between the RX frequency and the span, deviation of 1 grid to the left or right may occurred in the shift operation. Expand This function expands the frequency range for spectral analysis while in the center mode (when the waterfall display during tuning is configured to Straight) or auto scroll mode to prevent the waterfall display from being interrupted when the frequency is changed. Press F2 [EXPAND]. Pressing F2 [EXPAND] each time toggles the expand function between ON and OFF. When the expand function is ON, Expand is displayed below the lower frequency limit display. Scope Range of Each Band (Fixed Mode) The steps to configure the scope range for each of the amateur bands when the bandscope is displayed in the Fixed mode are described below. Three types of scope range are available for selection for each band. Switching the Scope Range Press F3 [RANGE]. Pressing F3 [RANGE] each time switches the scope range. Setting Value Range No.1 (default)/ Range No.2/ Range No.3 Configuring the Scope Range 1 Press and hold F3 [RANGE] to display the screen for configuring the scope range in the Fixed mode. 2 Press F3 [RANGE] to select the scope range Range No.1, Range No.2 and Range No.3. SCOPE FUNCTIONS 7 3 Press F4 [LOWER] or F5 [UPPER] to select the frequency to adjust. 4 Press F6 []/ F7 [+] or turn the [MULTI/CH] control to select the frequency. Details of the configurable frequency range are shown in the table below. Band LF Band MF Band1 MF Band2 1.8 MHz Band 3.5 MHz Band 5 MHz Band 7 MHz Band 10 MHz Band 14 MHz Band 18 MHz Band 21 MHz Band 24 MHz Band 28 MHz Band 50 MHz Band Configurable Frequency Range
[MHz]
0.03 f 0.300 0.300 f 0.522 0.522 f 1.705 1.705 f 2.00 2.00 f 4.00 4.00 f 6.00 6.00 f 8.00 8.00 f 11.00 11.00 f 15.00 15.00 f 20.00 20.00 f 22.00 22.00 f 26.00 26.00 f 30.00 30.00 f 60.00 70 MHz Band
(E Type) 30.00 f 74.80 Range No. 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 Lower Limit Default
[MHz]
0.130 0.130 0.130 0.470 0.470 0.470 0.750 0.750 0.750 1.800 1.800 1.840 3.500 3.500 3.600 5.000 5.000 5.000 7.000 7.000 7.045 10.100 10.100 10.130 14.000 14.000 14.100 18.068 18.068 18.110 21.000 21.000 21.150 24.890 24.890 24.930 28.000 28.000 28.200 50.000 50.000 50.100 70.000 70.000 70.250 Upper Limit Default
[MHz]
0.140 0.140 0.140 0.480 0.480 0.480 1.250 1.250 1.250 2.000 1.864 2.000 4.000 3.600 4.000 5.500 5.500 5.500 7.200 7.045 7.200 10.150 10.130 10.150 14.350 14.100 14.350 18.168 18.110 18.168 21.450 21.150 21.450 24.990 24.930 24.990 28.500 28.200 28.700 50.500 50.100 50.300 70.500 70.250 70.500 7-3 7 SCOPE FUNCTIONS Marker Centering The scope range can be shifted with the display frequency span maintained such that the marker of the selected amateur band is displayed near the center (within one grid to the left or right from the center). Press F4 [MKR.CTR]. The scope range is shifted with the frequency span maintained. Changes in the lower and upper frequency limits due to the marker centering operation are temporary, and does not alter the preconfigured lower and upper frequency limits of the scope band in question. This function works in the Center mode only when Menu
[8-03] Waterfall when Tuning (Center Mode) is configured to Straight. The tuning assist line is displayed on the upper side with respect to the carrier point in the case of USB and on the lower side in the case of LSB. Touchscreen Tuning This function enables signals to be received by touching the desired point in the bandscope display area or waterfall display area. When in the Center mode, touching a point sets the corresponding frequency as the center frequency. When in the Fixed mode, touching a point moves the marker to the corresponding frequency. Turning ON/OFF Touchscreen Tuning Configure in Menu [0-14] Touchscreen Tuning Setting Value Off/ On (default) The following operations are prohibited even when touchscreen tuning is ON. When the frequency lock function is ON When the memory channels are empty or when temporary change of memory channels is disabled When an area outside the frequency range of the memory channel for specific band segments is touched During transmission When the TX frequency is received by TF-SET while only XIT is ON during simplex operation Configuring the Gradation of the Waterfall 10 levels of gradation are available for configuring the waterfall display. To make it easy to find the weak signals, configure to a smaller value to increase the sensitivity to color change. Configure in Menu [8-04] Waterfall Gradation Level Setting Value 1 to 7 (default) to 10 (1 step) Notification on Exceeding of Lower or Upper Limit If the marker frequency falls outside the display range of the bandscope when a frequency marker is displayed on the bandscope in the Fixed mode, a display appears to inform the user that the marker has moved out of the bandscope range. A icon appears at the left edge of the bandscope screen if the marker frequency value is smaller than the lower frequency limit, and a appears at the right edge if the marker frequency value is larger than the upper frequency limit. The markers indicating that the lower or upper limit is exceeded are color coded as follows. White: RX frequency Red: TX frequency
. Displaying Tuning Assist Line (SSB Only) This is a function for displaying a tuning assist line (yellow) in the waterfall display area during operation in the SSB mode. When the tuning assist line is displayed, the peak of the waveform is set near this line. For example, the frequency spectrum of a male voice is said to be strongest near 500 Hz. In this case, displaying the tuning assist line near a position shifted by 500 Hz from the carrier point of the waterfall display area and allowing the part where strong signals are flowing to overlap with the line helps to increase the probability of zeroing in the target signal. Configure in Menu [8-05] Tuning Assist Line (SSB Mode) Setting Value Off (default)/ 300/ 400/ 500/ 600/ 700/ 800/ 1000/ 1500/
2210 [Hz]
. 7-4 Touchscreen Tuning Correction Touch and hold with a finger on the corresponding point in the bandscope or waterfall display screen where signal is to be received. Touching in the SSB/ CW/ FSK/ PSK mode changes the correction behavior according to the Touchscreen Tuning Step Correction setting in the menu. The CW auto tune function is activated after correction is completed in the CW mode. Step Correction Configure the step correction operation during touchscreen tuning in the SSB/ CW/ FSK/ PSK mode. Configure in Menu [8-07] Touchscreen Tuning Step Correction(SSB/ CW/ FSK/ PSK) Setting Value Off/On (default) Marker Display The positions of the TX and RX frequencies are indicated as markers on the bandscope screen. This marker function allows the checking of edge frequency on the bandscope by registering the edge frequency of the contest or band plan. During split operation, the TX frequency can be changed easily by moving the TX frequency marker to the desired frequency while monitoring the bandscope screen. The frequency markers are color coded as follows. White: RX Frequency Red: TX Frequency Registering a Marker When a preferred frequency (up to 50 entries) is registered to the frequency marker list, the registered frequency is indicated by a marker on the bandscope (white dotted line). 1 Press [MENU]. 2 Press and hold F [F.MKR] to display the Frequency Marker list screen. SCOPE FUNCTIONS 7 3 Align with the frequency to register. 4 Press F4 [ADD] to register. The current VFO frequency is added to the list. When RIT is ON, the display frequency with RIT added is registered. The list is automatically sorted in ascending order starting from the lowest frequency. If the frequency to be added is already registered, it will not be registered twice and there will be no response even when F4 [ADD] is pressed. If there are already 50 frequency entries in the list, the frequency will not be registered and pressing F4 [ADD] will have no response.
] or turn the [MULTI/CH]
]/ F3 [
Deleting a Registered Frequency 1 Press F2 [
control to select the frequency to delete. 2 Press and hold F5 [(DELETE)] to delete. Turning ON/OFF Marker Function 1 Press [MENU]. 2 Press F [F.MKR]. Pressing F [F.MKR] each time toggles the marker function between ON and OFF. Displaying the Maximum Value in the Waveform The maximum value of the waveform shown on the bandscope screen can be displayed to get a better grasp of the signal status. Turning ON/OFF Maximum Value Display Press F7 [MAX.HLD]. Pressing F7 [MAX.HLD] each time toggles the maximum value display between ON and OFF. Configuring the Hold Type Select the method of displaying the maximum value of the waveform. Configure in Menu [8-02] Bandscope Maximum Hold Setting Value 10 [s] (default)/ Continuous 10 [s]: Maximum value information is cleared after 10 seconds. Continuous: Maximum value information is not cleared. The maximum value information is cleared automatically if the RX frequency changes in the Center mode regardless of the setting value selected. 7-5 Audio Scope Two audio scope screen modes are available for selection: the audio scope screen mode displays the waveform with an audio bandscope + waterfall as well as an oscilloscope, while the multi scope screen shows a reduced display of the bandscope at the top together with the audio scope screen. OVF is displayed when excessive signal is received. In this case, configure an attenuator for the audio scope. Displaying the Audio Scope Press and hold [SCP] to display the Audio Scope screen. Pressing and holding [SCP] each time toggles the display between Audio Scope and Bandscope. Audio Scope Screen Left: Audio scope Right: Oscilloscope
. Switching the Audio Scope Display Type 1 Display the Audio Scope screen. 2 Press [SCP]. Pressing [SCP] each time switches the selection in the following sequence. Audio Scope screen Multi Scope screen No scope display (ends scope display) Multi Scope Screen Top: Reduced bandscope display Left: Audio scope Right: Oscilloscope
.3 Press [ESC] to end the display. 7 SCOPE FUNCTIONS Pausing the Waveform Display The waveform display on the bandscope screen can be paused. Press F7 [PAUSE] to pause the waveform display. When the waveform display is paused, <<
>> is displayed on the screen. Pressing F7 [PAUSE] again cancels the paused state. Averaging of Bandscope Waveform Averaging the bandscope waveform allows changes in the waveform display to look smoother with continuous signals like those of Morse signals which make observation easier. Press F6 [AVE.] to switch the averaging level. Pressing F6 [AVE.] each time switches the selection in the following sequence: Off (averaging disabled) 1
(minimum) 2 3 (maximum) Off. The averaging level selected is displayed at the top right corner of the grid. Pressing and holding F6 [AVE.] each time switches the options in the reverse sequence. The default setting is 1. Switching the Bandscope Attenuator If the target signal cannot be identified on the bandscope screen even after adjusting the reference level due to the excessively high input signals, attenuate the input level to the bandscope by switching to a different attenuator for the bandscope. Press F6 [ATT] to switch to a different attenuator. Pressing F6 [ATT] each time switches the attenuator. Setting Value Off (default)/ 10 dB/ 20 dB/ 30 dB Pressing and holding F6 [ATT] each time switches the The current attenuator level setting is displayed at the top of options in the reverse sequence. the bandscope. Switching the attenuator for the bandscope does not affect the RX sensitivity. Displaying the TX Signal Waveform A waveform for the TX signal can be displayed when a bandscope for transmission is displayed in the Center mode. Configure in Menu [8-00] Bandscope Display during TX Setting Value Off (default)/ On On: Displays the TX waveform in the bandscope while transmission is in progress. Off: Does not display the waveform in the bandscope while transmission is in progress. The TX signal waveform cannot be displayed in the The setting for this function cannot be switched while Fixed mode. transmission is in progress. 7-6 Switching the Audio Scope Attenuator When the signal input level to the audio scope is excessively high, attenuating the level helps to reduce the amplitude of the waveform. Doing so optimizes the waveform display for easy observation. Press F2 [ATT]. Pressing F2 [ATT] each time switches the attenuator. Setting Value Off (default)/ 10 dB/ 20 dB/ 30 dB Pressing and holding F2 [ATT] each time switches the The current attenuator level setting is displayed at the top of options in the reverse sequence. the audio scope. SCOPE FUNCTIONS 7 Pausing the Audio Scope When the waveform displayed on the Audio Scope screen is paused, the waveform is maintained until it is unpaused. The audio scope can be paused to enable analysis of the waveform without being interrupted whenever the display is refreshed. Press F4 [PAUSE] to pause the waveform display. When the waveform display is paused, <<
>> is Pressing F4 [PAUSE] again cancels the paused state. displayed on the screen. Switching the Display Frequency Span of the Audio Scope The display frequency span of the audio scope can be configured to 3 kHz or 8 kHz. Configure the display frequency span to an appropriate setting according to the filter band setting and frequency to observe. Press F3 [SPAN]. Pressing F3 [SPAN] each time toggles the span between 3 kHz (default) and 8 kHz. Switching the Oscilloscope Level Switching the input level of signals to the oscilloscope alters the vertical amplitude of the waveform. Configuring the waveform amplitude to an appropriate size helps to ease observation of the waveform. Press F6 [LEVEL]. Pressing F6 [LEVEL] each time switches the input level. Setting Value 0 dB (default)/ -10 dB/ -20 dB/ -30 dB Pressing and holding F6 [LEVEL] each time switches the The current signal input level setting is displayed at the top options in the reverse sequence. of the oscilloscope. Switching the Sweep Time Switching the sweep time of the oscilloscope alters the time range of the oscilloscope display. The sweep time can be adjusted according to the status of the signal to be observed. Press F5 [TIME]. Pressing F5 [TIME] each time switches the sweep time. Setting Value 1 ms/ Div/ 3 ms/ Div/ 10 ms/ Div/ 30 ms/ Div/ 100 ms/
Div (default)/ 300 ms/ Div Pressing and holding F5 [TIME] each time switches the The sweep time is displayed at the bottom of the options in the reverse sequence. oscilloscope. 7-7 Display when 8 kHz is selectedDisplay when 3 kHz is selected. 7-8 8 TRANSMIT FUNCTIONS Configuration of the Input Path of TX Audio The method for transmitting the audio source that is input to the MIC connector on the front panel as well as the ACC 2, (USB-B) and LAN connectors on the rear panel of this transceiver can be configured. Audio Source Input MIC Inputs the microphone audio when MIC is set to ON. Inputs audio signal from the device connected to the ACC ACC 2 2 connector when ACC 2 is set to ON. USB Audio Inputs audio signal from the connected PC when USB Audio is set to ON. Inputs audio signal from the audio device connected via LAN when LAN is set to ON. Description LAN Switching the Audio Source Input The steps to configure the audio (audio source input) to transmit via PTT/SS/SEND and DATA PTT/DATA SEND are as follows. A separate setting can be configured when DATA mode is in 1 Press and hold [DATA] to display the audio source the OFF and ON status. input screen. The current ON/OFF status of the DATA mode at the transmitting end is displayed at the top left corner.
], F3 [
], F4 [
] or F5 [
.2 Press F2 [
] to select the method of transmission (SEND/PTT or DATA SEND (PF)) and audio input line (Front or Rear). 3 Press F6 [SELECT] or turn the [MULTI/CH] control to change the setting value. Pressing and holding F1 [(RESET)] restores both audio input settings of the selected method of transmission to the default values. The default setting varies as follows when DATA mode is in the ON and OFF status. Setting Item DATA OFF DATA ON SEND/ PTT DATA SEND
(PF) SEND/ PTT DATA SEND
(PF) Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear Setting Value Default MIC Off/ MIC Off/ ACC 2/
USB Audio/
Off LAN Off Off/ MIC Off/ ACC 2/
USB Audio/
ACC 2 LAN MIC Off/ MIC Off/ ACC 2/
Off USB Audio/
LAN Off/ MIC Off Off/ ACC 2/
USB USB Audio/
Audio LAN Note that some setting combinations might trigger unintended transmission by this transceiver. Also, when this transceiver is connected to a PC or another audio source via USB audio, LAN or ACC 2 and when DATA VOX is ON, sound that is emitted by the audio source might trigger transmission by this transceiver. TRANSMIT FUNCTIONS 8 These are common settings for the SSB, AM and FM modes. Although settings can also be changed during operation while the operation mode at the transmitting end is configured to CW, PSK or FSK, the settings that are displayed on the screen are those when DATA mode is in the OFF status. VOX (Voice-Operated Transmit) VOX (voice) is a function that automatically starts transmission when the user speaks into the microphone and returns to the receiving status when voice input stops. After speaking into the microphone, insert a short pause before returning to the receiving status. For Data VOX, data that is input from an audio source other than the MIC connector can also be transmitted in the same way. Turing ON/OFF VOX Function The VOX function switches automatically between transmission and reception based on audio input from the microphone in the SSB, FM or AM mode. Press [VOX]. Pressing [VOX] each time toggles the VOX function between ON and OFF. When the VOX function is ON, the [VOX] LED lights up in green. During transmission using the VOX function, audio input from the microphone is transmitted regardless of the audio source input settings. If transmission and reception are not performed automatically when the VOX function is set to ON, try adjusting the VOX gain level, increasing the distance between the microphone and the speaker, move closer to the microphone when speaking or turn down the volume level for incoming calls. If the above methods do not work, use a headphone. Selecting Audio Source Input for Data VOX The transmission status can be activated automatically when data audio beyond a certain level is input from the ANI terminal of the
(USB-A or USB-B) or LAN connector on ACC 2 connector, the rear panel of this transceiver in the SSB, FM or AM mode. This function is known as Data VOX. The audio source input that is activated with the Data VOX function can be switched using the steps below. 1 Press and hold [DATA] to display the audio source 2 Press F7 [D.VOX]. input screen. Pressing F7 [D.VOX] each time switches the Data VOX audio source. Off (default)/ ACC 2/ USB Audio/ LAN Setting Value OFF, ACC 2, USB or LAN is displayed to the right of D.VOX at the top of the screen. If this transceiver is left connected to an audio source such as a PC when Data VOX is configured to an audio source input setting other than OFF, this transceiver may be placed in the transmission state by the signals from the audio source. When this transceiver is to be left connected to the audio source, set the Data VOX audio source input to OFF to prevent transmission that is unintended. 8-1 8 TRANSMIT FUNCTIONS Configuration Example Transmission via PTT by modulating signals from MIC in the SSB mode or transmission via DATA VOX by modulating signals from a PC via USB Audio in the SSB-DATA mode. Settings when DATA mode is OFF:
SEND/PTT Front: MIC, Rear: Off DATA SEND (PF) Front: Off, Rear: USB Audio DATA VOX: Off Settings when DATA mode is ON:
SEND/PTT Front: MIC, Rear: Off DATA SEND (PF) Front: Off, Rear: USB Audio DATA VOX: USB Audio VOX Configuration Screen 1 Press [VOX] to set the VOX function to ON. 2 Press and hold [VOX] to display the VOX configuration screen. On the VOX configuration screen, the horizontal rows represent the audio source input while the vertical columns represent the setting item. The VOX configuration screen ends when the transmitting end is configured to a mode (non-audio mode) other than SSB, AM and FM mode. Adjusting VOX Gain VOX gain of the VOX function allows the VOX gain level to be adjusted according to the loudness of the audio input from the MIC connector or the noise in the surroundings. VOX gain of the input data from the ANI terminal of the ACC 2
(USB-A or USB-B) or LAN connector on the rear connector, panel of this transceiver can be adjusted in the Data VOX mode. 1 Press F2 [
] to select the audio source input (horizontal row). Select the audio source input row to adjust from MIC, ACC 2, USB and LAN.
] to select the VOX GAIN. 2 Press F4 [
3 Press F6 []/ F7 [+] or turn the [MULTI/CH] control to adjust the VOX level. Input signal from the audio source selected in step 2, and adjust the level to activate transmission when audio signals are input.
]/ F5 [
]/ F3 [
Setting Value 0 to 10 (default) to 20 (1 step) Adjusting the Anti VOX Gain Level When the VOX function is ON, transmission may be activated by the playback sound from the speaker in some cases in addition to audio from the microphone. Speaker sound may be transmitted if the speaker volume is configured to a high level. This function can be used to prevent unintended transmission by configuring the anti VOX level to adjust the lower limit for activating the VOX function with respect to the playback sound from the speaker. 1 Press F2 [
] to select the audio source
] to select ANTI VOX. 2 Press F4 [
3 Press F6 []/ F7 [+] or turn the [MULTI/CH] control to adjust the sensitivity of the anti VOX gain. Adjust the sensitivity of the anti VOX level so that transmission will not be activated by the playback sound from the speaker.
]/ F3 [
]/ F5 [
input. 8-2 Setting Value 0 to 20 (1 step) The smaller the anti VOX gain value, the more susceptible The default settings are as follows. the transceiver is to playback sound from the speaker. Microphone: 10 ACC 2: 0 USB: 0 LAN: 0 When a headphone is connected to the PHONES connector, the VOX function (transmission) will not be activated by the speaker audio regardless of the audio source and anti VOX level settings. Anti VOX gain applies to audio sources other than Data VOX. The speaker output level is compared with the ANTI VOX level for any input line. Adjusting VOX Delay Time During transmission of audio or data using the VOX function, the transceiver may sometimes be restored to the receiving state, and the end of the audio that is clipped off may not be transmitted as a result. To prevent this from occurring, the delay time can be adjusted to insert an appropriate pause before switching from the transmitting to the receiving state. 1 Press F2 [
] to select the audio source input (horizontal row). Select the audio source input row to adjust from MIC, ACC 2, USB and LAN. 2 Press F4 [
DELAY. 3 Press F6 []/ F7 [+] or turn the [MULTI/CH] control to select the delay time. Input signal from the audio source selected in step 2, and adjust the delay time before returning to the receiving state after audio input has ended.
] to select the VOX
]/ F5 [
]/ F3 [
Setting Value 0 to 10 (default) to 20 (1 step) When MIC is selected, adjust the delay time while The delay time for MIC can also be adjusted by turning the speaking into the microphone.
[DELAY] control. VOX Voice Delay When the VOX function is ON, there may be a time lag before transmission begins after voice input has started. For this reason, the beginning part of the audio may be clipped off. To prevent this phenomenon from occurring wherever possible, a VOX voice delay time can be configured between the timing when transmission is activated and before audio signals are sent out. When using a microphone as the audio source input for transmission:
Configure in Menu [6-13] VOX Voice Delay
(Microphone) When using devices other than a microphone as the audio source input for transmission:
Configure in Menu [6-14] VOX Voice Delay (Except Microphone) Setting Value Off/ Short/ Middle (default)/ Long TX Monitor TX audio can be monitored while transmission is in progress. This is a convenient tool for checking the effect of the speech processor or TX equalizer. In the FSK and PSK modes, FSK and PSK signals transmitted by this transceiver can be monitored. Press [MONI] to turn the TX monitor ON or OFF The [MONI] LED lights up in green when the TX monitor is turned on. The ON/OFF status of the TX monitor and monitor level are stored in the memory for each of the mode groups below. During split operation, the mode at the transmitting end will be monitored. SSB/ FM/ AM SSB-DATA/ FM-DATA/ AM-DATA FSK/ PSK Each time there is a change in the mode, the transceiver switches back to the TX monitor ON/OFF status stored in each group. TX monitor is always OFF in the CW mode. Adjusting the TX Monitor Level The volume level when monitoring the TX audio can be adjusted. 1 Press and hold [MONI] to display the TX Monitor Level configuration screen. 2 Press F4 []/ F5 [+] or turn the [MULTI/CH] control to select the TX monitor level. Setting 0 to 10 (default) to 20 (1 step) Value Feedback may occur when a speaker is used in the SSB, AM or FM mode. Make use of a headphone instead. Transmission of CW messages cannot be monitored using the TX monitor. To monitor CW messages, make use of CW sidetone. In the FM, FSK and PSK modes, the audio of the TX monitor may differ from the audio of the signal that is actually transmitted. TRANSMIT FUNCTIONS 8 Speech Processor In the SSB mode, TX output power varies according to the loudness of the audio from the transmitting transceiver, which may sometimes cause audibility to deteriorate at the receiving transceiver. A speech processor can be used in this case to compress signals via digital signal processing to raise the average power. Similarly, using the speed processor in the AM or FM mode stabilizes the degree of modulation regardless of the loudness of the audio from the transmitting transceiver and helps to enhance intelligibility. Turning ON/OFF Speech Processor 1 Press the mode key to select either SSB, AM or FM 2 Press F [PROC]. mode. Pressing F [PROC] each time toggles the speech processor between ON and OFF. When the speech processor is set to ON, PROC OUT:nnn is displayed at the top of the screen. [nnn: 0 to 100]
The speech processor also functions with respect to audio input from the ANI terminal of the ACC 2 connector or the
(USB-B) connector on the rear panel of this transceiver. Speech Processor Configuration Screen Press and hold F [PROC] to display the Speech Processor configuration screen SSB/SSB-DATA/AM/AM-DATA Mode
. FM/FM-DATA Mode
. Switching the mode at the transmitting end to a non-
audio mode while the Speech Processor configuration screen is displayed ends the Speech Processor configuration screen. 8-3 TimeSpeech Processor OFFAmplitude LevelTimeSpeech Processor ONAmplitude Level 8 TRANSMIT FUNCTIONS Configuring the Speech Processor Input Level 1 Press F2 [
] to select Input. 2 Press F4 []/ F5 [+] or turn the [MULTI/CH] control
]/ F3 [
to adjust the input level. 0 to 50 (default) to 100 (1 step) Setting Value The speech processor input level is used to adjust the input level of the mixed audio between the audio source input configured for microphone gain and that configured on the audio source input screen.
]/ F3 [
Configuring the Speech Processor Output Level 1 Press F2 [
] to select Output. Output is not displayed when the transmitting transceiver is in the FM mode. 2 Press F4 []/ F5 [+] or turn the [MULTI/CH] control to adjust the output level. The output level can also be adjusted by turning the [MIC/
0 to 50 (default) to 100 (1 step) PITCH)] control. Setting Value Configuring the output to a level that is too high causes distortion to occur in the TX signals and deterioration in the radio wave quality as a result. The speech processor output level is applied to both the audio input from the microphone as well as the audio source configured on the audio source input screen. The speech processor output level is fixed and not changeable in the FM mode. Configuring the Speech Processor Effect It is possible to configure how TX signals are to be processed by the speech processor. Press F6 [EFECT]. Pressing F6 [EFECT] each time switches the effect type. Setting Value Soft (default)/ Hard Hard: Places priority on raising the average power although signals may remain distorted. Soft: Places priority on reducing the level of distortion with minimal effect on raising the average power. The speech processor effect selected is the same in each mode. TX Filter Configure the bandwidth of the SSB/AM or SSB-DATA/AM-DATA TX filter to a low cutoff frequency or a high cutoff frequency. The filter display area switches automatically according to transmission in the SSB, SSB-DATA, AM and AM-DATA modes. A trapezoidal waveform of the low cutoff/high cutoff frequency configured with this function is displayed with the settings at the top (LC: low cutoff frequency; BW: occupied bandwidth; HC:
high cutoff frequency). Displaying the Filter Scope during Transmission During transmission, an image of the passband width for the TX filter and the audio FFT of the TX audio can be displayed on the filter scope. Configure in Menu [8-01] TX Audio Waveform Display Setting Value Off/ On (default) On: Displays the TX filter bandwidth as well as TX monitor waveform on the filter scope during transmission in the SSB, FM and AM modes. Off: The filter scope area maintains the last display during transmission and the waveform is not displayed. During transmission in the CW, PSK and FSK modes, the image of the filter passband characteristics during reception is maintained. In modes other than those above, an image of the filter passband characteristics is displayed based on the HI/LO cut setting of the TX filter. In the FM (including DATA) mode, an image of the passband characteristics for the fixed filter is displayed. When the Audio Scope screen is displayed, waveform is not displayed in the filter scope. The setting for this function cannot be switched while transmission is in progress. When HI/SHIFT or LO/WIDTH is operated during transmission while the TX audio waveform display is ON, the setting value of the RX filter changes and the RX filter display appears temporarily. 8-4 Changing the TX Filter Bandwidth Please make use of the TX filter while ensuring that the occupied bandwidth in the SSB mode falls within the permitted range as stipulated by the relevant laws. Configuring the Low Cutoff Frequency in the SSB/AM Mode Configure in Menu [6-06] TX Filter Low Cut
(SSB/AM) Setting Value 10/ 100 (default)/ 200/ 300/ 400/ 500 [Hz]
Configuring the High Cutoff Frequency in the SSB/AM Mode Configure in Menu [6-07] TX Filter High Cut
(SSB/AM) Setting Value 2500/ 2600/ 2700/ 2800/ 2900 (default)/ 3000/ 3500/
4000 [Hz]
Configuring the Low Cutoff Frequency in the SSB-
DATA/AM-DATA Mode Configure in Menu [6-08] TX Filter Low Cut (SSB-
DATA/AM-DATA) Setting Value 10/ 100 (default)/ 200/ 300/ 400/ 500 [Hz]
Configuring the High Cutoff Frequency in the SSB-
DATA/AM-DATA Mode Configure in Menu [6-09] TX Filter High Cut (SSB-
DATA/AM-DATA) Setting Value 2500/ 2600/ 2700/ 2800/ 2900 (default)/ 3000/ 3500/
4000 [Hz]
TRANSMIT FUNCTIONS 8 TX Equalizer This item can be used to alter the frequency characteristics of the TX audio via DSP sound processing. It enables correction of the microphone frequency characteristics as well as transmission in the audio quality according to the audio properties or users preferences. Turning ON/OFF TX Equalizer 1 Press the mode key to select either SSB, AM or FM 2 Press F [TX EQ]. mode. Pressing F [TX EQ] each time toggles the TX equalizer between ON and OFF. The TX equalizer turns OFF automatically when this transceiver is configured to a mode other than SSB, AM or FM. Selecting a Frequency Characteristic for the TX Equalizer This transceiver comes with 6 types of frequency characteristics for the TX equalizer. In addition, there are 3 other types that can be customized according to the users preferences. A selection can be made from these options. 1 Press and hold F [TX EQ] to display the TX Equalizer screen. 2 Press F2 [
] or turn the [MULTI/
CH] control to select a characteristic. Make a selection based on the equalizer effects in the table
]/ F3 [
below. Effects Purpose Formant Pass (FP) High Boost 2 (HB2) High Boost 1 (HB1) Boosts the high frequency component. This is effective for audio sound that contains a low frequency component. Boosts the high frequency component. The low frequency attenuation level for this option is half of that of the HB1 option. This option attenuates frequency components that is outside the audio bandwidth so that the audio can be heard more clearly. Boosts the low frequency component. This is Bass Boost 1 (BB1) effective for audio sound that contains a high frequency component. Bass Boost 2 (BB2) Boosts the low frequency component. The low frequency is further boosted compared to BB1. Applies a 3 dB boost to the frequency range of 600 Hz or higher. This is suited for communication that attenuates gradually as it approaches the low frequency range. Frequency characteristics can be adjusted according to the user preferences and stored in the options between User 1 and User 3. The flat frequency characteristic is selected in the default setting. User 1 (U1) User 2 (U2) User 3 (U3) Conventional (C) 8-5 8 TRANSMIT FUNCTIONS
. Adjusting the TX Equalizer The frequency characteristics of the TX equalizer can be adjusted to produce the desired sound quality. 1 Press and hold F [TX EQ] to display the TX Equalizer
] or turn the [MULTI/CH]
2 Press F2 [
3 Press F3 [ADJ] to display the TX Equalizer screen. control to select a characteristic. Adjustment screen.
]/ F3 [
. To copy after adjusting the TX equalizer settings, press F5
[COPY] on the TX Equalizer Adjustment screen. 4 Press F2 [USER1], F3 [USER2] or F4 [USER3] to specify the destination for saving the settings. Copying of the TX equalizer settings is complete and the Pressing F7 [CANCEL] returns the display to the TX display returns to the TX Equalizer screen. Equalizer screen without copying the settings. Saving the TX Equalizer Settings The steps to write the TX equalizer settings data are as follows. Before doing so, configure the destination for saving the data in File Storage Location of the USB/File Management Menu to Internal Memory or USB Flash Drive. To save the data to a USB flash drive, insert a USB flash drive formatted using this transceiver into 1 Press and hold F [TX EQ] to display the TX Equalizer 2 Press F2 [
] or turn the [MULTI/CH]
screen. control to select a characteristic.
(USB-A).
]/ F3 [
]/ F4 [
.4 Press F3 [
] to select the frequency band to adjust. 5 Press F5 []/ F6 [+] or turn the [MULTI/CH] control to adjust the level of each frequency band. Touching a point on the RX Equalizer Adjustment screen selects the corresponding band and changes the frequency to the selected level. An alternative way is to touch a rough point followed by fine-
tuning in steps 3 and 4. Pressing and holding F2 [(RESET)] resets all the frequency levels to the default setting. 3 Press F7 [SAVE]. A message indicating that saving is complete is displayed. Copying the TX Equalizer Settings Equalizer effects that are configured according to the users preferences can be copied and saved as user-defined settings. 1 Press and hold F [TX EQ] to display the TX Equalizer 2 Press F2 [
] or turn the [MULTI/CH]
screen. control to select a characteristic.
]/ F3 [
.3 Press F5 [COPY]. A message with instructions on how to specify the destination for saving the settings is displayed. 8-6
.4 Press F4 [OK] to end the process. The saved file is named in the yyyymmdd_hhmmss format. The extension of the saved file is .equ.
(Example) If the date is 10:20:30 a.m., February 15, 2018:
20180215_102030.equ The name of the destination folder is as follows. (The name varies depending on the destination for saving files.) USB flash drive: KENWOOD\TS-890\SETTINGS\RX_EQ Built-in memory: SETTINGS\RX_EQ When removing the USB flash drive, make sure to execute Safe Removal of USB Flash Drive. (See 11-6) TX Characteristic CurveFrequency (Hz)OFFHB1HB2FPBB1BB2C05-5-10-30-25-20-1510100103102101 containing the TX equalizer data into Reading the TX Equalizer Settings The steps to read the TX equalizer settings that are saved in the internal memory or USB flash drive are as follows. To read data from a USB flash drive, insert the USB flash drive 1 Press and hold F [TX EQ] to display the TX Equalizer screen. 2 Press F2[
] or turn the [MULTI/
CH] control to select an equalizer characteristic to read.
(USB-A).
] / F3[
.3 Press F6 [READ] to display the File (TX EQ.) screen. The File (TX Equalizer) screen appears. TRANSMIT FUNCTIONS 8 TX Tuning This is a function that transmits constant output carrier continuously regardless of the current TX mode. It is used for purposes such as adjusting external antenna tuners or linear amplifiers. Assign TX tuning (TX Tune 1 or TX Tune 2) to a PF key. For more details, please refer to PF (Programmable Functions). Toggling between transmission and reception each time the key is pressed:
1 Press the PF key that is assigned with TX Tune 1. Transmits with a continuous carrier in the CW mode. The meter switches to SWR. again. Stops transmission and returns to the original mode. 2 Press the PF key that is assigned with TX Tune 1 TX TUNE blinks. TX TUNE blinks. Activating transmission only while the key is pressed:
1 Press the PF key that is assigned with TX Tune 2. 2 Release the PF key that is assigned with TX Tune Transmits in the CW mode while the key is pressed. The meter switches to SWR. 2. Stops transmission and returns to the original mode. Adjusting TX Output Power during TX Tuning 1 Press and hold F [MAX-Po] to display the Transmit Power Limit screen.
] exits data file selection and returns the To read data from the internal memory, press F7 [INT.MEM]. To read data from the USB flash drive, press F7
[USB.MEM]. Pressing F1 [
display to the TX Equalizer screen. Pressing F6 [DELETE] displays a message to confirm deletion of the file. Pressing F4 [OK] deletes the file. Pressing F5 [NAME] allows the file name to be changed.
]/ F3 [
] or turn the [MULTI/CH]
control to select a file. A reading message appears while reading is in progress, 4 Press F2 [
5 Press F4 [OK] to read the settings data. which changes to a reading complete message when reading is complete. 6 Press F4 [OK]. When removing the USB flash drive, make sure to follow the proper steps on the USB screen to remove the device safely. (See 11-6) Even if the equalizer type selected in step 3 is different from the equalizer type that is associated with the file to read, the settings data read will overwrite the TX equalizer selected in step 3.
]/ F5 [
.2 Press F4 [
] to select a frequency band. The settings of the selected frequency band column can be changed. 3 Press F2 [
] to select the TX Tune Power (horizontal row). 4 Press F6 []/ F7 [+] or turn the [MULTI/CH] control to select a TX output power. Setting Value 5 to 10 (default) to 100 [W] (1-step)
]/ F3 [
8-7 8 TRANSMIT FUNCTIONS Timeout Timer (TOT) This function forcibly stops transmission and restores the receiving status when the preconfigured TX time is exceeded. Configure in Menu [6-02] Time-out Timer Setting Value Off (default)/ 3/ 5/ 10/ 20/ 30 [min]
ID Beep During continuous transmission via the [SEND] key, [PTT] on the microphone or the SS/PKS function on the rear panel, a beep tone
(ID ID preconfigured duration from the time transmission starts is exceeded.
) is output whenever the Configure in Menu [6-05] ID Beep Off (default)/ 1 to 30 [min] (1 step) Setting Value The transceiver may not function as intended in some cases as it may return to the receiving state during CW break-in or VOX transmission. 8-8 9 MEMORY CHANNELS This transceiver comes with 120 memory channels, each of which can be used for registering operating data. The 120 memory channels are divided into 3 types which are assigned respectively with the following channel numbers: 00 to 99, P0 to P9 and E0 to E9. Below is a general outline of the respective memory channel types. 00 to 99 (standard memory channels):
For registering operating data that are frequently used. P0 to P9 (memory channels for specific band segments):
For registering programmable VFO or program scan frequency ranges. E0 to E9 (expanded memory channels):
These can be used in the same way as the standard memory channels. Data that can be registered in each of the memory channels are as follows. Channel 00 to 99/
E0 to E9 P0 to P9
(Simplex)
(Simplex) Operating Data RX Frequency TX Frequency RX Mode TX Mode Split Operation Start Frequency End Frequency Tone/CTCSS/Cross Tone Tone Frequency CTCSS Frequency Memory Name Lockout MEMORY CHANNELS 9 Displaying the Memory Channel List Settings registered in a memory channel can be displayed on the Memory Channel List screen. The channel for registering operating frequency data or the channel to use can be selected on the Memory Channel List screen. Memory channels can be assigned with names on this screen. A memory channel can be selected on the Memory Channel List screen. 1 Press F7 [M.LIST] to display the Memory Channel List screen. The selected memory channel is indicated in white color. When registering data to the memory channel, it changes into a pink display. Pressing F7 [EXTEND] enlarges the Memory Channel List screen display. Pressing it again restores the screen to the original size.
] or turn the [MULTI/CH]
control to select a memory channel. Operating frequency data that are displayed on the Memory Channel List screen are as follows. Operating Data
]/ F3 [
2 Press F2 [
CH Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Name Lockout Description Displays the channel number. 00 to 99: standard memory channels P0 to P9: memory channels for specific band segments E0 to E9: expanded memory channels Registers a single frequency and mode for simplex channels. (Simplex operation frequency or radio station frequency) Registers the RX frequency and mode during split operation for split channels. Registers the start frequency and mode of a band segment for memory channels assigned to specific band segments. This is left blank in the case of simplex channels. Registers the TX frequency and mode during split operation for split channels. Registers the end frequency and mode of a band segment for memory channels assigned to specific band segments. Displays the name of the memory channel. Displays the lockout status of the respective memory channels. Memory scan is not performed for channels selected with a check mark. 9-1 Memory Channel Mode An operating data can be called up from a memory channel for transmission or reception. Operating data such as the TX and RX frequencies, mode and tone can be changed temporarily. Operating in the Memory Channel Mode Follow the steps below to call up the operating data of a memory channel. Operating data that is registered in the memory channel selected on the memory channel list is called up. 1 Pressing [M/V] in the VFO mode to switch to the memory channel mode. The selected band switches to the operating data that is registered in the memory channel on the memory channel list, and the memory channel number that is used is displayed on the screen. 2 Press [UP] or [DOWN] on the microphone or turn the
[MULTI/CH] control to switch to the target memory channel. mode. The transceiver returns to the VFO mode. 3 Pressing [M/V] again exits the memory channel Direct Entry of a Memory Channel Number A memory channel number can be selected by pressing the corresponding number on the numeric keypad. 1 Enter the tens digit of the memory channel using the numeric keypad. The tens digit of the channel number is being entered for the 2 Enter the ones digit of the memory channel using the numeric keypad. The operating data corresponding to the entered number is called up and the channel number entry mode ends. Pressing [CLR] clears the input and exits the channel number entry mode. selected band while the ones digit appears as -. 9 MEMORY CHANNELS Registering Operating Frequency Data to a Memory Channel The steps to register the frequency and mode to the memory channel are as follows. To register a split channel, press [SPLIT] to switch to the split 1 Configure the frequency and mode to register. 2 Press F7 [M.LIST] to display the Memory Channel List screen. 3 Press [M.IN]. 4 Press F2 [
] or turn the [MULTI/CH]
mode and operate accordingly. control to select the memory channel for registering the operating data. Choose a memory channel from 00 to 99 or E0 to E9. 5 Press [M.IN] or F4 [M.IN] to register the operating data. Pressing F1 [CANCEL] or [ESC] exits the Memory Channel List screen without registering the operating data to the memory channel.
]/ F3 [
Configuring the Operating Data through Direct Frequency Entry The numeric keypad can be used to register a frequency to a memory channel or make changes to an operating data that is already registered to a memory channel. This is handy for adjusting the frequency to a station with a fixed frequency. 1 Turn the [MULTI/CH] control to select the memory channel (00 to 99 or E0 to E9) for registering the operating data. 2 Press [ENT] to enable use of the numeric keypad. The frequency entry mode starts up in the corresponding To change the operating mode, press the mode key. band with all the frequency digits appearing as -. 3 Key in a frequency value using the numeric keypad.
- changes into a numeric value when a numeric key is pressed and a value can be input starting from the highest-order digit. To enter 1.82 MHz, press [0/50], [1/1.8], [8/24] followed by
[2/3.5], and press [ENT] when input is complete. To enter a frequency lower than 6 MHz for K type transceivers, start by keying in a 0. To enter a frequency lower than 8 MHz for E type transceivers, start by keying in a 0. Pressing [CLR] clears the input and exits the frequency entry mode. 4 Press [ENT] to register the operating data. The operating data is now registered to the memory channel selected in step 2. 9-2
]/ F3 [
MEMORY CHANNELS 9 Copying Data from the Memory Channel List Screen to VFO 1 Press F7 [M.LIST] to display the Memory Channel List screen. 2 Press F2 [
] or turn the [MULTI/CH]
control to select a memory channel. 3 Press and hold [M/V], or press F4 [M VFO] to copy the operating data to the VFO. After operating data is copied to a VFO, the data at the source will be erased. The transceiver exits the memory channel mode and enters the VFO mode. Operating data of memory channels assigned to specific band segments cannot be copied to a VFO. When in the VFO mode, operating data that is registered in the memory channel selected on the Memory Channel List screen is copied to the VFO. Channel-to-Channel Copying Operating data of a memory channel can also be copied to another memory channel. This is useful in cases such as when sorting the registered memory channels in a certain sequence. 1 Press F7 [M.LIST] to display the Memory Channel List screen. 2 Press F2 [
] or turn the [MULTI/CH]
control to select the memory channel for which the operating data is to be copied. The memory channel that is being copied changes into a
] or turn the [MULTI/CH]
3 Press F6 [COPY] to copy the operating data. 4 Press F2[
5 Press F4 [M.IN] to end the process. control to select the memory channel for registering the copied operating data. Operating data of the memory channel selected in step 2 is Pressing F1 [CANCEL] or [ESC] ends the operation without copied to the memory channel selected in step 4. copying the operating data. Operating data of the standard memory channels (00 to 99) and expanded memory channels (E0 to E9) cannot be copied to memory channels assigned to specific band segments (P0 to P9). The same applies to copying from memory channels for specific band segments to standard and expanded memory channels. that are not registered with operating data. Operating data cannot be copied from memory channels pink display.
]/ F3 [
]/ F3[
Changing the Memory Channel Temporarily During operation in the memory channel mode, it is possible to change the frequency and mode temporarily without affecting the registered memory channel settings. Changing the Frequency Temporarily Follow the steps below to change the frequency temporarily. 1 Configure Menu [4-01] Temporary Change
(Memory Channel Configurations) to On. Setting Value Off (default)/ On 2 Press [M/V] to switch to the memory channel mode. 3 Turn the Tuning control to alter the frequency. To register a frequency that has been changed, store it in a different memory channel. For memory channels assigned to specific band segments, changing the frequency or mode alters the operating data that is registered in the corresponding memory channel regardless of this setting. Operating data related to the operating mode and FM tone can be altered temporarily regardless of this setting. Copying the Operating Data of a Memory Channel Operating data of a memory channel can be copied to a VFO or another memory channel. Memory Shift (Memory VFO) The operating data of a memory channel can be copied to a VFO. It comes in handy when the frequency to use is near the frequency registered in a memory channel. Selecting a Memory Channel and Copying to VFO 1 Turn the [MULTI/CH] control in the memory channel mode to select a memory channel. 2 Press and hold [M/V], or press F6 [M VFO] to copy the operating data to the VFO. The operating data of the selected memory channel is copied to the VFO. The transceiver exits the memory channel mode and enters the VFO mode. When the operating data is temporarily changed, the altered operating data is copied to the VFO. Operating data of memory channels assigned to specific band segments cannot be copied to a VFO. Operating data that is registered in Frequency 1 is copied to the VFO. Performing memory shift of a split memory channel copies the information of Frequency 1 to VFO A and that of Frequency 2 to VFO B and switches the VFO mode to the split state. 9-3 Registering a Memory Channel Name Each memory channel can also be assigned with a name. The name should contain not more than 10 characters (alphanumeric characters and symbols). 1 Press F7 [M.LIST] to display the Memory Channel List screen. 2 Press F2 [
] or turn the [MULTI/CH]
control to select the memory channel to be named. 3 Press F4 [NAME]. 4 Use the function keys, [MULTI/CH] control or USB keyboard to enter a name. Enter a name that contains not more than 10 characters.
]/ F3 [
Key F1 [SPACE]
F2 []/ F3 [+]
]/ F5 [
F4 [
F [BACK SPACE]
F [DEL]
F [CHAR]
Behavior Inserts a space. Selects a character.
] Moves the cursor. Deletes the character to the left of the cursor. Deletes the character to the right of the cursor. Switches the type of character to edit. Pressing the key each time switches the selection in the following sequence:
ABC (upper case) abc (lower case)
!# (symbols) ABC (upper case)
. 5 Press F6 [SAVE] to register the name. Pressing F7 [CANCEL] returns the display to the Memory Channel List screen without assigning a name to the memory channel. Characters that can be used are characters that can be input using the keyboard selected in menu [9-01]
Keyboard Language (USB Keyboard). name. data can be assigned a name. Quick memory channels cannot be assigned with a Only memory channels that contain registered operating 9 MEMORY CHANNELS Configuring the Program Scan Frequency Range The frequency range for programmable VFO or program scan can be registered to the memory channels from P0 to P9. Register the start frequency and end frequency in advance to enable changes to the frequency or scanning operation within a specific range. For more details on program scan, please refer to Chapter 10. 1 When in the VFO mode, turn the Tuning or
[MULTI/CH] control to align the VFO frequency with the frequency at which to start scanning. 2 Press [M.IN] to display the Memory Channel List screen. 3 Press F2 [
] or turn the [MULTI/CH]
control to select the memory channel (P0 to P9) for registering the frequency range. frequency. The start frequency is registered to Frequency 1. VFO frequency with the end frequency. frequency. The end frequency is registered to Frequency 2 and the transceiver exits the Memory Channel List screen. 5 Turn the Tuning or [MULTI/CH] control to align the 6 Press F4 [M.IN] or [M.IN] to register the end 4 Press F4 [M.IN] or [M.IN] to register the start
]/ F3 [
Erasing Memory Channels Data from a registered memory channel can be erased. 1 Press F7 [M.LIST] to display the Memory Channel List screen. 2 Press F2 [
] or turn the [MULTI/CH]
control to select a memory channel to be erased. 3 Press and hold F4 [(CLEAR)] to erase the operating data.
]/ F3 [
When the operating data of a memory channel is erased during operating in the memory channel mode, the corresponding channel number will be maintained but there will be no registered data inside. To erase all the memory channels, perform memory channel reset. 9-4 Quick Memory Channels Quick memory is a function that enables speedy registration of temporary data without specifying a memory channel. For example, this function is useful for registering the operating data of the mobile station that this transceiver communicates with when moving within a specific band to search for a DX station. A quick memory channel can be called up only during operation in the VFO mode. The following types of operating data can be registered to a quick memory channel. Frequency/mode of VFO A and VFO B TX and RX functions Status of the RIT function Status of the XIT function RIT/XIT frequency Status of the FINE-tuning function Status of the noise blanker Noise reduction status Status of the beat canceler Status of the notch filter function RX filter Registering a Quick Memory Channel Up to 10 quick memory channels (Q0 to Q9) can be registered on this transceiver. The latest operating data that is registered is assigned to Q0. Whenever operating data is newly registered, the current registered data in Q0 will be shifted to Q1, while the newly-registered data will occupy the Q0 channel. Press [Q-M.IN] to register the operating data to the quick memory channel. When in the VFO mode, pressing [Q-M.IN] registers the When in the quick memory channel mode, pressing operating data to the channel 0.
[Q-M.IN] registers the operating data to the selected quick memory channel. Each time new operating data is registered, the currently-
registered data will be shifted to the next larger channel number. When the memory channel mode is active, pressing
[Q-M.IN] does not register data to a quick memory channel. If all the quick memory channels are occupied with registered data, pressing [Q-M.IN] erases the oldest operating data which is stored in the largest quick memory channel number. Calling up a Quick Memory Channel Follow the steps below to call up a registered quick memory channel. 1 Press [Q-MR] to call up the operating data from the quick memory channel. Displays the quick memory channel number. 2 Turn the [MULTI/CH] control to switch the quick memory channel. Pressing [Q-MR] again exits the quick memory channel mode and returns the transceiver to the VFO mode. MEMORY CHANNELS 9 When data is retrieved from a memory channel for use or when operating data is not registered to the quick memory channel, pressing [Q-MR] does not call up the quick memory channel. Temporary changes can be made to the frequency and other operating data without affecting the operating data that is registered in the quick memory channel. To register the operating data after changes are made, press [Q-M.IN] to register it to a quick memory. Configuring the Number of Quick Memory Channels This transceiver comes with 10 quick memory channels (Q0 to Q9). However, it is possible to customize the number of quick memory channels for registering data. Configure in Menu [4-00] Number of Quick Memory Channels Setting Value 3/ 5 (default)/ 10 [ch]
When the number of quick memory channels is reduced from a larger to a smaller number, registered data that exceeds the smaller number of channels will be erased. The preconfigured number of quick memory channels cannot be changed when a quick memory channel is being called up. Erasing a Quick Memory Channel Follow the steps below to erase all registered operating data from the quick memory channels. 1 Press [Q-MR] to call up a quick memory channel. 2 Press and hold [Q-MR]. A message appears which prompts the user to confirm deletion of all the operating data in the quick memory channels. 3 Press F4 [OK] to erase the operating data. Operating data is erased from the quick memory channels and the transceiver switches to the VFO mode. Pressing F7 [CANCEL] clears the confirmation message without erasing the operating data from the quick memory channels. 9-5 9 MEMORY CHANNELS Memory Shift (Quick Memory VFO) Follow the steps below to copy the operating data of a quick memory channel to the VFO. 1 Press [Q-MR] to call up a quick memory channel. 2 Turn the [MULTI/CH] control to select the quick memory channel for which the operating data is to be copied. Operating data is copied from the quick memory channel to When the operating data is temporarily changed, the altered the VFO and the transceiver switches to the VFO mode. operating data is copied to the VFO. 3 Press and hold [M/V], or press F6 [M VFO]. 9-6 10 SCAN Scan is a function that searches for signals by automatically altering the frequency. This transceiver makes use of the following scan methods to search for signals. Scan Type Program Scan Normal Scan VFO Scan Purpose Performs scan in the frequency ranges that are registered in the memory channels for specific band segments (P0 to P9). Performs scan on the entire RX frequency band. When Program Scan is set to OFF for all the memory channels for specific band segments, Program Scan switches automatically to VFO Scan. However, when VFO Scan is selected, VFO Scan is performed even when not all channels are set to OFF. Scans all Memory channels from 00 to 99, P0 to P9, and E0 to E9. Scans the grouped memory channels. Scans the Quick Memory channels. Scan Using Memory Channels All-Channel Scan Group Scan Quick Memory Scan Program Scan Program Scan performs scan between the range specified by the start and end frequencies which are registered in the each of memory channels for specific band segments (P0 to P9). Configure the frequency range for Program Scan in the memory channels for specific band segments (P0 to P9). Up to 10 frequency ranges that are transmitted by specific stations can be preconfigured. Enabling standby in a nearby frequency makes it easy to perform tuning to a specific station when the station starts communication in the preconfigured frequency range. While scanning is in progress, turning the Tuning or Program Scan performs scan between the start and end frequencies of a memory channel for specific band segments and moves to the next channel after scanning of the specified frequency range has ended.
[MULTI/CH] control allows the frequency to be changed quickly. The same operation can also be used to change the scanning direction. Scanning is performed in the ascending order from low to high frequency. Configuring the end frequency to a value smaller than the start frequency by turning the Tuning or [MULTI/CH] control reverses the scanning direction (high to low frequency). Scanning is performed based on the step frequency of the Tuning control when in the SSB, CW, FSK and PSK modes, while it is based on the step frequency of the
[MULTI/CH] control when in the FM mode, and fixed at 100 Hz in the AM mode. performing Program Scan (VFO Scan) in the FM mode or during Memory Scan (All-channel Scan or Group Scan) or Quick Memory Scan regardless of the operating mode. For more information on the conditions to resume scanning, please refer to Configuring the Conditions for Resuming Scan. During standby for the CTCSS tone in the FM mode, scan stops only when there is a matching CTCSS tone. When the [SQL] control is turned to the right to a level that far exceeds the squelch threshold while in the FM mode, scanning may not stop even at a channel where a signal is present. Configure the squelch level to a point that is near the squelch threshold. Scanning stops when signals are received while SCAN 10 Starting the Program Scan (VFO Scan) 1 Press [M/V] to switch to VFO mode. 2 Press F5 [SCAN] to start program scan (VFO scan). Pressing F5 [SCAN] again or [ESC] ends the Program Scan
(VFO Scan). Configuring the Program Scan (VFO Scan) Frequency Range Scanning can be configured to the frequency range specified in the memory channels for specific band segments (Program Scan) or the entire RX frequency band (VFO Scan). To perform Program Scan, register the memory channels for specific band segments. 1 Press [M/V] to switch to VFO mode. 2 Press and hold F5 [SCAN] to display the Program Scan segment screen. 3 Press F2 [
4 Press F4 [
]/ F3 [
] to select a memory
] to select whether to scan the channel for specific band segments. memory channel for specific band segments. Pressing F4 [
] each time selects (performs scan) or deselects (does not perform scan) the checkbox. When performing VFO Scan, deselect the checkboxes for all the memory channels for specific band segments or press
[VFO/PRG] to switch the display to VFO SCAN. Pressing F6 [SEL.ALL] selects the checkboxes for all the memory channels for specific band segments. Pressing F7 [CLR.ALL] deselects the checkboxes for all the memory channels for specific band segments. 10-1 10 SCAN Examples on the configuration of Program Scan and VFO Scan:
Configure the memory channels for specific band segments such that the checkboxes for P1, P3 and P5 are selected. Next, press F5 [SCAN]. Program Scan starts and scanning is performed in the frequency range registered for the respective channels. Configure the memory channels for specific band segments such that all the checkboxes are deselected and press F [SCAN]. Or press [VFO/
PRG] to switch the display to VFO SCAN. VFO Scan is performed on the entire RX frequency band. The checkbox will remain deselected for memory channels that do not contain any operating data. These checkboxes cannot be selected. For more details on registering memory channels for specific band segments, please refer to 9-4 Configuring the Program Scan Frequency Range. Switching the Scan Speed The time interval for switching the Program Scan (VFO Scan) frequency can be configured in modes other than FM. 1 Press F3 [] or F4 [+] while Program Scan (or VFO Scan) is in progress. The scan speed is shown below the frequency display. The frequency switching interval changes as follows. Scan Speed Display SCAN-SPD1 SCAN-SPD2 SCAN-SPD3 SCAN-SPD4 SCAN-SPD5 SCAN-SPD6 SCAN-SPD7 SCAN-SPD8 SCAN-SPD9 Frequency Switching Interval 10 ms 30 ms 100 ms 150 ms 200 ms 250 ms 300 ms 350 ms 400 ms 10-2 Program Slow Scan Program Slow Scan is a function that extends the frequency switching interval (performs scan more slowly) using the preconfigured frequency for performing Program Scan (frequency point) and the frequencies before and after this point (segment). Switching slowly between the specified frequency (frequency point) and the corresponding segment allows the communication status to be checked in detail. To perform Program Slow Scan, register a frequency range to a memory channel for specific band segments in advance. Turning ON/OFF Program Slow Scan To combine the use of Program Slow Scan while Program Scan is running, set Program Slow Scan to ON in advance. When scanned frequency falls in the segment for Program Slow Scan during Program Scan, SCAN-SLOW is displayed on the screen and the speed of frequency switching slows down. Configure in Menu [4-02] Program Slow Scan Setting Value Off/ On (default) Configuring the Frequency Points for Program Slow Scan The frequency points for extending the frequency switching interval during Program Slow Scan can be configured as follows. Up to 5 frequency points can be configured for each memory To configure the frequency points, register a band segment to 1 Press [M/V] to switch to the memory channel mode. 2 Press F7 [M.LIST] to display the Memory Channel channel assigned to specific band segments (P0 to P9). a memory channel for specific band segments in advance. List screen. 3 Press F2 [
] or F3 [
], or turn the [MULTI/CH]
control to select a memory channel for specific band segments. Scan screen. 4 Press F5 [SLW.SCN] to display the Program Slow
.5 Turn the Tuning control and align the Current frequency as the frequency point for Program Slow Scan. 6 Press any of the function keys (F2 [POINT 1] to F6
[POINT 5]) to configure the center point of the preferred frequency range to perform Program Slow Scan. Pressing and holding the key clears the frequency point that is stored. Pressing and holding F7 [(CLR ALL)] clears all the frequency points. SCAN 10 Memory Scan Memory Scan allows the registered memory channel to be automatically switched at a specific time interval for scanning. There are 2 types of Memory Scan modes. All-channel Scan performs scan on all the memory channels that are registered with operating data, while Group Scan performs scan on a selected group among the memory channels. Performing Memory Scan 1 Press [M/V] to switch to the memory channel mode. 2 Press F5 [SCAN] to start memory scan. Turning the [MULTI/CH] control allows the scan channel to jump rapidly to the next or previous channels. Pressing F5 [SCAN] again or pressing [ESC] ends Memory Scan. The scan direction is fixed at the ascending order. The frequency switching interval during Memory Scan is 400 ms. However, when a CTCSS tone is received in the FM mode, the frequency switching interval is extended to 600 ms. During Memory Scan, SCANNING is displayed instead of the scan speed. Configuring All-channel Scan and Group Scan 1 Press [M/V] to switch to the memory channel mode. 2 Press and hold F5 [SCAN] to display the Memory Scan group screen. 7 Press F1 [
] to exit the Program Slow Scan screen. The display returns to the Memory Channel List screen. Pressing a function key (F2 [Point 1] to F6 [POINT 5]) that already contains a frequency point overwrites the frequency point with the new input. When configuring a frequency point, frequencies that are smaller than 10 Hz are rounded off. Configuring the Segment for Program Slow Scan The frequency switching interval during Program Scan slows down in the preconfigured segment that contains frequencies before and after the frequency point for Program Slow Scan. Configure in Menu [4-03] Program Slow Scan Range Setting Value 100/ 200/ 300 (default)/ 400/ 500 [Hz]
For example, when 500 [Hz] is selected, the frequency switching interval is extended to a range of 500 Hz from the frequency point. Scan Hold While Program Scan (VFO Scan) is performed in a mode other than FM, changing the frequency by turning the Tuning or [MULTI/
CH] control pauses the scan operation for 5 seconds. Signals can be received temporarily without stopping the scan operation. Configure in Menu [4-04] Scan Hold Setting Value Off (default)/ On When Scan Hold is set to On, signals are received with Program Scan paused for 5 seconds. 3 Press F2 [
4 Press F4 [
] or F3 [
] to select a memory
] or turn the [MULTI/CH] control to group. select whether to start scanning of the memory channels belonging to a memory group. Pressing F4 [
] each time selects (performs scan) or When performing All-channel Scan, select the checkboxes Pressing F6 [SEL.ALL] selects the checkboxes for all Pressing F7 [CLR.ALL] deselects the checkboxes for all Memory channels are classified into memory groups as deselects (does not perform scan) the checkbox. for all the memory groups. memory groups. memory groups. follows. The classification of the memory groups and channels cannot be altered. Group Group Memory Channel 00 to 09 10 to 19 20 to 29 30 to 39 40 to 49 50 to 59 Memory Channel 60 to 69 70 to 79 80 to 99 90 to 99 P0 to P9 E0 to E9 6 7 8 9 P E 0 1 2 3 4 5 10-3 Quick Memory Scan Quick Memory Scan allows the registered quick memory channel to be automatically switched at a specific time interval for scanning. 1 Press [Q-MR] to call up a quick memory channel. 2 Press F5 [SCAN] to start quick memory scan. Turning the [MULTI/CH] control allows the scan channel to Pressing F5 [SCAN] again or pressing [ESC] ends Quick The scan direction is fixed at the ascending order. jump rapidly to the next or previous channels. Memory Scan. Configuring the Conditions for Resuming Scan Scanning stops when signals are received while performing Program Scan (VFO Scan) in the FM mode or during Memory Scan or Quick Memory Scan regardless of the operating mode. The conditions for resuming the scan operation after it has stopped can be configured. Time-operated (Time-operated mode):
Pauses scan for 3 seconds after signals are received. Continues to pause scan for another 3 seconds if signal reception is still in progress after 3 seconds. Scan operation resumes after this interval even if reception is still ongoing. (The maximum duration for pausing scan using the time-
operated mode is 6 seconds.) Carrier-operated (Carrier-operated mode):
Pauses scan while signals are received. Scan operation resumes when signals are not received for a duration of 2 seconds. Configure in Menu [4-05] Scan Resume Time-operated (default)/ Carrier-operated Setting Value 10 SCAN When all the memory channels belonging to a Pressing F5 [SCAN] does not start the scan operation when the memory groups to be scanned are configured as follows. When the checkboxes for all the memory groups are When operating data is not stored in the memory deselected. channels of a memory group, even if the checkboxes of the memory group are selected. memory group are locked out, even if the checkboxes of the memory group are selected. Examples on the configuration of All-channel Scan and Group Scan:
When the checkboxes for Memory Groups 1 and 5 are selected, pressing F5 [SCAN] activates Group Scan. In this case, scan is performed on the memory channels included in Memory Groups 1 and 5. selected, pressing F5 [SCAN] activates All-channel Scan. When the checkboxes for all memory groups are Memory Channel Lockout Selected memory channels can be omitted (locked out) in advance before performing Memory Scan. 1 Press F7 [M.LIST] to display the Memory Channel 2 Press F2 [
], or turn the [MULTI/CH]
3 Press F6 [L.OUT] to lock out the memory channel. List. control to select a memory channel. Lockout is applied to memory channels for which the Pressing F6 [L.OUT] again cancels the lockout mode. Lockout checkbox is selected. L.OUT lights up in the standard mode screen and compression mode screen.
] or F3 [
. 10-4 11 USB/FILE MANAGEMENT Managing Different File Types The following data can be stored as files on this transceiver. Settings data of the transceiver Settings data of TX and RX equalizers Audio data of manual and full-time recordings Audio data of timer recordings Screen capture image data (can be stored but cannot be displayed on this transceiver) CW, RTTY and PSK communication log data KNS communication log data (can be stored but cannot be displayed on this transceiver) Destination for Saving Files Files are stored in the built-in memory of the transceiver (maximum capacity of 1 GB) in the default setting. However, settings can be changed for files to be saved to a USB flash drive that is connected to the transceiver. Copying Files Stored in the Built-in Memory to an External Source Files that are stored in the built-in memory of the transceiver can be copied to a PC that is connected to this transceiver via a USB cable. Folder Configuration of the Built-in Memory When copying files to a PC via a USB cable, the built-in memory of the transceiver is recognized on the PC as a removable device with the name TS-890. The folder configuration of the TS-890 removable device is as follows. All the folders above are read-only files. They cannot be edited or deleted on the PC. Among the folders above, only those selected by the operations in Copying Files to a PC (see 11-4) will appear under TS-890 removable device. Folder Configuration of the USB Flash Drive
. USB/FILE MANAGEMENT 11 Image Files for Use as Screen Savers Write image files to be used as screen savers (Type 3) in advance to the Folder for screen saver image files (IMAGE) of the USB flash drive such as via a PC before loading them into the built-in memory of the transceiver. For more details on the method of configuration, please refer to Configuring the Screen Saver. (16-1) Saving Files (For Both USB Flash Drive and Built-in Memory) When the date and time are not configured in the CLOCK menu, the recorded date and time when the file is saved is determined with the timing at which this transceiver is powered on as January 1, 2018, 0:00. When trying to save files that exceed this number, an error occurs and a screen showing Insufficient Memory Size is displayed. If the USB flash drive is write-protected when writing files to the USB flash drive, an error occurs and a screen showing Insufficient Memory Size is displayed. A maximum number of 255 files can be stored in each folder. Compatible USB Flash Drives This transceiver does not come supplied with a USB flash drive. Use a commercially available USB flash drive. The USB flash drive needs to be formatted by this transceiver before it can be used. After formatting is complete, a folder is automatically created in the USB flash drive. (Formatted to FAT32) When formatting is performed, any file that exists on the USB flash drive will be erased. To prevent data from being lost, back up the necessary files to devices such as a PC before formatting. When a compatible USB flash drive is connected to this transceiver, any data that is not found in the folder configuration will be automatically created. If multiple USB flash drives are connected to this transceiver at the same time, only the first USB flash drive that is recognized can be used. A USB flash drive and USB keyboard can also be connected at the same time via a USB hub. The USB-A connector of this transceiver supports the USB 1.1 standard. The USB flash drive is capable of running at the Full Speed (maximum 12 Mbps) transfer rate. We do not provide guarantee with regard to the operation and power supply of all USB devices that are commercially available. When using an extension cable, make use of one that complies with the USB standard with a length not longer than 3 m. exceeds the allowable current of this transceiver (0.5 A), a USB bus power error screen is displayed. This transceiver does not support security-enabled USB flash drives. If the power consumption of the connected device 11-1 TS-890CAPTUREDECODEKNS_LOGRX_RECSETTINGSTIMER_RECCWFSKPSKDATARX_EQTX_EQFolder for audio files of timer recordingsFolder for TX equalizer data filesFolder for RX equalizer data filesFolder for settings data filesFolder for audio files of manual and full-time recordingsFolder for KNS communication log filesFolder for PSK communication log filesFolder for FSK communication log filesFolder for CW communication log filesFolder for captured image filesFolder for screen saver image filesFolder for audio files of timer recordingsFolder for TX equalizer data filesFolder for RX equalizer data filesFolder for settings data filesFolder for audio files of manual and full-time recordingsFolder for KNS communication log filesFolder for PSK communication log filesFolder for FSK communication log filesFolder for CW communication log filesFolder for captured image filesTS-890CAPTUREDECODEKNS_LOGIMAGERX_RECSETTINGSTIMER_RECCWFSKPSKDATARX_EQTX_EQKENWOOD formatted using this transceiver into and <<
by this transceiver. Saving Settings Data Settings data or audio data created using this transceiver can also be written to the built-in memory or a USB flash drive. To save the data to a USB flash drive, insert a USB flash drive
(USB-A).
<<
>> starts to blink when a USB flash drive is connected,
>> lights up when the USB flash drive is recognized 1 Select Save Configuration Data in the USB/File Management menu. 2 Press F4 [SELECT]. File saving starts. While file saving is in progress, a processing screen is displayed on the screen. (This is not displayed if the duration of the saving process is very short.) 3 When the data saving complete screen is displayed, press F4 [OK].
\DATA recordings and timer recordings The settings data contains the data of all settings that are currently configured on this transceiver. However, the following are excluded. Data that are stored in the operating environment
(CONFIG A or B) that is not currently selected. Screen capture image files Audio data files of manual recordings, full-time Settings data files of TX and RX equalizers CW/TTY/PSK communication log files KNS communication log files Image files for screen savers (Type 3) The destination folder cannot be selected. USB flash drive: \KENWOOD\TS-890\SETTINGS Built-in memory: \SETTINGS\DATA The extension of the saved file is .dat. The saved file is assigned with a name using the date 15, 2018, 10:20:30 a.m.) and time in the following format:
yyyymmdd_hhmmss.dat. 20180215_102030.dat (File that is saved on February To save files to a USB flash drive, check the following in advance. The USB flash drive is formatted by this transceiver. The USB flash drive is correctly inserted into this There is sufficient free space on the USB flash drive. The USB flash drive is not write-protected or the file system is not corrupted. If there is insufficient memory, Insufficient Memory Size is displayed on the screen. If the USB flash drive is removed while files are being saved to it, Saving to USB flash drive unsuccessful is displayed on the screen. If the USB flash drive for saving files to is write-protected, Insufficient Memory Size is displayed on the screen.
(Example) transceiver. 11 USB/FILE MANAGEMENT USB/File Management Menu Screen 1 Press [MENU]. 2 Press F [USB/FILE] to display the USB/File Management menu screen. Configuring the Destination for Saving Files Follow the steps below to select the destination for saving files such as the transceiver data and audio recordings. 1 Press F2 [
]/ F3 [
Location. 2 Press F4 [SELECT]. 3 Press F4 []/ F5 [+] or turn the [MULTI/CH] control
] to select File Storage to select the destination for saving the files. Internal Memory (default)/ USB Flash Drive Setting Value Internal Memory: Saves files to the built-in memory of the transceiver. USB Flash Drive: Saves files to a USB flash drive. The destination for saving files cannot be changed while manual recording or CW/RTTY/PSK communication log recording is in progress. Pressing F4 [SELECT] in this case displays a File destination change error on the screen. 11-2 Reading Settings Data Follow the steps below to read the settings data file of the transceiver that is stored in the built-in memory or a USB flash drive. To read data from a USB flash drive, insert the USB flash drive 1 Select Read Configuration Data in the USB/File Management menu. 2 Press F4 [SELECT]. A screen for selecting the file (DATA) to read appears. containing the settings data into
(USB-A). Information of the location to read files from (built-in memory or USB flash drive) that was last selected on this screen is displayed. However, if a USB flash drive is not connected or cannot be correctly recognized, information of the built-in memory will be displayed. If no file is found, No file is found. is displayed on the screen. 3 Select the file to read. To read data from the internal memory, press F7 [INT.MEM]. To read data from the USB flash drive, press F7
[USB.MEM]. (If a USB flash drive is not connected, a message will appear prompting you to get ready the USB flash drive.) Pressing F5 [NAME] allows the file name to be changed. Pressing F6 [DELETE] displays a message to confirm deletion of the file. Pressing F4 [OK] deletes the file. 4 Press F2 [
] or turn the [MULTI/CH]
control to select the settings data file to read. 5 Press F4 [OK] to display the selection screen
(DATA) for reading the data. Pressing F7 [CANCEL] ends the operation without reading
]/F3 [
a file. USB/FILE MANAGEMENT 11 9 Press F4 [OK] to start reading the files. Reading of settings data files with a check mark starts. When reading starts, a reading in progress screen is displayed. Pressing F7 [CANCEL] exits the file selection screen without starting reading and returns the display to the USB/
File Management menu screen. After the settings data files have been read successfully, a message indicating that reading is complete is displayed. 10Press F4 [OK] to end the process. This transceiver reboots automatically. tuner to the rear terminals) read. reading process. Data that are not created by this transceiver cannot be The following function groups can be excluded from the Environmental Dependent data (settings data that are dependent on the installation environment) Antenna selection data and preset data of antenna Settings for items in menu group 6 (settings related Advanced menu settings Linear amplifier menu settings Transverter settings LAN menu settings KNS menu settings and KNS registered users list Clock menu settings CW/RTTY/PSK Message Memory data (CW/RTTY/
PSK message memory) Voice Message Memory data (voice message data) If the settings data file is saved in a transceiver with a newer firmware version, pressing F4 [OK] in step 9 will result in an error. A data reading error screen due to mismatch between new and old firmware versions is displayed and reading is not executed. If the settings data file is corrupted, pressing F4 [OK] in step 6 will result in an error. A file reading NG screen is displayed and reading is not executed. If data mismatch is detected after reading a settings data file, a corrupted data is detected screen is displayed. When this occurs, pressing F4 [OK] runs a full reset and reboots this transceiver.
] or F3 [
.6 Press F2 [
7 Press F5 [
], or turn the [MULTI/CH]
] to select the checkbox to the left control to select a function group to read. of the settings data name. Pressing F5 [
] again deselects the checkbox.
(Settings data will not be read.) 8 Repeat steps 7 and 8 to select the corresponding checkboxes for the settings data to read. 11-3 11 USB/FILE MANAGEMENT Changing the Name of Files Stored in the Built-in Memory The file name of the settings data that is stored on the transceiver can be changed by the user to ease identification. 1 Select Read Configuration Data in the USB/File 2 Press F4 [SELECT] to display the screen for Management menu. selecting the file (DATA) to read. 3 Press F5 [NAME]. The file name edit screen is displayed. 4 Use the function keys and the [MULTI/CH] control to edit the file name. Enter a name that contains not more than 255 characters. Key F1 [SPACE]
F2 []/ F3 [+]
F4 [
]/ F5
[
]
Operation Inserts a space. Selects a character. Moves the cursor. F [DEL]
F [CHAR]
F [BACK SPACE] Deletes the character to the left of the cursor. Deletes the character to the right of the cursor. Switches the type of character to edit. Pressing the key each time switches the selection in the following sequence:
ABC (upper case) abc (lower case) !#
(symbols) ABC (upper case) 5 Press F6 [SAVE] to save the file name. Pressing F7 [CANCEL] discards the edited information and returns the display to the USB/File Management menu screen. Copying Files to a PC Files that are stored in the built-in memory of this transceiver can be copied to a PC. Connect the USB-B connector on the rear panel of this transceiver to a PC using a commercially available USB cable.
(See 1-4) 1 Select Copy Files to PC (via USB Cable) in the 2 Press F4 [SELECT]. USB/File Management menu. A screen for selecting the files to copy is displayed. 3 Press F2 [
4 Press F5 [
]/ F3 [
are not copied.)
] or turn the [MULTI/CH]
] to select the checkbox to the left
] again deselects the checkbox. (Files control to select the items to copy. of the settings data name. Pressing F5 [
Pressing F6 [CLR.ALL] deselects all the checkboxes. Select at least 1 item to copy from the following. Description Settings data file Audio files of manual and full-time recordings Audio files of timer recordings TX equalizer data files RX equalizer data files Display Configuration Files Audio Files (RX_REC) Audio Files (TIMER_REC) Equalizer Files (TX_EQ) Equalizer Files (RX_EQ) Communication Log Files (CW) CW communication log files Communication Log Files (FSK) RTTY communication log files Communication Log Files (PSK) PSK communication log files Screen capture image files Screen Captured Files KNS Log Files KNS communication log files 5 Press F4 [OK]. A screen indicating preparing to copy is displayed. A confirmation tone is output once the copy preparation is completed and a PC on copy standby screen is displayed. Then, a removable device with the name TS-890 appears on the PC. When the built-in memory is selected as the destination for saving files and while manual recording or CW/RTTY/
PSK communication log recording is in progress, selecting a file to copy followed by pressing F4 [OK] will result in an error and an unable to copy message will be displayed. Pressing F7 [CANCEL] while the preparing to copy screen is displayed starts the cancel copy operation. When the cancel copy operation is complete, the display returns to the USB/File Management menu screen. After the preparing to copy screen is displayed, a confirmation tone is output once the copy preparation is completed and a copy standby screen is displayed on the PC. Then, a removable device with the name TS-890 appears on the PC. When a remote user is logged in via the KNS function and the communication log is set to ON, selecting KNS Log Files and pressing F4 [OK] will result in an error and an unable to copy message will be displayed. 11-4 6 Access the removable device named TS-890 from the PC and copy the files or folders to the PC. 7 After copy is complete, remove the removable device (TS-890) safely from the PC. The files may not be copied successfully if the proper steps to remove the device safely from the PC are not observed. 8 Press F4 [EXIT]. A confirmation screen on the batch deletion of files is displayed. Items for which the checkboxes are selected on the screen for selecting the files to copy can be deleted from the built-in memory. Pressing and holding F4 [(DELETE)] executes the file Pressing F7 [KEEP] leaves the files intact and returns the deletion operation. display to the USB/File Management menu screen. Deleting Files (Built-in Memory) Follow the steps below to delete settings data or audio data from the built-in memory. Deletion will apply to the function folders that contain the corresponding files. 1 Select Delete Files (Internal Memory) in the USB/
2 Press F4 [SELECT]. File Management menu. A screen for selecting the files to delete is displayed.
]/ F3 [
.3 Press F2 [
4 Press F5 [
] or turn the [MULTI/CH]
] to select the checkbox to the left
] again deselects the checkbox. (Files control to select the items to delete. of the settings data name. Pressing F5 [
Pressing F6 [CLR.ALL] deselects all the checkboxes. Select at least 1 item to delete. Pressing F7 [CANCEL] returns the display to the USB/File are not deleted.) Management menu screen. 5 Press F4 [OK]. A file deletion confirmation screen is displayed. 6 Press F4 [OK]. File deletion starts. Pressing F7 [CANCEL] returns the display to the file deletion confirmation screen without deleting the files. When the built-in memory is selected as the destination for saving files and the item to be deleted coincides with an item for which manual recording or CW/RTTY/PSK communication log recording is in progress, pressing F4
[OK] will result in an error and an unable to delete message will be displayed. When a remote user is logged in via the KNS function and the communication log is set to ON, selecting KNS Log Files as an item to delete and pressing F4 [OK] will result in an error and an unable to delete message will be displayed. USB/FILE MANAGEMENT 11 Formatting a USB Flash Drive The USB flash drive needs to be formatted by this transceiver before it can be used. USB flash drives cannot be recognized if they are not formatted by this transceiver. Formatting a USB flash drive using this transceiver erases all data that exist in the USB flash drive. As such, make sure to save the necessary data to a PC or other external data storage devices before deleting.
(USB-A) 1 Insert the USB flash drive into the
>> starts to blink and lights up when the USB flash drive 2 Select Format USB Flash Drive in the USB/File 3 Press F4 [SELECT] to start formatting. connector.
<<
is recognized by this transceiver. Management menu. A message to confirm the start of the formatting process is Pressing F7 [CANCEL] ends the operation without displayed. formatting the USB flash drive. 4 Press F4 [OK]. When formatting is complete, the display returns to the USB/
File Management menu screen. Copying Files to a USB Flash Drive Files that are stored in the built-in memory of this transceiver can be copied to a USB flash drive. Insert a USB flash drive formatted using this transceiver into 1 Select Copy Files to USB Flash Drive in the USB/
2 Press F4 [SELECT]. File Management menu. A screen for selecting the files to copy is displayed.
(USB-A). 3 Press F2[
4 Press F5 [
] or F3[
are not copied.)
], or turn the [MULTI/CH]
] to select the checkbox to the left
] again deselects the checkbox. (Files control to select the items to copy. of the settings data name. Pressing F5 [
Pressing F6 [CLR.ALL] deselects all the checkboxes. The items that can be copied are the same as those in the table in Copying Files to a PC. Select at least 1 item. Copy starts and a copy in progress screen is displayed. After file copying is complete, a confirmation screen on the batch deletion of files is displayed. Items for which the checkboxes are selected on the screen for selecting the files to copy can be deleted from the built-in memory. Pressing and holding F4 [(DELETE)] executes the file Pressing F7 [KEEP] leaves the files intact and returns the deletion operation. display to the USB/File Management menu screen. 5 Press F4 [OK]. 11-5 11 USB/FILE MANAGEMENT If the number of files exceeds 255 while copy is in When removing the USB flash drive, make sure to progress, the copy operation stops. execute Safe Removal of USB Flash Drive. 4 Press F4[OK]. The USB flash drive can now be removed. Pressing F7 [CANCEL] while copying is in progress If the same file on the source location is also found in the destination USB flash drive, the latter file will be overwritten. If there is insufficient memory in the USB flash drive for all the files to be copied, pressing F4 [OK] will result in an error and Insufficient Memory Size will be displayed on the screen. starts the cancel copy operation. When the cancel copy operation is complete, the display returns to the USB/File Management menu screen. communication log recording is in progress, selecting a file to copy followed by pressing F4 [OK] will result in an error and an unable to copy message will be displayed. When a remote user is logged in via the KNS function and the communication log is set to ON, selecting KNS Log Files and pressing F4 [OK] will result in an error and an unable to copy message will be displayed. While manual recording or CW/RTTY/PSK Safely Removing the USB Flash Drive When removing a USB flash drive from this transceiver, make sure to follow the steps below to remove the device safely. Failure to do so may result in the damage of the USB flash drive, settings data files and audio data files or malfunction of this transceiver. 1 Select Safe Removal of USB Flash Drive. 2 Press F4 [SELECT]. A message on the safe removal of the USB flash drive is displayed. Pressing F7 [CANCEL] ends the operation without performing the safe removal of the USB flash drive. 3 Press F4 [OK]. Safe removal starts. 11-6 12 VOICE MESSAGE/AUDIO FILE Recording/Playing a Voice Message This transceiver comes with a function for recording, playing and transmitting standard voice messages as well as a function for recording and playing audio that is transmitted or received. Voice messages can be recorded to a maximum of 6 channels. Messages recorded with a microphone can also be transmitted. This is handy during DX-pedition or contest operation where repeated calls need to be made over a long period of time or for adjusting an antenna or transceiver by transmitting a test radio wave. The maximum recording time is 100 seconds. In other words, recording to all the channels is possible up to a duration of 100 seconds in total. Recording a Voice Message Follow the steps below to record a voice message to a voice message channel (TX CH 1 to TX CH 6). 1 Press the mode key to select either SSB, FM or AM 2 Press F2 [TX MSG] to display the Voice Message mode. screen. VOICE MESSAGE/AUDIO FILE 12 6 Releasing F4 [REC] ends the recording and saves the voice message. Recording ends automatically when the total recording time of all channels exceeds 100 seconds even when the F4 [REC] key is still pressed down. This transceiver does not allow continuous voice message recording using multiple channels. When a new message is recorded, the voice message that already exists on the channel will be overwritten. Registering a Name for a Voice Message Recorded voice messages can be assigned with a name. 1 Press F2 [TX MSG] to display the Voice Message screen. 3 Press and hold the function key (F2 [CH 1] to F7 [CH 6]) corresponding to the channel for storing the voice message. A message to confirm the start of voice message recording appears. If F2 [CH 1] to F7 [CH 6] is not displayed, press F1
[MORE]. 2 Select the voice message to name. 3 Press F6 [NAME]. Doing so enables editing of the voice message name. 4 Use the function keys, [MULTI/CH] control or USB keyboard to input the characters. Key F1 [SPACE]
F2 []/ F3 [+]
]/ F5 [
F4 [
F [BACK SPACE]
Operation Inserts a space. Selects a character.
] Moves the cursor. F [DEL]
Deletes the character to the left of the cursor. Deletes the character to the right of the cursor. Switches the type of character to edit. Pressing the key each time switches the selection in the following sequence:
ABC (upper case) abc (lower case)
!# (symbols) ABC (upper case) 5 Press F6 [SAVE] to save the name of the voice message. Pressing F7 [CANCEL] discards the input characters and exits the editing mode for the voice message name. F [CHAR]
path. Setting Value
.4 Press F2 [REC IN]. Pressing F2 [REC IN] each time switches the audio input MIC (default)/ ACC 2/ USB/ LAN To adjust the recording level, turn the [MIC] control. Adjust the recording level while monitoring the peak recording level on the recording level meter such that the peak does not show in the red zone. 5 Press and hold F4 [REC]. Pressing F7 [CANCEL] ends the recording. Recording continues and the recording time of the voice message is displayed while F4 [REC] is pressed and held down. 12-1 The following operations are possible while a voice message is being transmitted. Operation Behavior Press F5
[REPEAT]. Press F4 [
STOP]. Press [ESC]. Plays back and transmits the voice message repeatedly. Pressing F5 [REPEAT] again ends repeat playback and transmission, and returns this transceiver to the RX mode.
<<
>> lights up while repeat playback is in progress. The time interval for repeating the transmission can be configured. Stops transmission of the voice message and closes the voice message transmission screen. Closes the Voice Message screen and ends transmission of the voice message. Deleting a Voice Message Follow the steps below to delete a recorded voice message. 1 Select a channel that contains the voice message to be deleted. 2 Press and hold F7 [(DELETE)] to delete the selected voice message. Configuring the Time Interval for Repeated Transmission The time interval for repeating playback of a voice message can be configured. Configure in Menu [5-16] CW/Voice Message Retransmit Interval Time Setting Value 0 to 10 (default) to 60 [s] (1 step) Configuring to a larger value lengthens the playback interval. 12 VOICE MESSAGE/AUDIO FILE Playing Back a Voice Message Follow the steps below to play back a recorded voice message. 1 Select a voice message channel to play back. 2 Press F4 [PLAY] to play back the voice message. The voice message playback screen appears. The following operations are possible while a voice message is being played back. Operation Behavior Press and hold F6 [FF
]. Press and hold F2 [
REW] . Press F3 [
PAUSE]. Press F3 [
PLAY] while playback is paused STOP]. Press F4 [
Press [ESC]. the normal speed. the normal speed. Fast forwards the voice message. Release the key to resume playback at Rewinds the voice message. Release the key to resume playback at Pauses the voice message. Resumes playback from the position where it was paused. Stops the playback of voice message. Closes the Voice Message screen and ends the playback. Adjusting the Playback Volume Configure the volume level when playing back a voice message. Configure in Menu [1-01] Voice Message Volume
(Play) Setting Value Off/ 1 to 10 (default) to 20 (1 step) Configuring to a larger value raises the volume level. Selecting Off mutes the playback sound. When TX monitor is ON, the voice message is output as the TX monitor audio so the volume changes in tandem with the TX monitor level. please refer to (8-3). For more details on adjusting the TX monitor level, Sending a Voice Message A recorded voice message can be transmitted while it is being played back. 1 Press F2 [TX MSG] to display the Voice Message screen. 2 Press and hold the function key (F2 [CH 1] to F7 [CH 6]) corresponding to the channel that contains the voice message to be transmitted. A voice message playback screen is displayed, and the voice message is transmitted. Turning the [MIC/PITCH] control while transmission of a voice message is in progress enables the gain level of the microphone used exclusively for the voice message to be adjusted. 12-2 Recording/Playing Voice Communication This transceiver can be used to record voice communication or play back the recordings. Recording functions that can be used on this transceiver are as follows. Manual Recording Voice recordings up to 9 hours per file can be stored in the built-
in memory of this transceiver. As the built-in memory is also used by other functions, the maximum recording time varies depending on the remaining space available. Voice data up to 18 hours per file can be recorded when a USB flash drive is used. If recording continues for a duration longer than 18 hours per file, a new file will be created upon reaching 18 hours and recording will continue. Full-time Recording This recording function records the most recent voice data up to the last 30 seconds to an audio file. Timer Recording (USB Flash Drive Only) This function records audio based on the preconfigured duration and conditions. For more details on the timer recording operation, please refer to Chapter 14 CLOCK DISPLAY/TIMER. If DC power is turned off during recording, the saving of the file recorded at that time is not guaranteed. To turn
] on the off the power during recording, do so using [
front panel. Manual Recording The [
communication using this transceiver. 1 Press [
] to start recording.
] and [
] keys can be used to start or stop recording of REC appears on the screen and the [REC] LED lights up. 2 Press [
] to end the recording. REC disappears from the screen and the [REC] LED light goes off. When the remaining memory at the destination for storing the file runs out while recording is in progress, a recording end tone is output and the recording ends automatically. VOICE MESSAGE/AUDIO FILE 12 Full-time Recording This recording function records the most recent communication audio up to the last 30 seconds. This allows the user to check the content of the most recent voice communication. Configuring the Maximum Duration for Full-time Recording Configure in Menu [6-00] Playback Time (Full-time Recording) Setting Value Last 10/ Last 20/ Last 30 (default) [s]
Saving Full-time Recording Audio
]. Press and hold [
The <<[REC]>> LED starts to blink for 1 second. The most recent audio until [
] is pressed and held down is recorded to the built-in memory or USB flash drive according to the preconfigured maximum duration (number of seconds) for full-time recording. Pressing F1 [RX PLAY] or F2 [TX MSG] does not activate full-time recording if manual recording is in progress. When the remaining memory at the destination for storing the file is running out, a Insufficient memory space message is displayed on the screen and recording ends automatically. When the squelch did not open for a duration longer than the preconfigured recording time, pressing and holding
[
] does not activate recording. Audio Recording in Tandem with Squelch Recording of the RX audio can be activated in tandem with the squelch operation. Configure in Menu [6-01] Recording with Squelch Setting Value Off/ On (default) Off: Performs recording even when a signal is not received. On: Performs recording only when the squelch opens. (Closing the squelch while recording is in progress pauses the recording operation.) When Recording with Squelch is enabled, the REC remains lit even when the squelch is closed. Also, the REC remains lit even if the squelch has not opened at all. (In this case, a file will not be generated when recording ends.) 12-3 To change the folder to browse, press F1 [FOLDER]. Files recorded using the timer-recording reservation function are stored in the TIMER_REC folder, while all other recordings are stored in the RX_REC folder. 3 Press F2[
]/ F3[
4 Press F4 [PLAY] or [
] or turn the [MULTI/CH]
] to play back the audio file. control to select the audio file to play back. The following operations are possible while an audio file is being played back. Operation Press and hold F5 [FF
]. Press and hold F2 [
REW] . Press F3 [
PAUSE]. Press F7 [NEXT
]. PREV]
PREV]
Press F1 [
twice quickly. Press F1 [
once. Press F4 [
Press [ESC]. Turn [MULTI/CH]. STOP]. Behavior Fast forwards the audio file. Release the key to resume playback at the normal speed. Rewinds the audio file. Release the key to resume playback at the normal speed. Pauses the audio file. Pressing F3
[PLAY] while playback is paused resumes playback from the position where it was paused. Plays back from the beginning of the audio file that immediately precedes the audio file that is current playing. Plays back from the beginning of the audio file that immediately follows the audio file that is current playing. Plays back the currently playing audio file again from the beginning. Stops playback of the audio file. Exits the audio file playback screen and audio recording file list screen. Cueing is possible when 2 or more audio files are saved. RX audio is muted during playback of an audio file. When removing the USB flash drive, make sure to Transmission is also disabled. execute Safe Removal of USB Flash Drive. (See 11-6) 12 VOICE MESSAGE/AUDIO FILE Quick Playback This function allows playback of the most recent manual recording or full-time recording audio file. Playback Press [
] to play back the most recent audio file. PLAY and the playback progress bar appear. The selected audio file is played back when the audio file screen is displayed. Pausing Playback Press [
<<
>> lights up.
] during playback to pause the audio file. Pressing [
] again resumes the playback. Stopping Playback Press [
The light of
] to stop playback of the audio file. PLAY and that of the playback progress bar goes off. Adjusting the Playback Volume Turn the [AF] control to adjust the playback volume. Audio Recording File Screen Audio files saved via manual recording, full-time recording or timer recording can be operated on this screen. Playing Back an Audio File Follow the steps below to play back audio files that are stored in the built-in memory or a USB flash drive. To use a USB flash drive, insert it into
(USB-A) in advance and check to ensure that it is recognized by this transceiver. 1 Press F1 [RX PLAY] to display the audio recording 2 Press F7 [INT.MEM] or F7 [USB MEM] to toggle file screen. between the screens for the built-in memory and USB flash drive. Pressing F7 [INT.MEM] displays the audio file (built-in Pressing F7 [USB MEM] displays the audio file (USB flash memory) screen. Internal is shown on the screen. drive) screen. USB is shown on the screen. 12-4 VOICE MESSAGE/AUDIO FILE 12 Renaming an Audio File The name of audio files saved via manual recording, full-time recording or timer recording can be changed. 1 Press F1 [RX PLAY] to display the audio recording file screen. 2 Press F2[
] or turn the [MULTI/CH]
control to select the audio file for which the name is to be changed. 3 Press F5 [NAME].
]/ F3[
.4 Use the function keys, [MULTI/CH] control or USB keyboard to enter a name. Key F1 [SPACE]
F2 []/ F3 [+]
F4 [
]/ F5
]
[
Operation Inserts a space. Selects a character. Moves the cursor. F [DEL]
F [CHAR]
F [BACK SPACE] Deletes the character to the left of the cursor. Deletes the character to the right of the cursor. Switches the type of character to edit. Pressing the key each time switches the selection in the following sequence:
ABC (upper case) abc (lower case) !#
(symbols) ABC (upper case) 5 Press F6 [SAVE] to save the file name. Pressing F7 [CANCEL] discards the information entered and exits the audio file name input mode. When removing the USB flash drive, make sure to execute Safe Removal of USB Flash Drive. (See 11-6) Deleting an Audio File Follow the steps below to delete audio files that are stored in the built-in memory or a USB flash drive. To use a USB flash drive, insert it into
(USB-A) in advance and check to ensure that it is recognized by this transceiver. 1 Press F1 [RX PLAY] to display the audio file screen. 2 Press F2[
]/ F3[
3 Press F6 [DELETE]. 4 Press F4 [OK] to delete the audio file. control to select the audio file to delete. A message to confirm deletion of the file is displayed. Pressing F7 [CANCEL] returns the display to the audio file
] or turn the [MULTI/CH]
screen without deleting the audio file. 12-5
. 12-6 13 VOICE GUIDANCE VOICE GUIDANCE 13 This transceiver comes with a voice guidance that sends out a voice notification of the operating status that is displayed on the screen. The voice guidance content is described in the following style in this manual. Voice Numeric values and alphabets The actual voice guidance content is enclosed in quotation marks ( ). Content of the voice guidance is described collectively using numeric values and alphabets. The actual voice guidance content is listed up using [ ]. Each option is separated from the other by a slash (/), and only one of the options will be uttered at a time. Options Voice Guidance Pressing the PF key that is assigned with the voice guidance function outputs a guidance voice on the operating status from the built-in speaker. The following 4 types of voice guidance are available. VOICE1 Announces the current frequency and operating status. The default setting is [PF A]. VOICE2 Announces the status of the S meter and power meter. The default setting is [PF B]. VOICE3 Announces the status of the meter selected in F [METER] except for the power meter. The default setting is [PF C]. Auto Announce Announces automatically when a specific operation is performed or upon entering a specific status. The default setting is OFF. Adjusting the Voice Guidance Volume Adjust the volume level of the voice guidance. When the voice guidance volume is set to OFF, pressing the corresponding PF key does not output a voice guidance announcement from this transceiver. Configure in Menu [1-03] Voice Guidance Volume Setting Value Off/ 1 to 10 (default) to 20 (1 step) Configuring to a larger value raises the volume level. Adjusting the Voice Guidance Speed Adjust the speed of the announcement. Configure in Menu [1-04] Voice Guidance Speed Setting Value 1 (default) to 4 (1 step) The larger the value, the faster the speed of the announcement. (1:1x (normal speed), 2:1.15x, 3:1.3x, 4:1.45x) Increasing the voice guidance speed may sometimes cause the audibility to deteriorate depending on the content of the announcement. Configuring the Voice Guidance Language The voice guidance language can be configured to English or Japanese. Configure in Menu [1-05] User Interface Language
(Voice Guidance & Messages) English (default)/ Japanese Setting Value Auto Voice Guidance When auto voice guidance is set to ON, a voice guidance is automatically output when a specific operation is performed. Configure in Menu [1-06] Automatic Voice Guidance Off (default)/ On Setting Value When this function is in the OFF status, turning on the power of this transceiver while pressing down the [PF A] key turns on [Auto Voice Guidance]. in the following sequence. When auto voice guidance is ON, voice guidance is output
*1 : Announces the VFO (A or B) that is currently operating.
*2 : X is uttered when XIT is ON, R is uttered when RIT is ON, and XR is announced followed by the RIT/XIT frequencies when both XIT and RIT are ON. The numeric values of the RIT/XIT frequencies are announced in sequence starting from the kHz digit. Point is uttered after the kHz value. If the frequency is a negative value, Minus is uttered at the beginning. CW Reverse/ FSK Reverse/ PSK Reverse/ FM Data/ AM Data]
the announcement.
*4 : When in the SWL mode, SWL is added to the beginning of
*3 : [USB/ LSB/ CW/ FSK/ PSK/ FM/ AM/ USB Data/ LSB Data/
This Operation on Transceiver When powering on Switching between VFO A and VFO B Switching between the VFO mode and memory channel mode Memory shift Switching to the quick memory channel mode Switching of the memory channel in the memory mode (except when the Memory Channel List screen is displayed) Key Operation Content of Voice Guidance
-
[A/B]
[M/V]
V]
VFO]
[M F [M
[Q-MR]
Turn
[MULTI/CH]
Announces the data used for operation regardless of the status of the setting screen. (Refer to Voice 1.) Outputs announcements according to the operating status after switching. (Refer to Voice 1.) Announces the data used for operation. (Refer to Voice 1.) Announces the details of the quick memory channel mode. (Refer to Voice 1.) Blank channel:
Channel + Number + Blank Simplex mode:
Channel + Number + Frequency +
([X/ R/ XR] + RIT/XIT Frequency) *2 Split mode:
Channel + Number + Split +
Frequency + ([X/ R/ XR] + RIT/XIT Frequency) *2 13-1 Key Operation Content of Voice Guidance Key Operation Content of Voice Guidance Simplex mode:
Quick + Number + [A/ B]*1 Frequency + ([X/ R/ XR] + RIT/XIT Frequency) *2 Split mode:
Quick + Number + Split + [A/
B]*1 Frequency + ([X/ R/ XR] +
RIT/XIT Frequency) *2 Enter Numeric value that is entered Frequency entry history Lock + [On/ Off]
Split + [On/ Off]
Split + Enter Minus TX + [Plus/ Minus]* + Numeric value that is entered + Kilohertz
* Pressing the keys from [1] to [9]
adds a Plus utterance, while pressing [0] + ([1] to [9]) adds a Minus utterance. TX + Finalized TX frequency Low + Frequency Width + Options High + Options power + Value Shift + Options When drive output is ON: TX When drive output is OFF:
When the transverter is ON and TX Power Down with Transverter Enabled is On: TX power + 5 In all other cases: TX power +
Value (The value shows a value up to the TX output power limit if the TX output power limiter is operating.) When adjusting microphone gain: Mic. Gain + Value When adjusting the speech processor output level:
Processor+ Out + Value
* No voice is output during adjustment of the sidetone/pitch frequency. Operation on Transceiver This
[DELAY] control operation Turn [DELAY]
[KEY] control operation Timer function ON/OFF operation Dimmer switching Antenna switching Band Direct selection Calling up the preconfigured emergency frequency Turn [KEY]
F [TIMER]
F [DIMMER]
F2 [DIMMER]
F [ANT]
Band Direct keys (including operation of
[GENE]) PF [Emergency Frequency]
Meter switching F [METER]
Error/warning messages
(none) When adjusting the break-in delay time: Full + Break-in in the case of FULL-BK DELAY: Break-in delay +
Displayed value in the case of 1 to 20 When adjusting VOX delay:
VOX delay + Value When adjusting the keying speed: Keying speed + Value Timer + [On/ Off]
D + Numeric value (single digit) Antenna + Number Frequency Emergency + Frequency Analog meter display (TX digital meter OFF): [Power/ SWR/ ID/
Processor/ ALC/ VD]
Analog meter display (TX digital meter ON): [SWR/ ID/ Processor/
VD/ TMP]
Digital meter display: [SWR/ ID/
Processor/ VD/ TMP]
Mini digital meter display: [Power/
SWR/ ID/ Processor/ ALC/ VD/
TMP]
Error or warning + Number For more details on the number, please refer to the Error Messages and Warning Messages lists. Voice 1 Voice 1 announces the displayed frequency, channel number, details of the respective configuration modes as well as the status of menu settings. Announces the digits of the VFO and memory channel frequencies which are higher than 10 Hz when fine tuning is OFF. Point is uttered after announcing the MHz digits. When a channel that does not contain any operating data is selected during memory scroll, Blank is uttered. Press the PF key that is assigned with VOICE1. Announces the operating status. Announces the setting value while configuration is in progress on the configuration screen. Pressing the PF key that is assigned with VOICE1, Altering the frequency by turning the Tuning or VOICE2 or VOICE3 during the announcement stops the announcement.
[MULTI/CH] control during an announcement stops the announcement. For more details on how to change the assignment of PF keys, please refer to PF Keys (Programmable Function Keys). progress. Announcement is not output while scanning is in 13 VOICE GUIDANCE Operation on Transceiver This Switching of quick memory channel Turn
[MULTI/CH]
Entering a frequency using the numeric keypad Entering a channel number using the numeric keypad Switching the frequency entry history Switching frequency lock Switching split operation Configuring split frequency via numeric keypad operation When configuration of the split frequency using the Tuning control is complete Change in the low cutoff frequency Change in the width Change in the high cutoff frequency Change in the shift frequency
[ENT]
Press a key on the numeric keypad Turn
[MULTI/CH]
[LOCK]
[SPLIT]
Press and hold
[SPLIT]
When [0] is first pressed Numeric keypad
[SPLIT] (After configuration using the Tuning control) Turn [LO/
WIDTH]
Turn [LO/
WIDTH]
Turn [HI/SHIFT]
Turn [HI/SHIFT]
Change in the TX output power Turn [POWER]
[MIC/PITCH]
control operation Turn [MIC/
PITCH]
13-2 VOICE GUIDANCE 13 Pressing VOICE1 outputs an announcement as follows. The content of the announcement varies with the screen that is being displayed. Announcements Related to Operating Frequency (Including Content of Auto Announcements) Screen VFO mode *4 Memory channel mode *4 Quick memory channel mode *4 During frequency entry During entry of memory channel no. When configuring the split frequency Operation/Status Simplex mode Split mode Blank channel Simplex mode Split mode Simplex mode Split mode Before numeric keypad input Input in progress During confirmation When entry is canceled When entry history is selected During 1-digit input During 2-digit input Pressing and holding SPLIT When [0] is first pressed When the numeric keypad ([1]
to [9]) is operated Content of Announcement
[A/ B]*1 Frequency + ([X/ R/ XR] + RIT/XIT Frequency) *2 Split + [A/ B]*1 Frequency + ([X/ R/ XR] + RIT/XIT Frequency) *2 Channel + Number + Blank Channel + Number + Frequency + ([X/ R/ XR] + RIT/XIT Frequency) *2 Channel + Number + Frequency + ([X/ R/ XR] + RIT/XIT Frequency) *2 Quick + Number + [A/ B] + Frequency + ([X/ R/ XR] + RIT/XIT Frequency) *2 Quick + Number + Split + [A/ B]*1 Frequency + ([X/ R/ XR] + RIT/XIT Frequency) *2 Enter The numeric value that is most recently input (Point is also uttered after announcing the MHz digits. A pause is inserted for the kHz digit.)
[A/ B] + Frequency No announcement Frequency entry history Enter + Number 1st digit + 2nd digit + [Frequency/Blank]
Split + Enter Minus TX + [Plus/ Minus]* + Numeric value that is entered + Kilohertz
* Pressing the keys from [1] to [9] adds a Plus utterance, while pressing [0] + ([1] to
[9]) adds a Minus utterance. Announcements during Display of Configuration Screens (Including Content of Auto Announcements) Screen Auto mode AGC settings Equalizer Equalizer adjustment Confirmation of equalizer copy Operation/Status Screen launch When [VOICE1] is pressed When a selection is made When frequency is copied to the list Switching between ON/OFF When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When value is changed When AGC speed is switched AGC OFF When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When a selection is made via key operation When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When a selection is made When value is changed via key operation Initialization When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed Content of Announcement Auto + Frequency at the top of the list + Mode *3 Auto + Frequency Selected frequency + Mode *3 Copy + Copied frequency + Mode *3 Auto + [On/ Off]
AGC + [Fast/ Middle/ Slow/ Off] (+ Value) Value
[Fast/ Middle/ Slow] + Value AGC + Off
[RX/TX] + Equalizer + (HB1/ HB2/ FP/ BB1/ BB2/ F/ C/ U1/ U2/ U3)
[HB1/ HB2/ FP/ BB1/ BB2/ F/ C/ U1/ U2/ U3]
[RX/TX] + Equalizer + Adjustment
[0/0.3/0.6/0.9/1.2/1.5/1.8/2.1/2.4/2.7/3.0/3.3/3.6/3.9/4.2/4.5/4.8/5.1] (+ [+/-]) + Value +
dB ([+/-] is not uttered when it is 0 dB.)
(+/-) + Value + dB ([+/-] is not uttered when it is 0 dB) No announcement Copy + Are you Sure?
13-3 13 VOICE GUIDANCE Delete + Are you Sure?
Content of Announcement File + List + TX + Equalizer File + List + RX + Equalizer File + List + Data Year + Month + Day + Time (Announces the time stamp of the file) Operation/Status When the RXEQ screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When the TXEQ screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When the DATA screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When a selection is made When the file deletion confirmation screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed Name editing Edit When the file browsing location
[USB/ Internal]
is changed When screen is displayed or Read + Data + Selection when [VOICE1] is pressed When a selection is made ENV + [On/ Off]
(environment-dependent) When a selection is made (CW) CW + Message + [On/ Off]
When a selection is made (voice Voice + Message + [On/ Off]
message) Switching between ON/OFF
[On/ Off]
When screen is displayed or Please wait (Announcement is not output when reading data with RXEQ/TXEQ.) when [VOICE1] is pressed When screen is displayed or Completed when [VOICE1] is pressed When screen is displayed or USB + Connect when [VOICE1] is pressed When screen is displayed or Completed when [VOICE1] is pressed When screen is displayed or Moduration-Source + [Mic. + PTT/ Data + PTT]
when [VOICE1] is pressed Switching method of
[Mic. + PTT/ Data + PTT]
transmission Specification of audio input line
[F/ R]
(Front/Rear) (</>) Front input selection F4
[Off/ Mic.]
[SELECT]
Rear input selection F4
[Off/ ACC 2/ USB/ LAN]
[SELECT]
Switching DATA VOX between Data + VOX + [Off/ ACC two/ USB/ LAN]
ON/OFF When screen is displayed or
[VOX gain/ Anti- + VOX gain/ VOX delay] + [Mic./ ACC two/ USB/ LAN] + Value when [VOICE1] is pressed Switching of audio source input
[Mic./ ACC two/ USB/ LAN]
Switching the parameter to
[VOX gain/ Anti- + VOX gain/ VOX delay]
configure Increasing or decreasing the Value setting value Reset to default value No announcement When screen is displayed or
[TX power + Limit + [SSB/ CW/ FSK PSK/ FM AM/ Data]/ [TX Tune] + Band + Value when [VOICE1] is pressed The band is [1.8/ 3.5/ 5/ 7/ 10/ 14/ 18/ 21/ 24/ 28/ 50] + Mega Hertz TX output power type selection [TX power + Limit + [SSB/ CW/ FSK PSK/ FM AM/ Data] / TX Tune]
Band selection Increasing or decreasing TX output power Reset to default value When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed Effect selection Switching between Input and Output Increasing or decreasing the value
[1.8/ 3.5/ 5/ 7/ 10/ 14/ 18/ 21/ 24/ 28/ 50/ 70] + Mega Hertz Value No announcement Processor + [Soft/Hard] + [In/Out] + Value
[Soft/ Hard]
[In/ Out]
Value Screen Selection of file to read Selection of data to read
(DATA) Processing (without CANCEL key) Data reading complete Request to get ready the USB flash drive Data saving complete TX audio source input settings VOX level configuration TX output power limiter configuration Speech processor configuration 13-4 VOICE GUIDANCE 13 Screen CW message (paddle version) Standby for CW message
(paddle) registration During CW message registration CW message (text version) RTTY communication PSK communication RTTY/PSK message CW + Message CW + Message Content of Announcement Channel + Number (+ Repeat) (+ Blank) Repeat + [Off/ On]
Number + Repeat + Blank No announcement No announcement No announcement No announcement Operation/Status When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed
(deselected) When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed
(selected) Switching of repeat mode Switching of channel Switching of playback list Delete When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When [VOICE1] is pressed When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed
(deselected) When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed Channel + Number (+ Repeat) (+ Blank) (+ Contest number)
(selected) Switching of repeat mode Repeat + [Off/ On]
Switching of channel Number (+ Repeat) (+ Blank) (+ Contest number) No announcement Switching of playback list Delete No announcement Subtraction of contest number Contest numbers Channel message editing When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed
(deselected) When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed
(deselected) Switching of channel AUTO TX mode switching AUTO RX mode switching Message editing (including when [VOICE1] is pressed) Edit RTTY + Communication PSK + Communication
[RTTY/ PSK] + Message Channel + Number + Auto + TX + RX Number Auto + TX + [Off/ On]
Auto + RX + [Off/ On]
Message + Edit In the case of log file selection screen (CW):
Log + File + CW In the case of log file selection screen (RTTY):
Log + File + RTTY In the case of log file selection screen (PSK):
Log + File + PSK Year (2018 to 2099) + Month + Day + Time Delete + Are you Sure?
Edit
[USB/ Internal]
Log + View Tone + Frequency Frequency Tone + Scan Frequency CTCSS + Frequency Frequency CTCSS + Scan Frequency Log file selection Log View FM tone frequency configuration FM CTCSS frequency configuration When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When a selection is made File deletion confirmation Name editing When the file browsing location is changed When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed Change in frequency Start of TONE scanning During TONE scanning or when
[VOICE1] is pressed End of TONE scanning When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed Change in frequency Start of CTCSS scanning During CTCSS scanning or when [VOICE1] is pressed End of CTCSS scanning 13-5 13 VOICE GUIDANCE Screen FM cross tone frequency configuration RX filter configuration Audio peak filter configuration NB1/ NR1/ NR2 level configuration NB2 level configuration
(Standard size) Bandscope
+ Waterfall
(Standard size) Bandscope screen
(Enlarged size) Bandscope
+ Waterfall Audio scope Multi scope Bandscope (upper screen)/
audio scope (lower screen) Operation/Status When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed TONE/CTCSS switching Change in frequency When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed Switching of filter Switching of roofing filter Switching of shape factor Configuring or clearing preset passband characteristics Switching of audio filter width When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When a selection is made Switching of shift frequency Switching of gain level When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed Reset to default value Switching of setting value When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed Switching of type When a selection is made Reset to default value Switching of value When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed Content of Announcement Cross-Tone + [Tone/ CTCSS] + Frequency
[Tone/ CTCSS]
Frequency RX + Filter + [A/ B/ C] + [R/ IF/ AF] + Options
[A/ B/ C]
[Auto/ 270 + Hertz/ 500 + Hertz/ 2.7 + Kilohertz/ 6 + Kilohertz/ 15 + Kilohertz]
[Soft/ Medium/ Sharp]
No announcement
[Narrow/ Medium/ Wide]
APF + [Narrow/ Medium/ Wide]
[Narrow/ Medium/ Wide]
Shift (+ [+/-]) + Value + Hertz Gain (+ [+]) + Value + dB Noise blanker + 1 + Value Noise reduction + 1 + Value Noise reduction + 2 + Value No announcement Value Noise blanker + 2 + A + Value or Noise blanker + 2 + B + Level + Value or Noise blanker + 2 + B + Width + Value or Noise blanker + 2 + B + Depth +
Value
[A/ B]
[Level/ Width/ Depth]
No announcement Value Bandscope Bandscope Bandscope Audioscope Audioscope 13-6 VOICE GUIDANCE 13 Screen Operation/Status When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed Content of Announcement During normal selection Blank channel: Memory + List + Number + Blank Simplex mode: Memory + List + Number + Frequency Split mode: Memory + List + Number + Split + Frequency During selection of data writing destination Blank channel: Memory + In + Number + Blank Simplex mode: Memory + In + Number + Frequency Split mode: Memory + In + Number + Split + Frequency Blank channel: Number + Blank Simplex mode: Number + Frequency Split mode: Number + Split + Frequency Memory channel list Confirmation for deletion of all quick memory data Group configuration for Memory Scan Configuration of segment for Program Scan Configuration of Program Slow Scan points Voice message Voice message recording standby When a selection is made Registration or pasting of data No announcement Input of start frequency for specific band segments (Input of end frequency) Erasing channel data Name input Lockout mode switching When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When a selection is made Switching between ON/OFF Switching between All ON/All OFF When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When a selection is made Switching between ON/OFF Switching between VFO Scan/
Program Scan Switching between All ON/All OFF When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed During configuration of point frequency Batch delete When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When the editing screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed Switching of channel to edit Switching of repeat mode Deletion Name registration
(Including when [VOICE1] is pressed) When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed Switching of audio source input End + Frequency + Current frequency No announcement Edit Lockout + [On/ Off]
Quick memory + Clear + Are you Sure?
Memory + Scan + Group + Number + [On/ Off]
Number + [On/ Off]
[On/ Off]
Select + All Clear + All Program Scan: Program + Scan + Channel+ Number + [On/ Off]
VFO Scan: VFO + Scan Number + [On/ Off]
[On/ Off]
[VFO + Scan/ Program + Scan]
Select + All Clear + All Program + Slow + Scan + Operating frequency No announcement Clear + All Voice + Message Blank channel: Message + Number + Blank Registered channel: Message + Number (+ Repeat) Blank channel: Number + Blank Registered channel: Number (+ Repeat) Repeat + [Off/ On]
No announcement Edit Record + [Mic./ ACC two/ USB/ LAN]
[Mic./ ACC two/ USB/ LAN]
13-7 13 VOICE GUIDANCE Screen Operation/Status When screen is opened or when
[VOICE1] is pressed When a selection is made Folder switching (recording file/
timer) Switching memory File deletion confirmation
(Including when [VOICE1] is pressed) Editing of file name Request to get ready the USB flash drive
(Including when [VOICE1] is pressed) When screen is opened or when
[VOICE1] is pressed When a selection is made Switching memory Folder switching (between TIMER_REC and RXREC) File deletion confirmation
(Including when [VOICE1] is pressed) Name editing When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed Switching of setting item Start of setting value editing, movement of selection, input of setting value Switching of setting item
(Related to address) Switching of setting item
(Related to ID/Pass) Start of setting value editing, movement of selection (related to address) Input of setting value (related to address) Selection of setting value
(related to address) When a screen is displayed Group selection When screen is opened or when
[VOICE1] is pressed Item selection Start of Date and Time configuration Start of configuration Change in setting value When a screen is displayed When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When the sleep timer settings are changed Recording file (built-in memory) Recording file (USB flash drive) LAN menu CLOCK menu top CLOCK menu items display Acquisition of NTP date/time data Acquisition of NTP date/time data is complete Acquisition of NTP date/time data failed Timer configuration 13-8 Content of Announcement When browsing audio files:
Audio + File When browsing audio files of timer recordings:
Audio + File + Timer Year (2018 to 2099) + Month + Day + Time When browsing the built-in memory: Same as when a screen is displayed When browsing the USB flash drive: Refer to When a screen is displayed in Recording file (USB flash drive) Same as when the recording file (USB flash drive) screen is launched However, if the USB flash drive is not connected, refer to the Request to get ready the USB flash drive screen Delete + Are you Sure?
Edit USB + Connect When browsing audio files: Audio + File + USB When browsing audio files of timer recordings: Audio + File + USB + Timer Year (2018 to 2099) + Month + Day + Time Refer to the Recording file (built-in memory) screen When browsing a USB flash drive: Same as when a screen is displayed When browsing the built-in memory: Refer to When a screen is displayed in Recording file (built-in memory) Delete + Are you Sure?
Edit LAN + Menu + Item number (1 digit) + Settings Item number (1 digits) + Settings Value of selected position Item number (1 digit) + nnn + Point + nnn + Point + nnn + Point + nnn However, content is as follows when nnn is blank:
Item number (1 digit) + Blank Item number (1 digit) Value of selected position Numeric value that is entered Selected value Clock + Menu + Group + Group number (1 digit) Number Clock + Menu + Item number (2 digit) + Settings Item number (2 digits) + Settings Edit No announcement Description Clock + Update Completed Error + Number Programmable + Timer + Options Sleep Timer + Options VOICE GUIDANCE 13 Content of Announcement Programmable + Timer + [On/ Off]
Programmable + Timer + Repeat + [On/ Off]
Programmable + Timer + Day + [On/ Off]
Programmable + Timer + Mode + [Timer Off/ On/ Off/ Both/ Record]
Programmable + Timer + Start + Hour + Numeric value (2 digits) Programmable + Timer + Start + Minute + Numeric value (2 digits) Programmable + Timer + End + Hour + Numeric value (2 digits) Programmable + Timer + End + Minute + Numeric value (2 digits) Programmable + Timer + Frequency + Timer RX mode Announces the status of the selected position Timer + [On/ Off]
Repeat + [On/ Off]
Day + [On/ Off]
Mode + [Timer Off/ On/ Off/ Both/ Record]
Start + Hour + Numeric value (2 digits) Start + Minute + Numeric value (2 digits) End + Hour + Numeric value (2 digits) End + Minute + Numeric value (2 digits) Frequency + Timer RX mode Numeric value that is entered
[On/ Off]
[Timer Off/ On/ Off/ Both/ Record]
Description Completed Menu + Group + Group number (1 digit) Group + Group number (1 digit) SWL + On SWL + Off Menu + Group number (1 digit) + Item number (2 digits) + Setting Item number (2 digits) + Settings Screen Operation/Status When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed Program timer configuration When a selection is made When a setting value is input Switching between ON/OFF Mode switching Change in selected setting
([MULTI/CH] control/F4[+]/
F5[]/numeric keypad) When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed Group selection Upon entering SWL mode When SWL mode is OFF When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When a menu is selected During start of parameter editing
(Including when [VOICE1] is pressed) When a setting value is selected No announcement When a setting value is altered Selected value
[GROUP
[GROUP When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When an item is selected When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When switching the selection option When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When an item is selected Switching between check and uncheck Edit
]
]
Program timer configuration is complete Menu top Menu items display USB/file management menu Selection of destination to save files Selection of items to copy Group + Group number (1 digit) Group + Group number (1 digit) Announces the selected function item USB + File + Menu + [Remove/ Read + Configuration/ Save + Configuration/ Copy
+ File + PC/ Copy + File + USB/ Read + File/ Delete + File/ File + Save/ Format]
[Remove/ Read + Configuration/ Save + Configuration/ Copy + File + PC/ Copy + File
+ USB/ Read + File/ Delete + File/ File + Save/ Format]
File + Save + [Internal/ USB]
[Internal/ USB]
Announces the selected function item Copy + File + Select + [Configuration/ Audio/ Timer + Audio/ TX + Equalizer/ RX +
Equalizer/ CW + Log/ RTTY + Log/ PSK + Log/ S + C/ KNS + Log]
[Configuration/ Audio/ Timer + Audio/ TX + Equalizer/ RX + Equalizer/ CW + Log/ RTTY
+ Log/ PSK + Log/ S + C/ KNS + Log]
[Off/ On]
13-9 Operation/Status When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When an item is selected Switching between check and uncheck When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed Content of Announcement Announces the selected function item Delete + File + Select + [Configuration/ Audio/ Timer + Audio/ TX + Equalizer/ RX
+ Equalizer/ CW + Log/ RTTY + Log/ PSK + Log/ S + C/ KNS + Log]
[Configuration/ Audio/ Timer + Audio/ TX + Equalizer/ RX + Equalizer/ CW + Log/ RTTY
+ Log/ PSK + Log/ S + C/ KNS + Log]
* S+C: Screen Captured Files
[Off/ On]
Format + Are you Sure?
When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed Please wait 13 VOICE GUIDANCE Screen Selection of items to delete Formatting confirmation When formatting in progress screen is displayed or during other ongoing processes in general Unmount confirmation Unmount is complete When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed RESET menu items display When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed Advanced menu adjustment Advanced menu items display Standard reset confirmation When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When screen is displayed or Full reset confirmation when [VOICE1] is pressed When screen is displayed or VFO reset confirmation when [VOICE1] is pressed Memory reset confirmation When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When screen is displayed or Menu reset confirmation when [VOICE1] is pressed When screen is displayed or Reset in progress when [VOICE1] is pressed When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When a selection is made When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed Change in setting value When screen is displayed (No voice is output when [VOICE1]
is pressed) When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed Switching between ON/OFF Change in threshold level When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed Change in carrier level When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed Change in TX monitor level Touchscreen adjustment in progress Advanced menu license display Version display for advanced menu firmware Switching of operating environment data Error/warning message AGC quick recovery configuration TX monitor level configuration Carrier level configuration 13-10 Remove + Are you Sure?
Completed Menu Reset Memory Channel Reset VFO Reset Standard Reset Full Reset Standard Reset + Are you Sure?
Full Reset + Are you Sure?
VFO Reset + Are you Sure?
Memory Channel Reset + Are you Sure?
Menu Reset + Are you Sure?
Please wait Advanced + Menu + Item number (from 1 digit) Item number (from 1 digits) + Settings No announcement Value Touchscreen + Calibration License Numeric value + Point + 2-digit numeric value A + Waiting time + B + Are you Sure?
[Error/ Warning] + Number AGC Quick Recovery + [Off/ On] (+ Value)
[On/ Off]
Value Carrier + Value Value TX monitor + Value Value Screen CW communication Scope range configuration in Fixed mode TX output power limiter OFF confirmation Dimmer configuration Linear amplifier menu configuration KNS information KNS configuration KNS Users List
] is
]/ F4 [
Operation/Status When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed Contest number decrement When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When the position to configure is selected
(When F3 [
pressed) Altering of value When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed Band selection Linear amplifier ON/OFF Linear amplifier TX control Linear amplifier TX delay ON/OFF Linear amplifier TX delay time
(CW/FSK/PSK) Linear amplifier TX delay time
(SSB/AM/FM) Linear amplifier relay control Linear amplifier external ALC voltage When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When a selection is made When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When a selection is made When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed KNS user registration When a selection is made Frequency marker list Calling up the preconfigured emergency frequency Confirmation for batch deletion of files File deletion confirmation Switching between check and uncheck When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When a selection is made When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed When screen is displayed or when [VOICE1] is pressed VOICE GUIDANCE 13 Content of Announcement CW + Communication Subtracted contest number Bandscope + Configuration TX power + Limit + Off + Are you Sure?
D + Menu + Value (1 to 100)
* D: Dimmer
[D/L] + Value
*D: Display/ L: LED Value Linear Amplifier + Target bands of linear amplifier menu + Function name of focusing position + Setting
[HF/ 50/ 70 (E type only) + Mega Hertz]
[Off/On]
[Low/ High]
[Off/ On]
[5/ 10/ 15/ 20/ 25/ 30/ 35/ 40]
[5/ 10/ 15/ 20/ 25/ 30/ 35/ 40/ 45/ 50]
[Off/ On]
[-1/ -2/ -3/ -4/ -5/ -6/ -7/ -8/ -9/ -10/ -11/ -12]
KNS + Connect + [Off / User name]
KNS + Configuration + Item number (from 1 digit) + Settings KNS + User + List + User name of selected item*
User name of selected item*
* The registered user name is uttered one character at a time. Characters that cannot be uttered will be inserted with a pause. Blank is uttered if a user name is not registered. KNS + User + List + User name of selected item*
Name of selected item*
* The content of the announcement for the item name is as follows. User Name: User Passwoard: PASS (utters 1 character at a time) Description D RX Only: RX + [Off/ On]
Disabled: Disable + [Off/ On]
[Off/ On]
Frequency + Marker + List + [ON/OFF] + [Blank / Frequency] *
* Blank if no data is registered. Frequency when data is registered.
[Blank / Marker + Frequency]
Emergency + Frequency All + Delete + Are you sure?
Delete + Are you sure?
For more details on the option numbers when configuring the PF keys, please refer to List of Assignable Functions. When When the setting screen overlaps with messages on errors, warnings and other information, announcement will be output for Frequency value in the VFO mode is announced in sequence starting from the highest order digit that is being displayed. the higher order digit of the menu number or memory channel number is 0, 0 will also be uttered. the error, warning or information message. Point is uttered as a delimiter for MHz. 13-11 13 VOICE GUIDANCE Voice 2 Pressing the key that is assigned with VOICE2 announces the S meter and power meter values. For example, S5 or 20 dB will be announced in this case. Press [PF B] or the PF key that is assigned with VOICE2. Announces the S meter and power meter values. Pressing the PF key that is assigned with VOICE1, VOICE2 or VOICE3 during the announcement stops the announcement. For more details on how to change the assignment of PF keys, please refer to PF Keys (Programmable Function Keys). Even while an analog meter is displayed, the VOICE2 announcement changes according to the level when a digital meter is displayed (dot: 0 to 70). Content that is announced in the VOICE2 mode is as follows. S meter Level Content of Announcement Power Meter Level Content of Announcement 0 0 P 0 P 5 P 10 P 17.5 P 25 P 37.5 P 50 P 75 P 100 P 125 P 150 S 0 S 1 S 2 S 3 S 4 S 5 S 6 S 7 S 8 S 9 10 dB 20 dB 30 dB 40 dB 50 dB 60 dB 1 to 5 6 to 10 11 to 14 15 to 19 20 to 27 28 to 35 36 to 47 48 to 59 60 to 65 66 to 70 1 to 4 5 to 8 9 to 12 13 to 16 17 to 20 21 to 24 25 to 28 29 to 32 33 to 36 37 to 41 42 to 47 48 to 52 53 to 58 59 to 64 65 to 70 Voice 3 Pressing the key that is assigned with VOICE3 announces the meter values. Press [PF C] or the PF key that is assigned with VOICE3. Announces the meter value at the time when the key is pressed.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
VOICE3 makes announcement only during Pressing the PF key that is assigned with VOICE1, transmission. VOICE2 or VOICE3 during the announcement stops the announcement. For more details on how to change the assignment of PF keys, please refer to PF Keys (Programmable Function Keys). Even while an analog meter is displayed, the VOICE3 announcement changes according to the level when a digital meter is displayed (dot: 0 to 70). announcement is the same as that of the PWR meter in VOICE2. Pressing [VOICE3] while the voice message recording standby screen or the voice message recording in progress screen is displayed announces the value
(recording level) of the Recording Level Meter. Pressing [VOICE3] during configuration of the microphone gain in Advanced Menu [10] announces the value of the level meter. When the meter selected is PWR meter, the 13-12 Content that is announced in the VOICE3 mode is as follows. ALC Meter Content of Announcement SWR Meter COMP Meter Level 0 to 1 2 5 3 to 4 6 to 7 8 to 9 Content of Announcement Level R 1.0 0 R 1.1 R 1.2 R 1.3 R 1.4 R 1.5 1 to 9 10 to 19 20 to 34 35 to 50 51 to 57 Content of Announcement Level C 0 dB 0 C 5 dB C 10 dB C 15 dB C 20 dB C 25 dB 10 to 11 12 to 13 14 to 15 16 to 17 18 to 21 22 to 27 28 to 36 37 to 42 43 to 47 onwards 48 R 1.6 R 1.7 R 1.8 R 1.9 R 2.0 R 2.5 R 3.0 R 4.0 R 5.0 R OVER 58 onwards C OVER Announcement ID Meter TEMP Meter VD Meter Content of Announcement Level 0 to 25 26 to 60 onwards 61 Level 0 to 9 10 to 17 18 to 26 27 to 35 36 to 44 45 to 52 53 to 60 onwards 61 I 2.5 I 5 I 7.5 I 10 I 12.5 I 15 I 17.5 I 20 Content of Announcement Level Up to 46 T LOW 47 to 48 T MID T HIGH 49 to 51 52 to 55 56 to 58 59 to 61 62 to 64 onwards 65 Recording Level Meter/
Audio Lever Meter during FM Microphone Gain Configuration Content of Announcement Level A 0 A 1 A 2 A 3 A 4 A 5 A 6 A 7 A 8 A 9 A 10 A 11 A 12 A 13 A 14 A 15 A 16 A 17 A OVER Content of V LOW V 10 V 11 V 12 V 13 V 14 V 15 V HIGH 1 to 2 3 to 4 5 to 6 7 to 8 9 to 10 11 to 12 13 to 14 15 to 16 17 to 18 19 to 20 21 to 22 23 to 24 25 to 26 27 to 28 29 to 30 31 to 32 33 to 34 onwards 35 L 0 L 1 L 2 L 3 L 4 L 5 L 6 L 7 L 8 L 9 L 10 L 11 L 12 L 13 L 14 L 15 L 16 L 17 L OVER 0 1 to 2 3 to 4 5 to 6 7 to 8 9 to 10 11 to 12 13 to 14 15 to 16 17 to 18 19 to 20 21 to 22 23 to 24 25 to 26 27 to 28 29 to 30 31 to 32 33 to 34 35 onwards 14 CLOCK DISPLAY/TIMER Configuring Date and Time This transceiver can display 2 types of clocks. Local Clock Displays the current date and time. Auxiliary Clock Displays information such as the UTC clock. Displaying the Clock Menu Screen 1 Press [MENU] to display the menu screen. 2 Press F [CLOCK] to display the Clock menu screen. 3 Select Clock Menu [0] Date and Time. 4 Press F4 [SELECT]. The date/time configuration screen is displayed. Pressing F7 [CANCEL] while the date and time configurations for Local Clock is still in progress discards the settings and returns the display to the Date and Time configuration screen. Configuring the Local Clock Date The date of the local clock that is used for display or the time stamp in files can be configured as follows. 1 Select Clock Menu [00] Date (Local Clock). 2 Press F4 [EDIT]. 3 Use the function keys and the [MULTI/CH] control to select the date. Key F2 []/ F3 [+]
[MULTI/CH]
]/ F5 [
F4 [
]
Behavior Selects a setting value. Moves the cursor. The date and time is displayed in the parameter field of the Clock screen according to the Date Display Format setting. correction function using the NTP server is ON. The local clock cannot be configured when the auto time 4 Press F6 [OK]. CLOCK DISPLAY/TIMER 14 Configuring the Local Clock Time Follow the steps below to configure the local clock time. This is usually configured to the local time of the location where this transceiver is being operated. 1 Select Clock Menu [01] Time (Local Clock). 2 Press F4 [EDIT]. 3 Use the numeric keypad, function keys and the
[MULTI/CH] control to configure the time. A numeric value can be entered by pressing the corresponding key on the numeric keypad. F4 [
] Moves the cursor. Behavior Selects a setting value. Key/Control F2 []/ F3 [+]
[MULTI/CH]
]/ F5 [
4 Press F6 [OK]. Configuring the Local Clock Time Zone Follow the steps below to configure the time zone of the local clock. 1 Select Clock Menu [02] Timezone (Local Clock). 2 Press F4 [SELECT]. 3 Press F2 []/ F3 [+] or turn the [MULTI/CH] control to select the time zone of the local clock. Setting Value UTC-14:00 to UTC+00:00 (default) to UTC+14:00
(15min/step) 4 Press F6 [OK]. Configuring the Auxiliary Clock Time Zone Follow the steps below to configure the time zone of the auxiliary clock. 1 Select Clock Menu [03] Timezone (Secondary 2 Press F4 [SELECT]. 3 Press F2 []/ F3 [+] or turn the [MULTI/CH] control to select the time zone of the local clock. Clock). Setting Value UTC-14:00 to UTC+00:00 (default) to UTC+14:00
(15min/step) 4 Press F6 [OK]. Registering an Auxiliary Clock Identifier The auxiliary clock can be assigned with a single alphabet as an identifier. 1 Select Clock Menu [04] Secondary Clock 2 Press F4 [EDIT]. 3 Press F2 []/ F3 [+] or turn the [MULTI/CH] control Identification Letter. to select an identifier character. U is used in the default setting, which stands for Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). 4 Press F6 [OK]. 14-1 14 CLOCK DISPLAY/TIMER Configuring the Date Display Format The date display format can be configured as follows. 1 Select Clock Menu [05] Date Display Format. 2 Press F4 [SELECT]. 3 Select the preferred date display format. Setting Value MMM/DD/'YY (K type: default)/ DD/MMM/'YY (E type:
default)/ 'YY/MMM/DD 4 Press F6 [OK]. Configuring the Clock Display Follow the steps below to configure the types and number of clocks to display. 1 Select Clock Menu [06] Clock Display. 2 Press F4 [SELECT]. 3 Select the preferred time display format. Setting Value Off/ Local Clock/ Secondary Clock/ Both (default) Off: Does not display the clock. Local Clock: Displays only the local clock. Secondary Clock: Displays only the auxiliary clock. Both: Displays both the local clock and auxiliary clock. 4 Press F6 [OK]. Clock Correction Using NTP (Network Time Protocol) The NTP server can be used to correct the clock time automatically. This is done by applying the date and time acquired from the NTP server to the built-in clock of this transceiver. The following configuration procedures are needed to make use of the NTP function. Connect this transceiver to a network such as a home LAN via a LAN cable. To make use of an NTP server on WAN, allow communication to be established via the Network Time Protocol Port (port 123). For a home LAN that uses a broadband router, ensure that port 123 of the broadband router is open. Configure the network on this transceiver. Configure the network and IP address on this transceiver. For more details on the method of configuration, please refer to Configuring the IP Address. Configure the address of the NTP server. Configure the NTP server address of the time zone configured for the local clock on this transceiver. For more details on the method of configuration, please refer to Configuring the NTP Server Address. Displaying the Auto Correction Configuration Screen 1 Press [MENU] to display the menu screen. 2 Press F [CLOCK] to display the Clock menu screen. 3 Select Clock Menu [1] Automatic Time 4 Press F4 [SELECT]. Correction. The auto correction configuration screen is displayed. Configuring the NTP Server Address Follow the steps below to configure the address of the NTP server. 1 Select Clock Menu [01] NTP Server Address. 2 Press F4 [EDIT]. 3 Use the function keys, [MULTI/CH] control or USB keyboard to enter the address of the NTP server. Key F2 []/ F3 [+]
]/ F5 [
F4 [
F [BACK SPACE]
F [DEL]
F [CHAR]
Behavior Selects a character.
] Moves the cursor. Deletes the character to the left of the cursor. Deletes the character to the right of the cursor. Switches the type of character to edit. Pressing the key each time switches the selection in the following sequence:
ABC (upper case) abc (lower case)
!# (symbols) ABC (upper case) 14-2 4 Press F6 [SAVE] to save the address. Pressing F7 [CANCEL] discards the input and restores this transceiver to the NTP server address setting input mode. The response time of the NTP server varies depending Search for the NTP server address using NTP server on the condition of the network and the NTP server. as the keyword. Turning ON/OFF Auto Clock Correction The date and time that is configured for the clock of this transceiver can be corrected by communicating automatically with the NTP server. 1 Select Clock Menu [00] Clock Correction using the 2 Press F4 [SELECT]. NTP Server. 3 Press F2 []/ F3 [+] to set auto correction to On or Off. When auto correction is set to On, communication is established automatically with the NTP server when the power
(
) of this transceiver is turned on and correction of the clocks date and time is performed. If the power (
) of this transceiver is left on, auto correction is performed at an interval of approximately 24 hours. The default setting is Off. 4 Press F6 [OK]. Correcting the Date and Time Manually The date and time that is configured for the clock of this transceiver can be corrected by connecting this transceiver manually to the NTP server. 1 Select Clock Menu [1] Automatic Time 2 Press F4 [SELECT]. Correction. CLOCK DISPLAY/TIMER 14 Timer This transceiver supports programmed operation using the following timer functions. The frequency and mode can be configured in the Program Timer screen. Power ON (Program Timer Configuration Screen) Turns on this transceiver with the preconfigured frequency and mode at the preconfigured timing. Power OFF (Program Timer Configuration Screen) Turns off this transceiver at the preconfigured time. Power ON and Power OFF (Program Timer Configuration Screen) Turns on or off this transceiver with the preconfigured frequency and mode and at the preconfigured timing. Timer Recording (Program Timer Configuration Screen) Records RX audio to the built-in memory or a USB flash drive during the interval between the preconfigured Power-on and Power-off time. Sleep Timer (Timer Configuration Screen) Turns off this transceiver after the preconfigured duration has elapsed. APO (Auto Power Off) (Menu [0-32]) Turns off this transceiver if there is no key or control operation for the preconfigured duration. Configuring the Program Timer Follow the steps below to configure the timing for powering on and off this transceiver as well as the operation of the program timer. 1 Press F [TIMER] on the menu screen to display the Timer configuration screen. 2 Press F3 [PROG] to display the Programmable Timer configuration screen. 3 Press F6 [UPDATE]. Communication with the NTP server starts, and the date and time configured for the clock of this transceiver is corrected. After correction is complete, a message is displayed to notify the user that communication with the NTP server has ended. Pressing F7 [CANCEL] while acquiring the date and time via NTP stops the acquisition process. The NTP server is a public server, please refrain from accessing it frequently. 3 Press F2 [
] to select the setting item. 4 Use the function keys and the [MULTI/CH] control
]/ F3 [
to configure the program timer. 14-3 14 CLOCK DISPLAY/TIMER Setting Item Timer Mode Repeat Day of the Week Power-on Time/
Power-off Time Frequency/
Mode Configuration Method
] to program the timer operation on preconfigured time. preconfigured time. preconfigured time. time. Press F4 [MODE] to select a timer operation. Power-on: Turns on this transceiver at the Power-off: Turns off this transceiver at the Power-on/off: Turns on this transceiver for the Record: Performs recording for the preconfigured Off: Disables timer function. Press F4 [ON/OFF] to toggle the repeat mode between ON and OFF. On: Operates the timer at the preconfigured days every week. Off: Operates the timer only once at the preconfigured day. Press F4 [
a specific day of the week. Timer operation is enabled only on the days for which the corresponding checkbox is selected. Press F4 []/ F5 [+] or the numeric keypad, or turn the
[MULTI/CH] control to configure the time for turning on and off this transceiver using the timer. Configure the time to a value between 00:00 and When Power-on is selected, the power-on time When Power-off is selected, the power-off time Press F5 [COPY] to configure the frequency and mode to start up in by the timer. Turn the Tuning or [MULTI/CH] control or use the Band or Mode key to change the current receiving VFO or memory channel and align it with the frequency/mode for performing reception when the program timer is activated. frequency or mode to start up by the timer. 23:59. can be configured. can be configured. Press F5 [COPY] every time when changing the 5 Press F6 [OK]. The configuration complete screen appears. The programmed timer operation is now enabled. (<<
>>
lights up.) Returns to the Timer menu screen. 6 Press F6 [OK]. 7 Press [ESC] to end the process. 8 If the timer (excluding Power-off timer) is set to ON, If a timer mode other than Off is configured, the [POWER]
LED lights up in orange.
] to power off this transceiver. press [
Timer recording up to a duration of 4 hours can be Program timer can be configured even when F6 [OK] in Before pressing F5 [COPY] to copy the operating data that is registered in the memory channel, press [M>V] to shift the operating data of the memory channel to VFO. Configure settings other than frequency and mode before pressing F5 [COPY] in step 5. When programming the timer recording function, there must be an interval of at least 1 minute from the time recording starts (Power-on time) to the time recording ends (Power-off time). Otherwise, programmed recording cannot be performed. configured. step 4 is pressed after the preconfigured interval has elapsed. To record audio to a USB flash drive, insert the USB flash drive into the (USB-A) connector on the front panel after configuring the timer recording settings and before recording starts. Use a USB flash drive that is formatted by this transceiver and one with sufficient remaining space. is powered off. LED starts blinking 1 minute before timer recording starts, and pressing [
this transceiver. If the power of this transceiver is not in the OFF state when timer recording is ON, a message will be displayed 3 minutes and 1 minute before timer recording starts. Press [
The [POWER] LED light remains orange during timer recording, while the [REC] LED lights up in red. To cancel timer recording after the [POWER] LED starts blinking and before timer recording starts, press and hold [
While timer recording is in progress, all other operations are disabled until timer recording stops. To cancel timer recording, press [
] and follow the displayed message to press and hold down F4 [(BREAK)] . If the sleep timer is configured, the operation of the program timer function will be temporarily disabled. If the power-off time configured in APO is earlier, the power of the transceiver is turned off by the APO function. Timer recording does not starts unless this transceiver When the power of this transceiver is OFF, the [POWER]
] in this state does not power on
] to power off this transceiver.
] for 4 seconds. Pausing Program Timer Operation The program timer can be paused while the timer is running. Power shutdown at the Power-off time Start of timer recording Power shutdown by the sleep timer After the program timer is paused, pressing F [TIMER] resumes the program timer operation.
>> goes off, and countdown by the sleep timer or Press F [TIMER].
<<
program timer is paused. Pressing F [TIMER] again illuminates <<
countdown by the sleep timer or program timer.
>> and resumes 14-4 CLOCK DISPLAY/TIMER 14 Sleep timer Sleep timer is a function for powering off this transceiver after the preconfigured interval has elapsed. Configuring the Sleep Timer 1 Press F [TIMER] on the menu screen to display the Timer configuration screen. APO (Automatic Power Off) APO is a function that powers off this transceiver when there is no key or control operation in the RX mode for the preconfigured time interval. CHECK is output in the Morse code from the speaker 1 minute before the power of this transceiver turns off. Configure in Menu [0-32] Automatic Power Off Setting Value Off (default)/ 60/ 120/ 180 [min]
Upon reaching the preconfigured APO time, a timer power off screen is displayed and the power shuts down after 10 seconds. Operating any of the keys while the timer power off screen is displayed turns off the APO setting. 2 Press F5 [SLEEP] and select the duration before powering off this transceiver.
<<
>> lights up. Setting Value Off (default)/ 5/ 10/ 15/ 30/ 60/ 90/ 120 [min]
Select Off if the sleep timer is not used. 3 Press [ESC] to end the process. Pausing the Sleep Timer The sleep timer can be paused while the timer is running. Press F [TIMER].
<<
is temporarily disabled.
>> goes off, and automatic power-off by the sleep timer Pressing F [TIMER] again disables or resumes both the If the power-off time configured in APO is earlier, the sleep timer and programmable timer. power of the transceiver is turned off by the APO function. 14-5
. 14-6
1 2 | Users Manual 4 | Users Manual | 1.64 MiB |
Broadband Router or Hub PC 1 ARCP-890 Radio Control Program Internet TS-890 Carrier and Service Provider Ethernet Cable
(Straight Type) PC 2 ARHP-890 Radio Host Program
Internet Broadband Router Broadband Router LAN Connection Remote PC with ARCP-890 TS-890
Internet Broadband Router Broadband Router Hub LAN Connection Remote PC with ARCP-890 VoIP Application Host PC VoIP Application Voice TS-890
Internet Broadband Router Broadband Router Hub LAN Connection Remote PC with ARCP-890 Host PC with ARHP-890 TS-890
Broadband Router Hub LAN Connection ARCP-890 TS-890
UP DOWN PF1 22 k PF2 100 k PF3 22 k PF4 100 k
3.5 mm plug EXTP2 EXTP1 GND R1 1.5 k R2 1.5 k R3 2.2 k R4 4.7 k PF1 PF2 PF3 PF4 R5 1.5 k R6 1.5 k R7 2.2 k R8 4.7 k PF5 PF6 PF7 PF8
TX/RX End Sub-receiver Split Operation Simultaneous Reception of TX Frequency
9-pin D-SUB Female 9-pin D-SUB Male TM-D710/ TM-D710G RC-D710 + TM-V71 TS-890 RC-D710 + PG-5J TM-D700 9-pin D-SUB Female PG-5G 8 7 9-pin D-SUB Connector
(Solder Side)
(Female) RXD TXD GND COM Terminal 2.5mm-Three-pronged Plug TH-D72
TS-890S 7-pin DIN Plug TL-922 GND RL CONT MKE ALC COM 2 1 4 6 5 7 3 GND REMOTE Connector
(View from Rear Panel)
Connect to either ANT 1 or 2. TS-890S 7-pin DIN Plug Linear Amplifier
(Commercially Available) RF INPUT RF OUT GND ALC TX Control AC100~240V 50/60Hz REMOTE Connector
(View from Rear Panel)
(RX)
(TX) MKE ALC 10 ON during Active High/transmission: 12 V ON during Active Low/transmission: L COM 2 1 4 6 BRK 5 7 3 LKY GND
0 1
TS-890S TM-D710GA/
TM-D710A/
TM-V71A TM-D700A PKS PSQ ANI ANO PR1 SQC PKD PKS
VHF Frequency Audio UHF Frequency Audio Control Command Response Audio Control Command Response Commander Transporter
fsidetone = 700[Hz]
+
8 [ppm]
(700
+
0.006 [Hz])
fdisplay [MHz]
19.2 [MHz]
freference + 700[Hz]
fAF =
x freference Reference Frequency Shift
FUSE 4A
2018
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2018-07-31 | 0.1 ~ 60 | CSR - Scanning Receiver | Original Equipment |
2 | JBP - Part 15 Class B Computing Device Peripheral |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 | Effective |
2018-07-31
|
||||
1 2 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
JVC KENWOOD Corporation
|
||||
1 2 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0008154510
|
||||
1 2 | Physical Address |
Communications Systems Division 1-16-2, Hakusan, Midori-ku
|
||||
1 2 |
Communications Systems Division
|
|||||
1 2 |
Yokohama-shi, Kanagawa-ken, N/A
|
|||||
1 2 |
Japan
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 | TCB Application Email Address |
t******@pctest.com
|
||||
1 2 | TCB Scope |
A1: Low Power Transmitters below 1 GHz (except Spread Spectrum), Unintentional Radiators, EAS (Part 11) & Consumer ISM devices
|
||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 | Grantee Code |
K44
|
||||
1 2 | Equipment Product Code |
512000
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 | Name |
T******** S********
|
||||
1 2 | Title |
Manager
|
||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
045-9********
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
045-9********
|
||||
1 2 |
s******@jvckenwood.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 | Firm Name |
PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc.
|
||||
1 2 | Name |
R**** O********
|
||||
1 2 | Physical Address |
6660-B Dobbin Road
|
||||
1 2 |
Columbia, Maryland 21045
|
|||||
1 2 |
United States
|
|||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
410-2********
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
410-2********
|
||||
1 2 |
t******@pctest.com
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Equipment Class | CSR - Scanning Receiver | ||||
1 2 | JBP - Part 15 Class B Computing Device Peripheral | |||||
1 2 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | Scanning Receiver | ||||
1 2 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 2 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
1 2 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | Yes | ||||
1 2 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 | Firm Name |
Intertek Japan K.K.(Kashima Laboratory)
|
||||
1 2 | Name |
J**** O********
|
||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
81-29********
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
81-29********
|
||||
1 2 |
j******@intertek.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15B | 0.10000000 | 60.00000000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 15B | 16 CC |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC